■>. 


.Oj\^ 


'^ 


IMAGE  EVALUATION 
TEST  TARGET  (MT-3) 


/. 


"i   ' 


U  I 


4  ! 


A- 
a*      ) 


^ 


V] 


^^ 


'<-? 


1.0 


mU     12.5 


I.I 


11.25 


Phol 
Sciaices 
Corporation 


K 


■ii  Si   12.2 

S  Hi   1^ 
£   KS    12.0 


13. 


U   11.6 


23  WEST  MAIN  STREET 

WEBSTER,  N.Y.  MS80 

(716)  S73-4503 


^J^>^ 


■t. 


CIHM/ICMH 

Microfiche 

Series. 


CIHIVI/ICMH 
Collection  de 
microfiches. 


Canadian  Institute  for  Historical  Microreproductions  /  institut  Canadian  de  microreproductions  historiques 


Technical  and  Bibliographic  Notes/Notes  techniques  et  bibliographiques 


The  Institute  has  attempted  to  obtain  the  best 
original  copy  available  for  filming.  Features  of  this 
copy  which  may  be  bibliographically  unique, 
which  may  alter  any  of  the  images  in  the 
reproduction,  or  which  may  significantly  change 
the  usual  method  of  filming,  are  checked  below. 


L'Institut  a  microfilmd  le  meilleur  exemplaire 
qu'il  lui  a  6t6  possible  de  se  procurer.  Les  ddtails 
de  cet  exemplaire  qui  sont  peut-dtre  uniques  du 
point  de  vue  bibliographique,  qui  peuvent  modifier 
une  image  reproduite,  ou  qui  peuvent  exiger  une 
modification  dans  la  mdthode  normale  de  filmage 
sont  indiqu^s  ci-dessous. 


f 


I 


D 
D 
D 


Coloured  covers/ 
Couverture  de  couleur 

Covers  damaged/ 
Couverture  endommag^e 

Covers  restored  and/or  laminated/ 
Couverture  restaurde  et/ou  pellicul6e 


pyj    Cover  title  missing/ 

l/\J    Le  titre  de  couverture  manque 

□    Coloured  maps/ 
Cartes  gdographiques  en  couleur 


Coloured  ink  (i.e.  other  than  blue  or  black)/ 


I I    Encre  de  couleur  (i.e.  autre  que  bleue  ou  noire) 

□    Coloured  plates  and/or  illustrations/ 
Planches  et/ou  illustrations  en  couleur 


m 

p 


D 


D 


Bound  with  other  material/ 
Reli6  iwec  d'autres  documents 

Tight  binding  may  cause  shadows  or  distortion 
along  interior  margin/ 

Lareliure  serrde  peut  causer  de  I'ombre  ou  de  la 
distortion  le  long  de  la  marge  int6rieure 

Blank  leaves  added  during  restoration  may 
appear  within  the  text.  Whenever  possible,  these 
have  been  omitted  from  filming/ 
II  se  peut  que  certaines  pages  blanches  ajoutdes 
lors  d'une  restauration  apparaissent  dans  le  texte, 
mais,  lorsque  cela  dtait  possible,  ces  pages  n'ont 
pas  6t6  film^es. 

Additional  comments:/ 
Commentaires  suppidmentaires; 


□   Coloured  pages/ 
Pages  de  couleur 

□    Pages  damaged/ 
Pages  endommagdes 

□    Pages  restored  and/or  laminated/ 
Pages  restaurdes  et/ou  pellicul6es 

I — I    Pages  discoloured,  stained  or  foxed/ 


D 


Pages  d6colordes,  tachet6es  ou  piqu6es 

Pages  detached/ 
Pages  d^tach^es 


I      I    Showthrough/ 


Transparence 


□    Quality  of  print  varies/ 
Qualitd  in6g&le  de  I'impression 

I      I    Includes  supplementary  material/ 


Comprend  du  materiel  supptementaire 

Only  edition  available/ 
Seule  Edition  disponible 


Pages  wholly  or  partially  obscured  by  errata 
slips,  tissues,  etc.,  have  been  refilmed  to 
ensure  the  best  possible  image/ 
Les  pages  totalement  ou  partiellement 
obscurcies  par  un  feuillet  d'errata,  una  pelure, 
etc.,  ont  6t6  filmtes  d  nouveau  de  fa^on  d 
obtenir  la  meilleure  image  possible. 


This  item  is  filmed  at  the  reduction  ratio  checked  below/ 

Ce  document  est  film6  au  taux  de  rMuction  indiqu6  ci-dessous. 

10X  14X  18X  22X 


26X 


30X 


12X 


16X 


20X 


[id 

24X 


] 


28X 


32X 


3\ 


^jaiiSiaiMtiM'Jw""""'"'!'" 


^.^^j^'^i^^-m' 


I 


The  copy  filmed  here  hes  been  reproduced  thanks 
to  the  generosity  of: 

Library  of  Congress 
Photoduplication  Service 

The  images  appearing  here  are  the  best  quality 
possible  considering  the  condition  and  legibility 
of  the  original  copy  and  in  keeping  with  the 
filming  contract  specifications. 


L'exemplaire  film6  fut  reprodult  grdce  d  la 
gAn6rosit4  de: 

Library  of  Congress 
Photoduplication  Service 

Les  images  suivantes  ont  AtA  reproduites  avec  le 
plus  grand  soin,  compte  tenu  de  la  condition  et 
de  la  netteti  de  rexemplaire  film6,  et  en 
conformity  avec  les  conditions  du  contrat  de 
filmage. 


Original  copies  in  printed  paper  covers  are  filmed 
beginning  with  the  front  cover  and  ending  on 
the  last  page  with  a  printed  or  illustrated  impres- 
sion, or  the  back  cover  when  appropriate.  All 
other  original  copies  are  filmed  beginning  on  the 
first  page  with  a  printed  or  illustrated  impres- 
sion, and  ending  on  the  lasit  page  with  a  printed 
or  illustrated  impression. 


The  last  recorded  frame  on  each  microfiche 
shall  contain  the  symbol  — »•  (meaning  "CON- 
TINUED"), or  the  symbol  V  (meaning  "END"), 
whichever  applies. 

Maps,  plates,  charts,  etc.,  may  be  filmed  at 
different  reduction  ratios.  Those  too  large  to  be 
entirely  included  in  one  exposure  are  filmed 
beginning  in  the  upper  left  hand  corner,  left  to 
right  and  top  to  bottom,  as  many  frames  as 
required.  The  following  diagrams  illustrate  the 
method: 


Les  Oitempialres  originaux  dont  la  couverture  en 
papier  est  imprimie  sont  film6s  en  commenqant 
par  le  premier  plat  et  en  terminant  soit  par  la 
derniftre  page  qui  comporte  une  empreinte 
d'impression  ou  d'illustration,  soit  par  le  second 
plat,  selon  le  cas.  Tous  les  autres  exemplaires 
originaux  sont  film^s  en  commenpant  par  la 
premiere  page  qui  comporte  une  empreinte 
d'impression  ou  d'illustration  et  an  terminant  par 
la  derniAre  page  qui  comporte  une  telle 
empreinte. 

Un  des  symboles  suivants  apparaitra  sur  la 
dernidre  image  de  cheque  microfiche,  selon  le 
cas:  le  symbols  —►  signifie  "A  SUIVRE  ",  le 
symbols  ▼  signifie  "FIN  ". 

Les  cartes,  planches,  tableaux,  etc.,  peuvent  dtre 
film6s  A  des  taux  de  reduction  diff6rents. 
Lorsque  le  document  est  trop  grand  pour  Atre 
reproduit  en  un  seul  clich6,  il  est  filmA  d  partir 
de  Tangle  supirieur  gauche,  de  gauche  d  droite, 
et  da  haut  en  bas,  en  prenant  le  nombre 
d'images  nAcessaire.  Les  diagrammes  suivants 
illustrent  la  m^thode. 


1 

2 

3 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

Mini 


■  ■'i^':*^wag!tai*aMWte='- 


^■:€i 


I 


.O'- 


S] 


t      ■  ■    ')  • 


.^f 


*■;,.<• 


■  ■^'r'f1''i'''<*''^Wfe-.     .. 


i 


£>. 


^. 


d^ 


SECOND    llEVISIiU    EDITION. 

MITCHELL'S    PRIMARY    GEOGRAPHY. 


AN 


EASY   INTllODUCTION 

TO   TIIE 

STUDY  OF  GEOGRAPHY: 

DESIO.VED   FOR  THE 

INSTRUCTION  OF  CHILDREN 

t  I^  SCHOOLS  AND  FAMILIES. 


.jf 


ILLUSTRATED     B  V 

ONE    HUNDRED    AND   TWENTY   ENGRAVINGS. 

.      '   AND 
FOURTEEN   MAPS. 


BY  S.  AUGUSTUS^'mITCHELL. 

PHILADELPHIA: 
THOMAS,   COVVPERTHWAIT   & 
1849. 


I,  ,] 


]4 


t  ;■! 


(i      <k 


I:*- 


i,|IMiiiW  imiii  I  I  i;  I 


I'wiy 


ADVERTISEMENT  TO  THE  SECOND  REVISED  EDITION. 

In  order  to  increase  the  usefulness  of  the  Primary  GEOOUAi-uy,  and  to  ren- 
der it  still  more  deserving  of  the  extensive  patronage  which  it  has  everywhere 
received,  the  puhlishcrs  have  embraced  the  opportunity  of  a  new  revision  of  the 
work  to  augment  its  size,  so  that  the  book  k  now  a  third  larger  than  m  any  of 
the  preceding  editions.  The  original  arrangement  is,  however,  strictly  pro- 
served,  the  text  being  printed  very  nearly  verbatim,  and  page  for  page  with  the 

earlier  impressions. 

The  Maps  for  the  present  edition  have  all  been  re-drawn  and  re-cngravecl, 
and  being  extended  in  dimensions  to  correspond  with  the  text,  the  engraver  has 
thereby  been  enabled  to  increase  the  size  of  the  lettering,  so  as  to  render  it  still 
more  clear  and  distinct  than  before. 

In  this  revision  the  author  has  also  duly  noticed  such  new  facts  dcpcnde-.t  on 
recent  changes  in  different  parts  of  the  earth,  as  are  applicable  to  a  treatise  of 
this  kind.  In  America,  the  acquisition  of  Upper  California  and  New  Mexico 
by  the  United  States,  together  with  the  organization  of  the  New  Territory  of 
Minnesota;  and  in  Europe,  the  adoption  of  a  new  form  of  government  by  the 
French,  and  other  similar  changes,  have  all  been  appropriately  treated. 

The  present  edition  of  the  Geogiaphy  is  printed  from  new  stereotype  plates; 
for  in  consequence  of  the  extensive  sale  of  the  work,  and  the  desire  to  preserve 
ununpaired  its  original  style  and  appearance,  the  plates  have  been  renewed  for 
the  third  time  since  its  first  publication  in  the  year  1840. 

October  1,  1849. 


Entered,  according  to  the  Act  of  Congress,  in  the  year  1849,  by 

S.  AUGUSTUS  MITCHELL, 

In  the  Clerk's  office  of  the  District  Court  of  the  United  States  for  the 

Eastern  District  of  Pennsylvania. 


PKINTED    DY    S  M  1 T  n    AND    PF.TKKS, 

Fmuklin  Buildings,  61h  St.,  bo.  w  Aroli. 


(9) 


'I 
inst 
will 
<;asj 
terii 
Enc 

T 

whii 
Rea 
own 

T 

totl 

IX!S! 

whe 

with 

In 

type 
asce 
that 
grrad 
vane 

Tl 
have 
cum! 
purpi 


^sH 


1(1  to  reu- 
crywhoro 
ou  of  tho 
in  any  of 
ictly  prc- 
(  with  tho 

<!iigravod, 
Travel-  has 
der  it  still 

icnde-it  on 
Tcatisc  of 
2W  Mexico 
crritory  of 
cnt  by  the 
d. 

rpe  plates; 
to  preserve 
enewcd  for 


the 


(2) 


PREFACE. 


Tub  following  work  is  dcsigne*!  as  a  first  book  of  Geography,  to  be  used  in  the 
instruction  of  children  in  Families  and  Schools,  as  soon  as  they  can  spoil  and  read 
with  facility.  The  Author  has  endeavoured  to  render  it  simple  in  arrangement,  and 
easy  of  comprehension.  He  has  also  aimed  at  making  the  descriptive  matter  charac- 
teristic and  concise;  to  embody  it  in  short  sentences  and  paragraphs,  and  in  plain 
English,  without  being  trifling  or  childish. 

The  Primary  Ghooraphy  forms  the  commencement  of  a  Series  of  School  Books, 
which,  in  connection  with  Mitchell's  School  Geography  and  Atlas,  Geographical 
Reader,  and  High  School  Geography  and  Atlas,  will  elucidate  the  Geography  of  our 
own  and  the  other  countries  of  the  earth. 

The  work  is  divided  into  eighty-four  Lessons,  seventy-seven  of  which  are  devoted 
to  f,he  illustration  of  Geography,  and  seven  relate  to  Astronomy.  A  few  of  the  first 
Ixissons  are  arranged  partly  in  the  method  of  Question  and  Answer;  and  in  these, 
where  the  Pupils  are  required  to  find  the  answers,  the  latter  are  numbered,  to  agree 
with  each  series  of  questions  respectively. 

In  the  first  three-fourths  of  the  book,  the  words  of  the  answers  are  printed  in  It»  ". 
type;  in  the  remainder,  there  is  no  such  distinction,  and  the  pupils  are  required  to 
ascertain  the  requisite  answers  by  their  own  discernment.  It  will  thus  be  perceived 
that  the  plan  of  the  Primary  Geography  is  to  lead  the  learner  forward  by  easy  and 
gradual  steps,  so  as  to  prepare  the  youthful  mind  for  an  introduction  into  a  more  od- 
vanced  study  of  this  important  science. 

The  engravings  in  the  Primary  Geography  are  nearly  all  from  original  designs,  and 
have  been  introduced,  more  with  reference  to  illustrating  remarkable  objects,  or  cir- 
cumstances connected  with  the  countries  to  which  they  are  attached,  than  for  the 
purpose  of  mere  ornauent. 

•  •:'  (iii) 


!•    1 


1*1 


.;■/   , 


HWPaSK:-.- 


t!l 


f 


iv 


PRKFACE. 


TI108C  representing  the  Landing'  of  tlic  Pilgrims,  William  Ponn's  Treaty  with  tlio 
Indians,  and  Pocahontas  savinff  tlio  lifo  of  Captain  Smith,  will  probably  impres«  the 
mind  of  tlio  Bcholar  more  forcibly  with  recollections  of  Now  England,  Ponnsylvanin, 
(ihd  Virginia,  than  any  description  whatever,  and,  perhaps,  in  many  cases,  will  prodnce 
u  i,crinarient  iinpresHion.  . 

The  whole  of  the  designs  will  be  found  to  be  of  tiie  same  illustrative  deflcription. 
and  elucidate,  it  is  believed,  in  nearly  all  cases,  some  characteristic  incident  or  event. 
Tiio  utility  of  appropriate  engravings,  associated  with  descriptive  Geography,  is  now 
generally  admitted ;  and  their  importance  in  communicating  more  clear  and  vivid 
ideas,  requires  but  little  argument. 

The  Primary  Geography  contains  Fourteen  Maps;  a  greater  number  than  is  to  be 
found  in  any  similar  book  hitherto  published.  These  are  made  ;)lain  and  distinct;  are 
specially  adapted  to  the  text,  and,  in  connection  with  the  lessons  attached  to  them, 
will  be  found  to  add  much  to  the  value  of  the  work. 

The  introduction  of  moral  and  religious  sentiments  into  books  designed  for  the  in- 
Mtruction  of  young  persons,  is  calculated  to  improve  the  heart,  and  elevate  and  expand 
Uie  youthful  mind ;  accordingly,  wherever  the  subject  has  admitted  of  it,  such  obser- 
vations have  been  made  as  tend  to  illustrate  the  excellence  of  the  Christian  religion, 
the  advantages  of  correct  moral  principles,  and  the  superiority  of  enlightened  institu- 
tions. 

The  Lessons  on  Astronomy,  at  the  close  of  this  little  work,  may  lead  the  youthful 
mind  to  contemplate  the  universe,  of  whi-^h  our  earth  is  but  a  part,  and  thus  form  an 
easy  introduction  to  a  knowledge  of  the  most  sublime  and  imposing  science  that  can 
be  presented  to  the  Pupil.  The  lessons  are  plain  and  easy.  They  are  made  as  free 
as  possible  from  abstruse  terms,  and  contain  descriptions  of  a  few  of  the  most  familiar 
and  striking  objects  connected  with  Astronomy. 


3. 

4. 

s. 

u. 

7. 

>i. 

It. 

10.  : 
n.  I 
u.  , 
1:).  ( 

14.  I 

15.  ( 

10.  ( 
J7.  ( 

IS.  I 
19.  I 
•M.  t 
iil.  I 

'.•a.  I 
•.':i.  I 

ii4.  ! 

S.5.  1 

as.  J 

•it.  e 

w.  \ 

a!i.  \ 

30.  A 

31.  J 
■Jti.  fi 
XI.  f, 

3^.  (i 
3.5.  J, 

3G.  G 

37.  H 

38.  II 
.TO.  II 

40.  II 

41.  11 
■»2.  H 

43.  g< 

44.  M 


r  with  the 
ipresH  tlio 
iiHylviinin, 
11  produce 


CONTENTS. 


escription, 
t  or  event. 
Iiy,  is  now 
and  vivid 


n  ia  to  be 
itinct;  are 
i  to  them, 


for  the  in- 
,nd  expand 
luch  obser- 
in  religion, 
led  institu- 


ic  youthful 
IS  form  an 
e  that  can 
ide  as  free 
)st  familiar 


iMMn  f 

I.  Of  ilwrurdirial  Points 7 

-.'.  orHic  Kurili rt 

3.  Of  llie  Hiirfiire  of  (lie  Karili u 

4.  Oflliu  VViitiir  nil  iliir  Karlli 11) 

5.  Of  Kivi'M ji 

<t.  Of  the  I.unil jij 

7.  I•i^i!^iollllof  ihe  Land j.i 

■?.  Of  IMomilaiiii,  itc ij 

!>.  SliniH!  onil  Sizo  of  the  Earth 13 

10.  M'>li.;iiiii]f  iho  (Jartli m 

11.  Of  I'lliiiate,  Ac ij 

li.  l'ro(liirliiin»  (if  tlio  Karlll li) 

13.  Of  ihu  I'enplc  ||iat  iiiiiabii  Iho  Eaith iil 

14.  rolilicul  Diviiiuiia gj 

15.  Of  Maim 94 

18.  Grand  Diviiiionii  of  Iho  Kurlli ia 

17.  Of  thi"  Ofoaii i>(j 

IB.  Map  of  tho  Weatcrn  Hfiriiiph.'re,  ic. , . .    'JO 

19.  Map  of  the  Eaaturn  lloniiapliero,  &c 31 

!iO.  Allltlhca ;y 

yi.  North  America 34 

'."i.  l/nitcdStatira ',     jm 

'i3.  fliiitud  Sinti'B  (continued) 38 

ii4.  Mapof  the  United  Btatea.ic 41 

S.5.  EaKterii  Htatca 43 

av  Middle  Slntea 44 

•J7.  Southern  Stntea 47 

'.•8.  VVeslcrii  Statea 49 

mi.  Western  Territories 5) 

30.  Map  of  the  Eastern  etntes,  *c M 

31.  Map  of  tho  Middle  States,  tc 53 

3SJ.  Mapof  tho  Southern  St.ntes,  4c 57 

33.  Map  of  Iho  Western  Slates,  *c 59 

34.  (Jreenland,  Brilii-h  .America,  tc QO 

3.5.  Mexico  and  Upper  California 68    ! 

3G.  Guatiniala  and  the  Weal  Indies 64     | 

37.  Map  of  North  America,  Jcc 67    ' 

38.  History  of  America 68     ' 

.19.  History  of  North  America 70    ] 

40.  Hixtory  of  the  United  States 71     { 

41.  History  of  the  United  States  (conlinued).     74    { 
4'2.  History  of  the  United  States,  ic 7B    ', 

43.  Sonth  America 78    j 

44.  Map  of  South  America,  &c 81    f 


J    4.'i.  New  Grenada,  Venexuela,  *« gg 

',     4<i   (.'lull,  lluenos  Ayrea,  Jtc M 

;     47.  IlKiory  of  Mouth  America 87 

',     4H,  Europe gg 

;     4!l.  Map  of  Europ    ic 93 

,    50.  Hvvuleij  und  .Norway,  Bu»»ia,  ic 114 

>     51.  rolaiiil.  Deiimiirk,  Holland,  Uelgiuin 97 

I    Sv*.  Great  llrilain,  England,  Walea US 

'     5,3.  Hrotliind,  Ireland,  ir ,....   |0i 

j     .Vl.  Spain,  I'ortiiKal,  and  (JerniBiiy 1U4 

5.1.  Hwiizerland  and  iMily KM 

I    3(1.  Ionian  Ki'public,  lircece,  and  Turkey... .  lOlt 
'    57.  Map  of  (Jentral  and  Southern  Europe....  113 

5tl.  Himory  of  Euriipo , 114 

5U.  Asia ]  16 

tiO.  Asiatic  Russia,  Turkey,  and  Syria 118 

61.  Palestine,  Arabia,  I'erfia,  ic 191 

CJ.  Tartary,  India,  and  llindouslan 123 

0,3.  llirinah.  ic,  China,  and  Japan va 

04.  MnpofAaia,  ic jjo 

05.  History  of  Asia iso 

06.  History  of  Asia,  ic.  (continued) ....  IM 

67.  AOica,  Harbary,  and  Egypt 134 

08.  Nubia,  Sene|{aniliia,  and  Guinea 137 

611.  Southern  Africa,  ic 140 

70.  Mapof  Africa,  ic J43 

71.  Hixtory  of  Africa 144 

78.  OceunicB ]4g 

73.  Polynesia 149 

74.  Map  of  Oceanica,  ic 153 

73.  Prouress  of  S(Kicty 134 

70.  Government 157 

77.  Religion  ]gg 

ASTRONOMV. 

75.  Astronomy ]63 

7!).  Solar  System 164 

eo.  OftheMoun ](j(| 

81.  Planets jQg 

82.  Tho  Planets ]69 

83.  The  Planets  and  Comets '. . . .  171 

84.  Fixed  Stars,  ic J73 


:>\  V. 


i 


ADDRESS  TO  THE  PUTIL. 

Myyouno  Fiuend:  — By  studying  thiH  little  booli"  with 
attention,  you  will  learn  many  things  that  will  please  and 
instruct  you  ;  you  will  read  alwut  the  country  wo  live  ni,  and 
what  grows  in  it,  how  it  is  divided,  and  what  rivers  and 
mountains  it  contains. 

You  will  also  learn  a  great  deal  al)out  other  countries,  and 
the  people  that  live  in  them :  you  will  be  taught  where  tea, 
coffee,  and  sugar  come  from,  and  what  parts  of  the  earth  fur- 
nish  us  with  oranges,  pine-apples,  figs,  almonds,  and  raisms. 
An  account  of  these  things  is  called  Geography,  a  word 
which  signifies  a  description  of  the  surface  of  the  earth.  This 
kind  of  knowledge  is  so  necessary,  that  those  who  are  not 
acquainted  with  it  are  reckoned  very  ignorant. 

Little  boys  and  girls,  although  they  may  never  have  been 
away  from  home,  can,  by  reading  this  and  other  books  of  the 
same  kind  that  the  Author  has  published  for  their  instruo- 
tion,  tell  about  the  people,  the  animals,  the  mountains  and 
rivers  of  all  the  countries  in  the  world.         - 

Many  young  persons  are  well  acquainted  with  Geography; 
they  obtain,  in  consequence,  the  respect  and  esteem  of  those 
who  are  older  than  themselves,  and  are  at  the  same  time 
regarded  with  pleasure  and  satisfaction  by  their  parents  and 
friends.  * 

(6) 


w 

tl 


y^ 

w. 
yo 
lei 


L|-  h'Hm  III  I  ■'  "  iTfcl*"-^""'"'  ''■■''  ^■'-  '"M""'"!^ 


■  with 
0  and 
n,  and 
'8  and 


)8,  and 
re  tea, 
th  fur- 
•aisins. 
[I  word 
.  This 
ire  not 

re  been 
!  of  the 
nstruo- 
ins  and 

;raphy; 
)f  those 
16  time 
nts  and 

(6) 


PRIMARY  GEOGRAPHY. 


LES80N  I. 
OF  THE  CARDINAL  POINTS. 

In  studyin-,^  CJcography,  the  first  thing  you  must  learn  is, 
which  way  'North,  i^mfli,  Kf^t  and  West  lie :  These  are  called 
the  Cardinal,  or  principal  points  of  the  compass. 

irORTH 


W  E  S  T 


EAST 


SOUTH 


The  sun  rises  »m  the.  East,  and  sets  'm  tlie  West,  Now  if 
you  stretch  your  arms  straight  out  from  your  body,  and  point 
with  your  right  hand  to  the  East,  the  West  will  be  *mi  ymir 
left  hand,  the  North  will  be  *  before  you,  and  the  South  "behind 
ymi. 

These  things  you  must  try  and  understand  well ;  for  un- 
less you  are  acquainted  with  the  Cardinal  points,  you  will 

(7) 


8 


PRIMARY  GEOGRAPHY. 


!  t 


!!■! 


not  bo  able  to  tell  in  what  direction  diflerent  countries  lie 
from  each  other. 

Now  answer  the  following  Questions  :  you  will  find  them 
easy,  as  the  words  which  form  the  answers  are  printed  in  a 
different  type,  and  numbered  to  correspond  with  the  ques- 
tions. 

Q.  1.  Which  are  tlic  Cardinal,  or  principal  points  of  the  compass  ? 

Q.  2.  Whore  does  the  sun  rise? 

Q.  3.  Where  docs  tlie  sun  set? 

Q.  4.  If  you  point  with  your  riglit  hand  to  the  oast,  where  will  the  west  be? 

Q.  5.  Where  will  the  north  be? 

Q.  6.  Where  will  the  south  be  ? 


■'  1,  '■'■ 


LESSON  2. 
OF   THE   EARTH. 

QuESTios.  What  do  mankind  inhabit? 
Answer.  The  surface  of  the  earth. 
Q.  "What  does  the  earth  form? 
A.  A  part  of  the  universe. 
(.1  Of  what  does  the  universe  consist? 
A.  The  heavens  and  the  earth. 
Q.  What  do  the  lieavens  comprise? 

A.  The  vast  space  around  the  earth,  which  contains  the 
sun,  moon,  and  stars, 

Q.  Who  made  the  imivcrse?  ,        '  .     '• 

xV.  God,  the  Creator  of  all  things. 


Mtetii 


»W<^'i''i»'^Wnfi''«<iw«  I 


at»i.MiBiiiar^"wwt.ii 


'ies  lie 

I  them 
eil  in  a 

i  que»- 


OF  THE  SURFACE  OF  THE  EARTH. 

"  In  the  beginning  God  created  the  heaven  and  the  earth."  —  Gen.  i.  1 
Q.  By  what  otiier  iiames  i.s  the  earth  caUed  ? 

A.  The  World,  and  the  Globe. 


*". 


west  be  ? 


lins  the 


LESSON  3. 

OF   THE    SURFACE    OF   THE   EARTH. 
Q.  What  is  the  earth? 
A.  One  of  the  planets. 
Q.  Of  what  does  the  surfiice  of  the  eaith  consist? 
A.  Land  and  water. 

Q.  How  much  of  the  earth's  surface  consists  of  land? 
A.  A  quarter,  or  one-fourth  part. 
Q.  How  much  more  water  than  land  is  there? 
A.  Three  times  more  water  than  land. 
Q.  What  is  the  chief  part  of  the  water  on  the  earth  called? 
A.  The  sea,  or  ocean. 

For  the  purpose  of  being  more  easily  understood,  different  parts  of  the  water 
are  called  by  different  names,  as  you  will  learn  in  the  next  lesson. 
Q.  Are  the  waters  of  the  sea  salt  or  fresh? 
A.  They  are  salt. 

Q.  What  part  of  the  waters  on  the  earth  are  fresh? 
A.  Lakes  and  rivers  have  generally  fresh  water.  - 
Thei«  are  a  few  lakes  and  rivers  whose  waters  are  salt. 


10 


PRIMARY  GEOGRAPHY. 


Ship.  Schooner. 

Vinw  of  the  Ocean. 


A  WhiOe. 


LESSON  4. 

OF    THE    WATER    ON    THE   EARTH. 

Q.  What  are  constantly  sailing  on  the  sea? 

A.  Ships,  steamboats,  and  other  kinds  of  vessels. 

Ships,  &c.,  are  used  for  carrying  people  and  merchandise  from  one  country  to 
another.  Many  vessels  and  fishermen  are  employed  on  the  sea  iu  killing  the 
great  whales,  and  catching  the  fishes  of  different  kinds  that  swim  in  ita  waters. 

Q.  By  what  names  are  different  portions  of  the  water  on  the  earth  called  ? 

A.  Oceans,  Seas,  Bays,  Gulfs,  and  Straits. 

Q.  What  is  an  Ocean? 

A.  The  Irrgest  extent  of  water.    . 

Q.  What  is  a  Sea?  ^ 

A.  An  extent  of  water  smaller  than  an  ocean. 


bi 

St 

le 


'ilbfease^ 


mtrj  to 
ing  the 
waters. 

lied? 


OF  THE  WATER  ON  THE  EARTH  H 

Q.  What  are  Bays  and  Gulfs? 

A.  They  arc  portions  of  the  sea  which  extend  into  the  hind. 
Q.  What  is  a  Strait? 

A.  A  narrow  passage,  which  connects  two  large  bodies  of 
water. 

Q.  What  is  a  Lake? 

A.  A  body  of  water  almost  entirely  surrounded  by  land. 


LESSON  5. 

OF    RIVERS. 
Q.  What  is  a  river? 

A.  A  large  stream  of  water. 

Rivers  usually  flow /rom  Springs,  that  rise  among  Iiills  and  mountains.  Their 
branches  are  called  Brooks,  and  Creeks.  The  branches  of  rivers  are  somelimes 
so  large  that  they  are  alio  called  rivers. 

The  Map  above  will  show  the  source  or  head  spring  of  a  river,  and  how  rivu- 
let."?, brooks,  creeks,  and  other  branches,  flow  into  rivers. 

Q.  From  what  9o  rivers  usually  flow? 

Q.  What  are  the  various  branches  of  rivers  called  ? 

Q.  What  is  said  of  the  largest  branches  of  some  rivers? 

Q.  Into  what  do  rivers  generally  flow,  or  empty  t»">ir  waters? 

A.  Into  the  sea,  but  some  rivers  flow  into  lakes. 


[, 


m\ 


[  i 


n ; 


;M .  i '' 


12  PRIMARY  GEOGRAPHy. 

Q.  How  arc  rivers  aseful? 

A,  They  water  and  fertilize  the  earth. 

3Iany  steamboats  and  otlicr  vessels  navigate  rivers,  and  also  lakes :  they  are 
used,  as  on  the  sea,  in  conveying  travellers  and  produce  to  and  from  one  city  cr 
country  to  another. 

'  ^>.  How  is  the  vast  body  of  water  on  the  earth  restrained  from  ovei-flowing 
the  land? 

A.  By  the  power  of  the  Ahnighty,  who,  in  the  beginning, 
separated  the  land  from  the  water. 

"  And  God  said.  Let  the  waters  under  the  heaven  be  gathered  together  into 
one  place,  and  let  the  dry  land  appear :  and  it  was  so."  —  Gen.  i.  9. 


1m 


LESSON  6. 

'  OF   Tin:    LAND. 

Q.  How  is  the  land  on  the  surface  of  the  earth  diversified? 
A.  By  mountains  and  valleys,  hills  and  plains. 
Q.  How  is  the  land  on  the  earth  divided? 

A.  Into  Continents,  Peninsulas,  Isthmuses,  and  Islands 

y.  What  is  a  Continent? 

A.  The  largest  extent  of  land. 

O.  How  many  Continents  are  there? 

A.  Two,  the  Eastern  and  Western.  . 

•v^.  What  does  the  Eastern  Continent  contain?  '  ' 

A.  Europe,  Asia,  and  Africa. 

Q.  What  does  the  Western  Continent  contain? 

A.  North  America  and  South  America. 


sa 


« 


mmmm 


OF  MOUNTAINS,  ETC. 


IS 


they  are 
3  city  or 

i-flowing 

luing, 

her  into 


ds. 


LESSON  7.  ■       ' 

DIVISIONS    OF   THE   LAND. 

Q.  What  is  the  Eastern  Continent  often  called? 
A.  The  Old  World. 

Q.   What  is  the  Western  Continent  often  called? 
A.  The  New  World. 

The  Western  Continent  is  called  the  New  World,  because  it  has  not  been  so 
lou'^  known  aa  the  Eastern  Continent. 

Q.  What  is  a  Peninsula? 

A.  A  tract  of  land  nearly  surrounded  by  water. 

Q.  What  is  an  Isthmus? 

A.  A  narrow  tract  of  land  which  joins  a  Peninsula  to  a 
Continent. 

Q.  What  is  an  Island?  *  '■ 

A.  A  tract  of  land  entirely  surrounded  by  water. 

Q.  What  is  an  Archipelago? 

A.  A  sea  containing  many  islands. 

Q.  What  is  a  Cape? 

A.  A  point  of  land  extending  into  the  sea. 


.  _   V.  "^  LESSON  8.    '-    " 

,-  .  OF   MOUNTAINS,   ETC.  \<     ' 

Q.  What  is  a  Mountain  ?  .  ^         ' 

A.  A  tract  of  land  raised  up  to  a  great  height. 
Some  mountains  are  a  hundred  times  higher  than  the  highest  house  you  ever 
saw,  and  their  summits  covered  with  ice  and  snow- 


fM 


111.. 


srTji-  -f  \ifsr  »■*.*?;■  "^f-"!" 


.n^iiimi   \mmummtm 


mmifimmmm-\  ■*!■■■ 


14 


PRIMARY  GEOGRAPHY. 


Mountakno,  HWs,  Volcano,  I'lains,  Valley. 

Q.  What  is  a  Volcano?  ■    ' 

A.  A  burning  mountain. 

Volcanoes  send  forth  fire  and  smoke,  and  also  lava,  or  melted  stones,  from  an 
opening  at  the  top  called  a  Crater.  Cities  and  towns  are  sometimes  set  on  fire 
»nd  destroyed,  by  the  burning  lava. 

Q.  What  is  a  Hill? 

A.  A  portion  of  land  raised  up,  but  not  so  high  as  a  mountain. 

Q.  What  is  a  Valley? 

A.  A  low  portion  of  land,  situated  between  hills  or  moun- 
tains. 

Q.  What  is  a  Pkin? 

A.  A  level  tract  of  land. 

Some  plains  are  fertile  and  well  cultivated ;  some  arc  covered  with  graps ; 
others  are  covered  with  sand;  and  are  barren. 

Q.  What  is  a  Desert? 

A.  A  plain  covered  with  sand. 

The  largest  desert  in  the  world  is  in  Africa ;  it  is  called  the  Saluura,  or  the 
Great  Desert. 


''mm 


'J— qtw.nrw. »-  .lwiiwij 


I'oiu  an 
OH  tiro 


itain. 


noun- 


grapa ; 


,  or  the 


SHAPE  AND  SIZE  OF  THE  EARTH. 


15 


A  Picture  <<r  one  tide  of  the  Earth. 

LESSON  9. 
SHAPE   AND    SIZE    OF   THE    EARTH. 

You  must  now  learn  something  about  the  shape  and  size 
of  the  earth,  and  how  it  moves, 

By  tho  picture  you  perceive  that  Ht  is  round,  like  a  ball  or 
an  orange.  ^America  is  on  one  side,  and  ^Europe,  Asia  and 
Afi-ica  are  on  the  other  side. 

Q.  1.  What  is  the  shape  of  the  Earth? 

Q.  2.  What  is  said  of  America?  ■    * 

Q.  3.  What  is  said  of  Europe,  &c.  •    ' 


M 

J 


Js^' 


16 


PRIMARY  GEOGRAPHY. 


1^  ! 


.-^^ZZo 


Q.  What  is  the  circumference  of  the  earth  ? 
A.  About  twenty-five  thousand  miles. 
Q.  What  is  the  diameter  of  the  earth? 
A.  Almost  eight  thousand  miles. 

The  engraving  will  show  yon  that  the  circumference  of  a 
body  is  around  the  outi^idc,  and  the  diameter  is  a  line  acroa<) 
the  centre,  or  middle  part. 

The  extent  around  the  earth  is  so  great,  that  if  a  bird  were 
to  fly  at  the  rate  of  a  mile  in  a  minut«,  it  would  take  about 
seventeen  days  and  nights  for  the  bird  to  oomo  roaod  to  the 
place  from  which  it  started. 

*The  earth  is  all  the  time  turning  round  and  rcnmd;  it  never 
stops,  but  rolls  like  an  immense  ball  through  the  heavens, 
surrounded  on  every  side  'hy  the  shy  and  stars. 

Q.  4.  What  is  said  of  the  earth? 

Q.  f).  By  what  Is  Ihe  earth  surrounded  on  every  side? 


ni 


a<! 


th( 
tui 


WJ 

til 
is 


LESSON  10. 

MOTIONS    OF   THE    EARTH. 

Q.  How  many  motions  has  the  earth,  and  what  are  they? 

A.  Two ;   the  daily  and  the  yearly. 

Q.  What  is  the  daily  motion  of  the  earth?  '  ,j 

A.  That  by  which  it  turns  round  once  every  day. 

Q.  What  is  the  yearly  motion  of  the  earth  ? 

A.  That  by  which  it  moves  round  the  sun,  once  every  year. 

Q.  What  is  produced  by  the  daily  motion  of  the  earth? 

A.Day  and  night. 


Tl 
or 
( 
( 
( 
( 
ten 

pe( 
tne 


mmmmf.,~' 


OF  CLIMATE,  ETC. 


17 


rence  of  a 
lioc  acroaa 

i  bird  were 
take  abont 
nod  to  tho 

it  never 
leavens. 


ry  year. 


Q.  Whiit  is  produce  J  by  tho  yearly  motion  of  tlie  ourtiii' 
A.  A  change  of  seasons. 
Q.  What  18  a  change  of  scufions? 

A.  The  change  from  winter  to  spring,  from  spring  to  sum- 
mer, from  summer  to  autunui,  and  from  autunm  to  Avinter 
again. 

In  winter  the  earth  is  covered  with  ice  and  snow.  Spring  i.s  tlic  time  when 
the  flowers  are  in  blossom.  Summer  is  the  warm  season  of  the  year.  In  an- 
tumn,  01  fall,  the  flowers  and  plants  decay,  and  the  leaves  drop  from  the  trees. 


LESSON  11.' 
^OF  CLIMATE,  ETC. 

In  some  parts  of  the  earth  the  climate,  or  Ai^eather,  is  very 
warm ;  in  some  it  is  extremely  cold,  and  the  ground  is  all  the 
time  covered  with  ice  and  snoM'.  In  other  parts  the  weather 
is  mild  and  pleasant. 

The  warmest  regions  of  the  earth  are  '  near  the  Equator. 
The  coldest  regions  are  » near  the  Pbles.  The  most  pleasant, 
or  temperate  regions,  are  '  icithin  the  temperate  Zones. 

Q.  1.  Where  are  the  warmest  regions  of  the  earth? 

Q.  2.  Where  are  the  coldest  regions  of  the  eai-th? 

Q.  3.  Where  are  the  most  pleasant,  or  temperate  regions  ? 

On  the  Map  of  the  World  you  wiU  learn  where  the  warm,  the  cold,  and  the 
temperate  regions  of  the  earth,  are  situated. 

.A.mong  the  principal  nations  of  the  earth,  nearly  all  the 
people  are  employed  in  *AgrkuUure,  Manvfacturee,  and  Comr 
merce. 


If:i 


ii 


^r 


F  ) 


Ir 


w 


I  -f 


■•^-mmm!* 


18  PRIMARY  GEOGRAPHY. 

The  farmer  ia  employed  in  a<?riciilture,  or  farming;  he 
raises  '  ichmf,  corn,  and  other  kinth  of  /(xkL 

The  manufacturer  makes  ^ cloth,  Uiither,  piper,  and  mani/ 
jthar  artlclvN ;  nearly  every  thing  that  is  made,  is  the  work 
of  manufacturers  or  mechanics. 

In  commerce,  or  trade,^  the  productions  of  one  country  are 
exchawjcd  for  those  of  another.  Our  merchants  send  their 
ships  laden  with  cotton,  flour,  fish,  &c.,  and  exchange  these 
articles  with  the  people  of  other  parts  of  the  world,  for  coffee, 
sugar,  tea,  pepper,  &c. 

tj.  4.  Ill  what  "iro  nearly  all' the  people  employed? 

Q.  5.  What  di)03  the  fanner  raise '{ 

Q.  0.  What  does  the  manufacturer  make? 

Q.  7.  What  is  done  in  commerce,  or  trade  ? 


Hero  is  a  picture  of  a  ship  coming  from  a  distant  country,  probably  from 
(^hina,  and  laden  with  tea;  or  from  South  America,  with  coffee ;  or  perhaps  she 
is  from  Spain,  and  brings  oranges,  raisins,  and  almonds. 

You  must  remember  what  is  said  of  Agriculture,  Manufactures,  and  Com- 
inercc,  for  they  are  often  spoken  of. 


ai 

pi 

V 

in 


''is^ 


th 

". 

im 

• 

c 

/ 

n 

iro 

e 

grc 

G 

1- 

able 

ig;  he 

ma))// 
3  work 

try  are 
I  their 
I  these 
coffee, 


TRODUCTIONS  OF  THE  EARTH.  29 

LESSON  12. 
PRODUCTIONS    OF   THE   EARTH. 

The  earth  is  inhahitod  by  many  millions  of  human  beings, 
and  also  by  a  vast  number  of  animals  of  different  kinds,  com- 
prising Beasts,  Birds,  Fishes,  Keptiles,  and  Insects.  The 
Vegetable  and  Mineral  productions  are  likewise  various  and 
important. 

Q.  What  aro  Vegetable  proJuctions  ? 

A.  Flowers,  fruit,  wheat,  corn,  coffee,  tea,  and  other  articles, 
that  grow  out  of  the  earth. 


ill  ! 


)ly  from 
baps  she 

id  Com- 


A  Flower. 


VMIfe 


Wheal. 


Q.  What  are  Mineral  productions  ? 

\.  1  h  various  kinds  of  stones,  with  lime,  coal,  gold,  silver, 
iron,  lead,  and  many  other  things,  that  are  dug  out  of  the 
ground. 

Gold  and  silver  aro  called  the  precious  metals,  because  they  arc  the  most  valu- 
able :  nearly  all  our  money  is  made  of  gold  and  silver. 


BJlMj  .J 


n 


I      •!.  P 


m^' 


f^i 


w 


so  rniMARY  OROORAPHY. 

Q.  Wliioh  nrc  somo  of  the  principul  Ilcn-stH? 
A.  TliP  Klt'phant,  Lion.  Tiger,  lloar,  Ilornc,  and  Ox. 


A  Bi^ait. 


A  liM. 


llnrscH,  Cows,  Do^,  and  Cut*,  nrc  mot  with  in  nearly  nil  parts  of  the  earth, 
(iii(i  ure  c!ill(!(l  iloiiiPKtic,  or  tame  nnimaln.  The  Lion  iH  found  cmly  in  Africa,  the 
Tifi;or  in  Anin,  and  the  Orisly  IJear  in  America.  These  are  wild  animal.<<,  and  arc 
very  fierce  and  dangerous. 

(J.  Mention  Bomc  of  the  principal  Bird.s. 

A.  The  Ostricli,  Eagle,  Poll^'i'  i,  Turkey,  and  common 
Fowl. 

Q.  Mention  some  of  the  prineipal  Fialics. 

A.  The  Shark,  Swordfish,  Salmon,  Cod,  and  Shad. 


FishOf. 


>Q.  Mention  some  of  the  principal  Reptiles, 

A.  Alligators,  Lizards,  Snakes,  Toads,  and  Frog 


( 

( 

J 
i- 
i 
J 
art 

(, 

I 

the 

r 

pec 


i.i^^        iig 


■■■ 


»  . 


tlic  earth, 
Africa,  tho 
8,  and  arc 


ommon 


< 


01  TIIK  I'KOFLK  THAT  IMlABIT  THE  lAllTH 


An  lrii<;i:l. 


l^.  Mention  .some  of  tbo  prineiiial  Innccta. 

A.  ButttTdio.s.  Uecf.,  Siaders,  Mu8«iuitooH,  and  Ants. 


21 


LESSON  18. 
OF   THE   PEOPLE   THAT   INHABIT   THE   EARTH. 

Q.  From  whom  are  tho  people  that  inhabit  the  earth  descended? 

A.  Our  first  parentu,  Adam  and  Eve. 

Q.  In  whoso  image  was  man  created? 

A.  In  the  image  and  after  the  likeness  of  God. 

So  Ood  creat^id  man  after  his  own  image.  —  Gen.  i.  27. 

Q.  How  do  the  various  races  of  men,  or  nations,  differ? 

A.  Some  are  white,  like  ourselves,  and  there  are  others  that 
are  yellow,  red,  brown,  and  black. 

Q.  In  what  other  respects  do  nations  differ  from  each  other? 

A.  In  the  language  they  speak,  the  dress  they  wear,  and  in 
the  food  they  eat. 

The  principal  aations  of  white  complexion  are  the  'Eiiro- 
jmtm,  ami  thtir  descendants :  the  yellow  are  the  '  Chinese^ 


lit.  i 


'.Hit 


■Pi 


22  PRIMARY  GEOGRAPHY. 

&c. :  the  red  are  the  ^American  Indians :  the  brown  are  the 
"■  Malays,  &'^  the  black  are  the  '^Negroes. 

Q.  1.  Which  arc  the  principal  nations  of  white  and  yellow  complexion;' 
Q.  2.  Which  are  the  principal  nations  of  red,  brown,  and  black  complexion ; 


\ativc  or  Java. 


Asliantee  Cliict'. 


Pcraian  Woman, 


You  perceive  by  the  pictures  how  differently  other  nations  dress  from  us,  and 
also  from  one  another.  The  native  of  Java  has  the  upper  part  of  his  body  na- 
ked :  the  Ashantce  chief  has  but  little  clothing ;  while  the  Persian  woman  is 
almost  covered  up  with  her  dress. 


LESSON  14. 
POLITICAL   DIVISIONS. 


The  Continents,  Oceans,  Peninsulas,  Islands,  &c.  that  you 
have  been  learning  about,  are  called  ^Natural  Divisions,  be- 
cause they  were  made  by  the  Creator ;  but  Empires,  King- 


^itte 


I'jjjimwuimi  mmw  iw^nuMMMUBM 


.llllllM.JI^MPilUJllUMI 


n  are  the 

)lexioii '! 
complexion ; 


lian  Woman. 

from  us,  aud 
his  body  na- 
an  woman  i^ 


.  that  you 
visions,  bo- 
res, Kiug- 


POLITICAL  DIVISIONS.  23 

doms,  Republics,  &c.,  are  called  ^PoUtkal  Divisions.  Thoy 
were  established  by  men  for  the  purposes  of  government. 

Q.  1.  What  are  Continents,  Oceans,  Peninsulas,  &c.,  called? 

Q.  2.  What  are  Empires,  Kingdoms,  llepublics,  &c.,  called  ? 

Q.  What  is  an  Empire? 

A.  A  country  governed  by  an  Emperor. 

Q.  What  is  a  Kingdom? 

A,  A  country  governed  by  a  King. 

Emperors  and  Kings  are  also  called  Monarchs  and  Sovereigns.  The  wife 
of  an  Emperor  is  called  an  Empress;  the  wife  of  a  King  is  called  a  Queen. 

Q.  What  is  a  Republic? 

A.  A  country  whose  Chief  Magistrate,  or  Preeident,  is 
elected  by  the  people. 

Q.  Whac  is  a  Nation? 

A.  A  distinct  body  of  people,  as  the  English  nation,  the 
French  nation. 

Q.  What  is  a  City? 

A.  A  large  collection  of  houses  and  inhabitants. 

In  a  more  strict  sense,  a  city  is  a  collective  body  of  inhabitants  incorporated 
and  governed  by  particular  officers,  as  a  mayor  and  aldermen. 

Q.  What  are  Towns? 

A.  Collections  of  houses  and  inhabitants ;  generally  smaller 
than  cities. 

When  a  city  is  the  seat  of  government  of  a  country,  it  is  called  the  Capital. 
When  it  contains  a  greater  number  of  inhabitants,  and  has,  a  larger  shai-e  of 
trade  and  commerce  than  any  other  place  in  the  same  country,  it  is  called  the 
chief  city,  or  metropolis. 

Washington  City  is  the  capital  of  the  United  States;  but  New  York  con- 
tains ten  times  more  inhabitants,  and  is  the  raetropolLs,  or  chief  city. 


Ih^ 


24 


OF  MAPS. 


LESSON  15, 
OF  M/  PS. 

To  understand  the  true  position  of  the  different  countries 
on  the  globe,  it  will  be  necessary  to  study  the  Maps  atten- 
tively. 

A  Map  is  'a  incturc  of  the  whole,  w  a  part  of  tlie  earth's  sur- 
face :  it  represents  '  the  form  or  shape  of  Continents,  Oceans, 
Islands,  Lakes,  &c.,  and  also  shows  ^wliere  Rivers,  Mountains, 
Cities  and  Toivns  are  situated. 

Q.  1.  What  is  a  Map? 

Q.  2.  What  does  a  Map  represent? 

Q.  3.  What  docs  a  Map  show? 


m. 

an 


A  Maj). 


The  top  part  of  a  Map  is  North,  the  bottom  is  South,  the  right  hand  side  is 
East,  and  the  left  hand  side  is  West. 
The  map  before  you  is  a  picture  of  the  United  States,  or  the  country  we  live 


an 


La 
Ki] 

ho 

Pe 

II 
the: 


Ai 
pa 

an 
th 

( 

do( 


)mi.[riii'ii«a 


m 


juntries 
s  atteu- 

th's  siir- 

Oceans, 

untains, 


nd  Bide  is 
ry  we  live 


GRAND  DIVISIONS  OF  THE  EARTH. 


25 


in.  You  perceive  that  Oceans,  Lakes,  Rivers,  Mountains,  Boundaries,  Cities, 
and  Towns,  are  shown  on  it. 

Now  point  out  on  the  Map,  North  —  South  —  East  —  West. 

Point  out  the  Oceans  —  the  Lakes  —  the  Mountains  —  the  Desert. 

I'oint  out  the  Boundaries. 

The  Boundaries  are  shown  by  the  dotted  lines  that  separate  one  country  from 
another,  as  the  United  States  from  Mexico. 

Point  out  the  Capitals  —  the  Cities  —  the  Towns. 

The  lines  that  cross  the  map,  from  one  side  to  the  other,  arc  called  Lines  of 
liatitude,  or  Panallels,  and  show  the  distances,  in  degrees,  north  or  south  of  the 
Equator. 

The  lines  that  extend  from  the  top  to  the  bottom  of  the  map  are  lines  of 
Ijongitude,  or  Meridians,  and  show  the  distances  east  or  west  from  a  first  Meridian. 

When  you  come  to  study  other  maps,  you  will  see  how  Islands,  Gulfs,  Bays, 
Peninsulas,  &e.,  are  represented. 

Hereafter  tlic  Pupil  will  find  the  Question!  at  the  bottom  of  the  aame  pages  as  the  Leatons  to  which 
Ihcy  are  attached. 


LESSON  16. 
GRAND    DIVISIONS    OF   THE    EARTH. 

The  earth  contains  five  grand  divisions.  These  are, 
^Amenca,,  Europe,  Asia,  Africa,  and  Oceanica. 

America,  or  the  Western  Continent,  comprises   ''North 
Ainerica  and  South  America.     It  contains  nearly  a  third* 
part  of  the  land  on  the  surface  of  the  globe. 

^Europe,  Asia,  a7id  Africa  are  connected  with  each  other, 
and  form  the  Eastern  Continent.  These  divisions  contain 
three-fifths  of  the  land  surface  of  the  earth. 


Qdestions.  —  1.  What  are  the  grand  divisions  of  the  earth?    2.  What 
does  America  comprise?    3.  What  forms  the  Eastern  continent?    4.  What 


I: 


,V. 


26 


PRIMARY  GEOGRAPHY. 


Europe  is  *  the  smallest  of  tlie  grand  divisions,  yet  it  contains 
the  most  powerful  nations.  The  people  of  Europe  are  called 
'Europeans. 

Asia  is  ^the  largest  grand  division,  and  contains  more  than 
one  half  of  the  population  of  the  earth.  The  inhabitants 
are  called  ''Asiatics. 

Africa  is  ^the  least  hnown  division  of  the  earth.  The  chief 
part  of  the  inhabitants  are  black,  and  are  called  ^Africans, 
or  Negroes. 

Oceanica  consists  ^"entirely  of  islands,  situated  in  the  Pacific 
Ocean.  It  was  the  last  discovered  division  of  the  world,  and 
has  the  smallest  number  of  inhabitants. 


Tl 

"f 

tm 
PI 
de 


LESSON  17. 
OF   THE    OCEAN. 

The  water  on  the  surface  of  the  globe  comprises  Hhe  Rici- 
fh,  the  Atlantic,  the  Indinn,  the  Northern  and  the  Southern 
Oceans.  These  are  all  connected  with  each  other,  and  form 
one  vast  sea  or  ocean. 

The  Eastern  and  Western  Continents  are  separated  from 
each  other  ^hy  the  Pacific  Ocean  on  the  one  side,  and  the  Atlan- 
tic Ocean  on  tJie  othe?'. 


ia  Europe?  5.  What  are  the  people  called?  6.  What  is  Asia?  7.  What 
are  the  inhabitants  called ?  8.  What  is  Africa?  9.  What  are  the  inhabitant** 
called?     10.  Of  what  does  Oceanica  consist? 

Questions.  —  1.  What  does  the  water  on  the  globe  comprise?    2.  How 
are  the  Eastern  and  Western  Continents    separated?      3.    Between  what 


mo 
wa 
we 

trii 

shi 
abc 

com 
cupi 
sea! 
to  d 


'^m» 


■HMMMMMW 


HI  lllCj 


contains 
re  called 

)re  than 
abitants 

he  chief 
ifricam, 


OF  THE  OCEAN.  27 

The  Indian  Ocean  flows  between  ^Africa  and  Australia. 
The  Northern  Ocean  occupies  *the  most  northerly  parts  of  the 
crirth.  The  Southern  Ocean  occupies  '  the  most  soiitherhj  jiarts 
'if  the  earth. 

^Whales,  seals,  turtles,  and  other  marine  animals,  icith  nur 
merous  Fishes,  are  found  in  the  ocean ;  a  great  variety  of 
Plants  also  grow  in  its  waters,  some  of  which  rise  from  a 
depth  of  more  than  two  hundred  feet. 


\e  Pacifif; 
)rld,  and 


'he  Hici- 
Southern 
nd  form 

ed  from 
le  Atlatir 


7.  What 
nhabitauts 

2.  How 
een  what 


A  Seal. 


A  Turtle. 


The  ocean  is  preserved  pure  ''by  its  saltness  and  constant 
motion.  When  ships  are  tossed  by  raging  tempests  on  its 
waters,  it  exhibits  one  of  the  most  striking  proofs  of  the 
weakness  of  man,  and  the  power  of  Omnipotence. 

By  means  of  the  Ocean,  we  are  enabled  '  to  visit  foreign  counr 
tries.  If  we  wish  to  see  any  part  of  Eurape,  we  can  be  con- 
veyed across  the  Atlantic  Ocean  in  one  of  the  splendid  Steam- 
ships which  sail  between  the  United  States  and  England,  in 
about  twelve  or  thirteen  days. 

countries  does  the  Indian  Ocean  flow  ?  4.  What  does  the  Northern  Ocean  oc- 
cupy ?  5.  What  does  the  Southern  Ocean  occupy  ?  6.  What  are  found  in  the 
sea  ?  7.  How  is  the  Ocean  preserved  pure  ?  8.  What  does  the  Ocean  epable  us 
to  dof 


I'  ',' 


■^-■"^IjBl'WWJ-"*'  •••>mi^  ^m,m^,mrf..i 


No.  1.  — WESTERN  HEMISPHERE. 


LESSON  18.* 

The  Map  on  the  upper  part  of  the  page  represents  the  Western  Hemisphere. 
The  word  Hemisphere  signifies  half  of  a  sphere  or  globe.  The  Western 
Hemisphere  contains  North  America,  South  America,  anJ  part  of  Oceanica. 

*  The  Pupil  will  point  out,  on  the  Map,  the  names  in  the  lenona  that  are  orintml  in  Itaii..  »..„«  ._i 

rco.!L'e.C"v;i°h^t  M\r"'°" ''''""''''"•  ™'~"^^^^ 

(38) 


I 

two 
call 

] 

em 
1 

it  01 

the 

I 

I 

sout 
mid 

I 
A 

Pole 
and 

T 

limil 
fies  ( 

P 

Tl 
Circ] 
of  C 

In 
peral 
tion 
tains 
The 
tions. 

Tl 
Tropi 

Th 
nevei 
nutm 
Zone. 
plexi( 
they  i 


waMBMmw;* 


'¥'' 


misphere. 
Western 
anica. 


ic  type,  ant 
lenoni  that 


J8) 


MAP  OF  THE  WESTERN  HEMISPHERE. 


29 


Point  out,  on  tho  Map,  North  America—  South  Jlmcrica —  Oceanica.  The 
two  first  divisions  form  Americii,  or  tho  Western  Continent ;  it  is  also  often 
called  the  New  World. 

Point  out  tho  pacific  Ocean  — Manlic  Ocean  — JVorthern  Ocean—  South- 
ern Ocean. 

The  Pacific  Ocein  bounds  America  on  th<?  west;  tho  Atlantic  Ocean  bounds 
It  on  the  east;  The  .Northern  Ocean  on  the  north;  and  tho  Southern  Ocean  on 
tho  south. 

^oint  out  tho  Mrth  Pole  — South  Pole- Equator. 
Tho  North  Polo  is  tho  northern  extremity  of  the  earth :  the  South  Pole  is  tho 
southern  extremity.     The  Eijuator  is  a  great  circle  that  passes  round  the  earth 
midway  between  the  North  and  tho  South  Poles.  ' 

Point  out,  on  the  Map,  the  Arctic  Circle  — Antarctic  Circle. 
AH  that  part  of  the  earth  situated  between  tho  Arctic  Circle  and  the  North 
Po  e,i8  the  North  Frigid  Zone.   That  part  situated  between  the  Antarctic  Circle 
and  tho  South  Pole,  is  the  South  Frigid  Zone. 

The  Frigid  Zones  are  the  coldest  parts  of  the  earth :  the  ground  within  their 
limits  18  covered  nearly  all  tho  year  with  ice  and  snow.  The  word  frifdd  signi- 
ties  cold  —  without  warmth  or  heat.  ° 

Point  out,  on  the  Map,  the  Tropic  of  Cancer—  Tropic  of  Capricorn. 
That  part  of  the  earth  situated  between  the  Tropic  of  Cancer  and  tho  Arctic 
Circle,  IS  the  North  Temperate  Zone.     That  part  situated  between  the  Tropic 
ot  tapncom  and  the  Antarctic  Circle,  is  the  South  Temperate  Zpne. 

In  the  Temperate  Zones  the  weather  is  generaUy  mild  and  pleasant,  or  tem- 
perate —  hence  the  name.  The  North  Temperate  Zone  comi  .rises  a  larger  por- 
tion of  land  suitable  for  cultivation  than  any  of  the  other  Zones;  hence  it  con- 
tains the  most  important  countries,  and  the  mosc  powerful  nations  in  the  world 
ihe  Americans,  the  British,  the  French,  the  Germans,  and  other  renowned  na- 
tions, live  in  the  North  Temperate  Zone. 

That  part  of  the  earth  situated  on  both  sides  of  the  Equator,  and  between  the 
Iropic  of  Cancer  and  tho  Tropic  of  Capricorn,  is  the  Torrid  Zone. 

The  Torrid  Zone  is  the  warmest  part  of  the  earth.  Here  ice  and  snow  are 
never  seen,  except  on  the  tops  of  the  highest  mountains.  Coffee,  pepper,  cloves 
nutmegs,  oranges,  pme-apples,  and  many  other  fine  spices  and  fniite,  ™in  this 
Zone.  The  inhabitant  of  tho  Torrid  Zone  are  chiefly  black,  or  rf  dark  eom- 
plexion ;  and,  owing  tor  tho  most  part  to  the  heat  of  the  climate  in  the  regions 
they  inhabit,  are  indolent  and  deficient  in  industry. 


♦ia^.  -/ 


i  '(• 


U^u- 


if 


No.  2.  — EASTERN    HEMISPHERE. 


.    «  C    T   I   C      7.   o   ^ 


'"'.tHCI-IC     'i^J^ 


yj 

5-^ 

y^ 

LESSON  19.  '^ 

No.  ^  is  a  Map  of  the  Eastern  Heniiaphere,  or  eastern  half  of  the  earth.  This 
Hemispu<?re  includes  the  Eastern  Continent,  and  part  of  Oceanica. 

Point  out,  on  the  Map,  Europe  —  Asia  —  Africa  —  Oceanica.  The  threo 
first  of  these  divisions  form  the  Eastern  Continent  About  ono-third  part  of 
Oceanica  belongs  to  the  Eastern  Hemisphere,  and  the  rest  to  the  Western. 

(30) 


em 
ocei 

1 
Ma 
one 

J 
Tr, 
on  1 
sho 
rid 

I 
par 
figu 
in  1 
Sou 

'] 
con 
the 
«!art 

1 
-i 

<!0U( 

I 

tor, 

1 

arc 

atti 

line 

I 

vhe 

tud< 

J 

wesi 

mer 

I 

—  J 
lon£ 


[he  threo 
d  part  of 
tern. 
30) 


MAP  OF  THE  EASTERN  HEMISPHERE.  81 

PoiiK  out  the  Manlic  Ocean  —  Pacific  Ocean  —  J^orlhern  Ocean —  South- 
ern Ocean  —  Indian  Ocean.  All  these  oceans,  except  the  liust,  arc  parts  of  the 
oceans  of  the  Hfinic  name  that  are  in  the  Western  lleniispherc. 

Toint  out  the  jXorth  Pole —  South  Pole.  These  arc  the  same  that  arc  on  the 
Map  of  the  Western  Hemisphere.  The  earth  contains  but  one  North  I'olc,  and 
one  South  I'ole. 

Point  out  the  Arctic  Cir  le — Antarctic  Circle — Tropic  of  Cancer  — 
Tropic  of  Capricorn.  These  arc  parta  of  the  lines  of  the  same  names  that  arc 
on  the  >Iap  of  the  Western  Ileniisphcro.  They  all  pass  rounil  the  earth,  and 
show  the  boundaries  of  the  Frigid  and  Temperate  Zones;  and  also  of  the  Tor- 
rid Zone. 

Point  out  the  lines  that  cross  the  ]\Iap,  from  side  to  side.  They  are  called 
parallels  of  latitude,  and  arc  numbered  10,  20,  30,  &c.,  as  far  as  to  90.  These 
figures  signify  degrees.  Those  between  the  Equator  and  tlic  North  Pole,  are 
in  North  Jjatitude;  and  those  between  the  Equator  and  the  South  I'ole  are  in 
South  Latitude. 

The  different  par^.s  of  the  earth  are  said  to  bo  in  north  or  south  latitude,  ac- 
cording as  they  are  situated  north  or  south  of  the  Equator.  Places  situated  on 
the  Equator  have  no  latitude.  The  largest  portion  of  the  land  sui-faco  of  the 
.;arth  is  in  north  latitude. 

Point  out  the  British  Islands  —  Japan  Islands  —  Madagascar  —  Australia 
"-  Van  Diemens  Land,  The  two  first  are  in  north  latitude,  and  the  tliree  last  in 
^outh  latitude. 

Point  out  Sumatra — Borneo.  These  islands  lie  on  both  sidw  of  the  Equa- 
tor, and  are  therefore  partly  in  north  and  partly  in  south  latitude. 

Point  out  the  lines  that  extend  from  the  top  to  the  bottom  of  the  Map.  They 
arc  called  lines,  or  meridians  of  longitude.  The  numbers  begin  on  the  equator, 
at  the  line  marked  0,  which  you  will  see  directly  under  the  word  Guinea.  This 
line  is  called  the  First  Meridian.  • 

Places  situated  on  the  first  meridian  have  no  longitude :  therefore,  at  the  point 
where  the  first  meridian  crosses  the  Equator  there  is  neither  latitude  nor  longi- 
tude. 

The  other  lines  are  numbered  10,  20,  30,  &c.,  aa  far  as  to  180,  both  cast  and 
west  of  the  first  meridian.  Those  parts  of  the  earth  that  lie  eastward  of  the  first 
meridian,  are  said  to  be  in  east  longitude,  and  those  west  of  it  in  west  longitude. 

Point  out,  on  the  Map,  St.  Helena —  Madagascar— Java  — Mw.  Guinea 
—  Philippine  Islands.  The  first  is  in  west  longitude ;  the  others  are  in  east 
longitude. 

C 


'-'  1 

■■*  1 

V-,1 

f'l 


32  PRIMARY  OEOORAPHY. 

LESSON  20  * 

A  M  i;  R  I  C  A  . 

1.  America,  or  the  Western  Continent,  comprises  North 
America  and  South  America.  It  contains  the  lanfeM  ricern 
U)i(l  lahrs  In  the  icorh?,  and  alfio  mani/hhjh  mountains. 

2.  The  population  of  America  consists  of  [ndlann,  White  >, 
and  Nqirot'8.    The  Indians  arc  the  native,  or  first  inhabitan'^t", 
The  Whites  are  the  descendants  of  Europeans.     The  Nt- 
groes,  or  Bhicks,  were  at  first  brought  as  shives  from  Afrioi. 
The  whole  amounts  to  upwards  of  51  millions. 

3.  The  Indians  are  of  a  red,  or  copper  cohiir.  They  are 
tall  and  straight  in  person,  and  can  endure  great  hardship  and 
fatigue. 


Amorican  Indians. 


Questions.  —  1.  What  does  America  contain  ?    2.  Of  what  does  the  popu- 
lation consist  ?     3.  Of  what  colour  arc  the  Indians  ?    4.  With  what  are  they 

*  In  the  following  Leaaons,  Ihe  number  at  the  beginning  of  each  paragraph,  and  that  at  the  beginning 
of  the  Question  annexed  to  it,  will  be  mode  to  eorreipond. 


tee. 


nca 

armc 
niad( 
Amt 


4,  'ii: 


«UJMf 


hr'''-'^"''-^'rTi'ir  i- 


NORTH  AMERICA.  33 

4.  These  people  are  divided  into  a  number  of  small  nations, 
or  tribes.  Many  of  them  are  armed  only  with  hm\s  and  ar- 
rmcs,  and  subsist  on  the  animals  they  kill  in  hunting. 

5.  The  Esquimaux  [Es-ke-m^]  are  a  race  somewhat  simi- 
lar to  the  Indians,  but  are  not  so  (all.  They  live  m  the  most 
northern  partti  of  North  America. 


Kiquiinaui  Sledges,  and  Winter  Hut. 

6.  The  winter  huts  of  these  people  are  made  of  slaha  of 
ice,  yet  are  sufficiently  warm  to  shelter  them  from  the  cold. 
The  sledges  on  which  they  travel  from  place  to  place  are 
drawn  by  dogs. 

7.  More  than  one  half  of  the  white  inhabitants  of  Ame- 
rica speak  tM  English,  or  the  language  that  we  use.     Many 

armed  ?  6.  Where  do  the  Esquimaux  live  ?  6.  Of  what  are  their  winter  huts 
made  1  7.  What  language  do  more  than  one  half  of  the  white  inhabitants  of 
America  speak? 


.-^»4     I      iTirt-r' Mfc.ii'iiiri-'- "rtttftn 


34 


PRIMARY  GEOGRAPHY. 


Bpoak  the  Spaninh,  Home  tlie  Portuguese  and  French,  and  a 
few  speak  the  Dutch. 


ar 
M 


LESSON  21. 
NORTH    AMERICA. 

1.  North  America  is  t/w  largest  division  of  the  Wc»t4!ra  Con- 
tinent. It  contains  the  mont  2>owerfal  nations,  iis  well  as  the 
most  jxjjmlons  cities  in  the  New  World,  and  twice  as  mani/  inJiOr 
hitants  as  iSonth  America. 

2.  The  principal  river.s  are,  //«;  Mississippi,  MImouri,  St. 
Lawrence,  Macl-cnzies,  Columbia,  and  Rio  Grande. 

3.  The  hirgest  hikes  are,  Superior,  Michigan,  Huron,  Win- 
nipeg, and  tJie  Great  Slave  Lalce. 

4.  The  most  important  mountains  are,  tlie  Rochj,  the  Alle- 
ghany, and  the  Mcxiain  Cordilleras.  The  last  contain  many 
volcanoes,  which  send  forth  great  clouds  of  smoke. 


Faiitlicr. 


Black  Denr. 


vl 


Questions.  —  1.  What  is  North  America? — What  does  it  contain?  2. 
Name  the  principal  rivers.  3.  Which  are  the  largest  lakes  ?  4.  Which  arc  the 
most  important  mountains  ?  5.  Which  arc  among  the  largest  of  the  wild  beasts  ? 


so 
mi 


^ 


Un 
Me: 
Ind 


G. 
soutl 
the 


iiii*nmini»i.n 


h,  and  a 


em  Co)i- 
•II  as  the 
mil  inha- 

iouri,  *S?. 
(Jli,  \Vi li- 
the Alle- 
in  many 

0. 


mtain  ?  2. 
licb  are  the 
rild  beosta? 


NORTH  AMI;hICA.  ^ 

5.  Tlic  wild  ln.a.stH  of  Nurtli  America  iire  numerourt ; 
amonj,'  tho  largest  are  the  Gri^h,  Bar,  mark  Jkar,  liujtalo 
Mufik  Ox,  Moo^e,  liwther,  and  Deer.  ' 

0.  Some  of  the  l,e«t  known  of  the  birdn,  are  the  Uild  Bujle, 

Wihl  Tiirhii,  Cnmui-haek  Duck,  and  Ilainnnny.JUni     In  the 

sonthern  districts  Alinjafors  arc  numorouH;  and  there  are 

many  diflerent  kinds  of  snakes,  of  which  the  Uattlemake  is 

"le  most  dangerous. 


4JSh^^^. 


Wild  Turkey. 


Canvai-back  Uuck. 


7.  The  principal  countries  of  North  America  are,  the 
United  States,  British  America,  Russian  America,  Greenland, 
Mexico,  Yvmtan,  Guatimala  [Gwa-te-mah'-la],  and  the  West 
Indies. 


G  Which  arc  some  of  the  beBt  known  birds?  — What  are  numerous  in  the 
southern  districts  ?  ~  Which  is  the  most  dangerous  of  the  snakes  ?  7.  Name 
the  pnacipal  countries  of  North  America. 


m 


W  I- 


t  ' 


a  f  <u 

IV. '  - 


I 


M 


J  li 


i)i'!'' 


36 


PRIMARY  GEOGRAPHY. 


LESSON  22. 
UNITED    STATES. 


1.  That  part  of  America  in  which  we  live,  is  called  the 
United  States.  It  is  a  very  large  country,  and  extends  from 
the  Atlantic  to  the  Pacific  Ocean.  The  United  States  include!^ 
more  than  a  third  part  of  North  America,  and  almost  two- 
thirds  of  its  inhabitants. 

2.  Many  ports  of  the  United  States  possess  a  rich  and 
fertile  soil.  In  the  eastern,  middle,  and  western  states, 
corn,  wheat,  and  rye,  icith  applet,  peaclies,  pears,  &c.,  are  cul- 
tivated. In  the  southern  states,  cotton,  tobacco,  rice,  and. 
sugar,  are  produced  to  a  great  extent. 


Cotton  Plant.  Rice.  Sugar  Cane. 

Cotton  is  a  kind  of  white  wool,  produced  from  the  Cotton  Plant;  muslin  and 
calico  are  manufactured  from  cotton.  The  leaves  of  Tobacco  are  made  into 
aegars,  chewing-tobacco,  and  snuflF. 

Questions.  —  1.  What  is  that  part  of  America  in  which  we  live  called? 

How  does  it  extend  ?     2.  What  are  cultivated  in  the  eastern,  middle,  and 

western  states?  —  What  are  ^)roduced  in  the  southern  states?     3.   What 


n*'^''  ^iVvMinpninaM 


UNITED  STATES. 


31 


jailed  the 
lids  from 
1  includes 
nost  two- 
rich  and 
ni  states, 
,  are  cul- 
rice,  and 


r  Cane. 

;  muslin  and 
e  made  into 


live  called? 

middle,  and 

3.   What 


The  Sugar  Cane  is  a  plant  somewhat  like  Indian-corn ;  the  stalks  contfiin  a 
sweet  juice,  which,  being  pressed  in  a  mill,  nius  out  like  water:  great  quanti- 
ties of  the  juice  are  boiled  in  large  pans,  until  the  sugar  is  made,  llicc  is  a 
hard,  white  grain,  which  forms  tlie  chief  food  of  the  inhabitants  in  many  parb; 
of  the  earth.     You  have,  no  doubt,  eaten  some  of  it. 

3.  Iron,  coal,  salt,  and  lime,  abound  in  many  quarters. 
(^old  is  obtained  from  the  gold  mines  of  Virginia,  North 
Carolina,  Georgia,  and  California;  and  vast  qunntilicH  of  lead 
are  obtained  from  the  lead  mines  of  Missouri,  Wisconsin,  and 
Iowa. 


Lead  MiiiiDg. 

4.  The  people  of  the  United  States  are  called  Amerlcam, 
and  are  nearly  all  employed  in  agriculture,  manufactures, 
and  commerce.  They  are  among  the  most  intelligent,  indus- 
trious, and  enterprising  people  in  the  world,  and  are  about 
20  millions  in  number. 

abound  in  many  quarters  ?  —  What  is  obtained  from  the  gold  mines  of  Vir- 
ginia, &c.  ? — What  are  obtained  at  the  lead  mines  of  Wisconsin,  &c.  ?  .4.  What 
are  the  people  of  the  United  States  called?  —  What  are  they  nearly  all  em- 


I       : 


\ 


"•-.— 


"^■■MWPKIIIP 


38 


PRIMARY  GEOGRAPHY. 


5.  American  vessels  sail  to  all  parts  of  tlie  earth  ;  and  the 
American  Hag,  the  star-spangled  banner,  is  known  and 
respected  by  every  civilized  nation. 

6.  Mam/  American  Ships   and  Sailors  are  employed   in 

catching  Whales,  Seals,  Codfish,  and  Mackerel.     The  whale 

ships  are  often  absent  two  or  three  years. 

The  oil  wc  burn  in  our  lamps  is  obtiiincd  from  the  fat  or  blubber  of  the  Whale. 
Seals  are  killed  for  the  sake  of  their  skins,  of  which  caps,  &c.,  are  made. 


11j 
th 
fi] 
Cf 

l: 


LESSON  23. 
UNITED    STATES  — Cij««in«*rf. 

1.  In  the  United  States  there  is  no  nobility;  every  citi- 
zen is  equal  i7i  civil  and  political  rights.  The  son  of  the 
poorest  man  in  the  country,  if  he  attends  to  his  learning, 
and  possesses  abilities,  may  become  President. 

2.  Schools,  Academies,  and  Colleges,  are  established  in 
nearly  every  part  of  the  United  States,  and  almost  every 
<me  may  acquire  a  good  education  ;  while  in  some  countries, 
but  few  are  able  to  read  and  write. 

3.  Steam-boats,  Canah,  and  Rail-roads,  are  numerous  in 
the  United  States.  These  all  render  travelling  easy  and 
rapid,  and  enable  us  to  go  from  one  city  to  another  in  a  very 
short  space  of  time. 

ployed  in  ?     5.  Where  do  American  vessels  sail  ?    6.  What  are  employed  in 
catching  whales,  &c.  ? 

Questions.  —  1.  In  wh:tt  is  every  citizen  eqnal?  2.  What  are  established, 
&c.  ?  —  What  may  almost  every  one  acquire?     3.    What  are  numorous? 


^Jium 


Wi'  WMIHJ»Mli 


UNITED  STATES. 


89 


and  the 
v^n   and 

)yed   in 
e  whale 

he  Whale. 

idc. 


jry  citi- 

of  the 

earning, 

ihed  in 
t  every 
untries, 

rous  in 
lay  and 
1  a  very 

iployed  in 

Dtablished, 
lumcrous  ? 


L  On  the  Great  Lakes,  and  on  the  numerous  rivers  of 
this  country,  steam-vessels  are  employed  in  greater  numbers 
than  in  any  other  part  of  the  world.  Steam-boats  were 
first  brought  into  use  %  Rohcrt  Fulton,  an  ingenious  Ameri- 
can, and  Avere  first  employed  on  tJie  Hudson  River,  in  the  year 


Sleatiihoat  oil  a  Wcslerii  liiver. 

5.  The  United  States  forms  a  federal  republic,  and  is  often 
called  the  Union,  beca^ise  it  consists  of  a  number  of  states 
united  wider  one  government. 

G.  There  are  thirty  states,  six  territories,  and  one  district. 
The  states  are  divided  into  the  Eastern,  Middle,  Southern,  and 
Western  States. 


4  By  whom  were  steam-boats  first  broiight  into  use?  — On  what  nver,  and 
when,  were  they  first  employed?  5.  What  does  tlie  United  States  form?  — 
Why  is  the  United  States  often  called  the  Union  ?  6.  How  many  states,  tem- 
tories,  and  districts  are  there  ?  —  How  are  the  states  divided  ? 


m: 


yif; 


■  M      I  '! 


tr ', 


;::i|l 


No.    a  — AlAl'    Ol-    T 


I^ESSON  24. 

No.  3.  The  United  Statcw  in  bound. 
<'d  east  by  tlie  Allnntio  Oceiin ; 
north,  by  liritish  America;  south, 
bv  the  (iiiir  of  Mexico  nnd  tlie  Ke- 
public  of  Mexico;  west,  by  the  Puci- 
lie  Ocean. 

I'oitit  out  liriliah  Ainrrica — Mexi- 
co— Canada  Vi'eat  —  Canada  East — 
NetB  Bninsmck.  The  three  last 
are  provinces  of  UritiRJi  America. 

Point  out  the  Pacific  Ocean  — 
Atltintic  Ocean  —  Gulf  of  Mexico. 

Point  out  Maine — Nno  Hampshire 

—  I  'ennoni  —  Massachusetts  —  Rhode 
Island — Connecticut,  Thene  six  arc 
the  Easterii  or  New  Engliiiid  States. 

Point  out  New  York — New  Jersey 
— Fennsyloania — Delaware.  'I'hcsu 
(bur  are  the  Middle  States. 

Point  out  Man/land  —  Virginia — 
North  Cardina  —  South  Carolina  — 
(ieorgia  — Florida —  Alabama — Mis- 
sissippi— Louisiana —  Texas.  These 
ten  are  Die  Soutliern  States. 

Point  out  Ohio — Kentucky — Ten- 
nessee — Indiana — Illinois — Missouri 

—  Michigan  — Arkansas  —  Wisconsin 
— Iowa,  These  ten  arc  tiiu  VVestcrii 
States 

Point  out  Ore';on — Upper  Califor- 
nia —  New  Mexico — Missouri  Terri- 
tory— Minnesota — Indian  Territory — 
These  are  tlio  Western  Territories. 

Point  out  Lake  Supet  ior-^L,  Huron 
— L.  Michigan — L,  Erie — L.  Ontario, 
These  are  called  the  Great  Lakes. 
They  separate  tho  United  States,  in 
part,  from  tho  provinces  of  British 
America.  Point  out  tho  Great  Salt 
Lake  of  California,  The  water  of  this 
lake  is  much  Salter  than  tliat  of  the  sea. 

Point  out  tho  Mississipjii  River,  It  rises  in  Itasca  Lake,  and  flows  into  the  Gulf  of  Mex- 
ico. Including  ttie  Missouri,  its  largest  branch,  the  Mississippi  is  tho  longest  river  in  the 
world.    ?oint  out  Itaica  Lake  —  Lake  of  the  Woods  —  Det>il'$  Lake,    Tliis  is  a  salt  lake. 

Point  out  Missouri  River — Arkansas  R, — Red  R, — Ohio  R,  These  are  the  largest  branches 
of  the  Mississippi  River.  Point  out  the  Columbia  River — Sacramento  R, — CoUraao  R.  tf  Cali- 
fornia— Colorado  R,  of  Tetas — Rio  Grande  [Grand],  On  the  banks  of  tho  Sacramento  river 
and  its  branches,  the  principal  part  of  the  gold  hitherto  found  in  Califomi*  Imu  been  obtdned. 


Point  out 
Siena  Madrt 
United  Statci 

Point  out  tl 
cast  of  the  M 

Point  ont 
ttnmH.    Wt 


No.    a  — AlAl'    OF    THE    U  N' I  T  E  D    STATES. 


41 


nto  the  Gulf  of  Mex- 
3  longest  river  in  the 
riiig  is  a  salt  lake, 
e  the  lorsest  branches 
—CoUrado  R.  tf  Cali- 
tho  Sacramonto  river 
lia  hai  been  oblHhKd. 


Point  ont  tlie  Cateade  Mountains — Coast  Mt*  —  Surra  Neeada  —  Blue  Mt* — Roeky  Mi*— 
Sieira  Madre  or  Mexican  Cordilleras.  The  Sierra  Nevada  are  the  highest  mountains  in  the 
United  States,  being  nearly  three  miles  high.    Fremont's  Peak  is  the  highest  of  the  Rocky  M>*. 

Point  out  the  Alleghany  Mountains — Curnhrrland  Mt^ — Blue  Ridge.  These  are  the  principal  Mts 
cast  of  the  Mississippi.    Tlie  highest  summits  of  the  Blue  Ridge  are  a  mile  and  a  quarter  high. 

Point  out  lfiii«A>n^((m — New  York — Philadelphia — Baltimmre — Boston  —  New  Orleans  —  Ci»- 
etfiMfi    Wathington  is  the  capital  of  the  United  States :  the  others  are  the  largwt  cities. 


iii-fet'-'" 


^^f   I  iimpu 


•I  1 


42 


PRIMARY  GE(»GRAI'nv. 


LESSON  25. 
EASTERN   STATES. 

n'/t"  ^'Z'*"'^  ''"™'"S  "'«  Eastern  States  was  at  firK, 
The  cl  mate  m  these  state,  is  generally  eoldor  In  winter  aTd 

2    Maine  is  the  largest . . '  tlui  Eaetem  Stales.     New  Hamn- 
Ehode^fcLr"'""'";  "'",  """«'-=•»>»»«%  Connecticut,  and 


Emigraniii  to  the  West. 

;        iiuodc  l..l.vnd  /    4.  lor  what  are  the  inhabitonte  of  New  England 


aiK 
1 

hl.V 

bcrs 
the 

I 

Fl 

lac 
oth 

I 

ot/i 
siv 
of 
fuc 

{ 
p,i 

(UU 
(Hit 

lesi 

rem 
plo; 

Enj 


..-  jiiiiiiawriii 


3  at  firt^t 
fc  name, 
iter,  and 
e  othe" 

Hamp- 
mt  the 

it,  and 
Tfeqital 


I  at  first 
!a,  Con- 
iUgland 


EASTERN  STATES.  43 

4.  The  people  of  New  England  ure  leiuarkable  for  their 
iadustrij,  (jrmi  morals,  and  general  in(clll(jcnce. 

5.  Churches,  Colleijes,  and  Schools  are  numerous.  The 
Salibath  is  respected,  the  churches  are  well  attended,  and 
there  are  very  few  persons  to  be  met  with  who  cannot  read 
and  write, 

Tliu  inbabitjintii  of  these  states  arc  often  called  Yankees,  a  name  supposed  to 
have  Ijeon  first  given  to  them  l)y  the  Indiana,  and  said  to  signify  English.  Num- 
bers of  these  people  emigrate  every  year  to  other  .sections  of  the  Union,  and  in 
the  western  states  they  form  a  largo  and  important  part  of  the  population. 

G.  The  New  Englanders  employ  many  vessels  in  the  Whale 
FisJiery,  and  in  catching  Codfish,  and  Mackerel.  They  manu- 
facture a  great  vav-^ty  and  amount  of  ^Voollcn,  Cotton,  and 
other  kinds  of  goods. 

7.  These  states  possess  nwre  Shi2)s  and  Seameti  than  any 
other  scctixjn  of  the  Union,  and  theii  commerce  is  very  exten- 
sive :  they  send  to  various  parts  of  the  world  vast  quantities 
of  lumber,  lish,  oil,  and  various  articles  of  domestic  manu- 
facture. 

8.  The  largest  cities  in  New  England  are,  Boston,  Lou-ell, 
Provideme,  Salem,  Portland,  Worcester,  Springfield,  Neio  Ilacen, 
and  Hartford.  Boston  is  noted  for  the  enterprise  of  its  inhahit- 
ants,  its  fine  harbour,  and  the  great  numher  of  its  ships.  No 
less  than  seven  railroads  begin  r^i  Boston. 

remarkable  ?  5.  What  arc  numerous  ?  G.  In  what  do  the  New  Englanders  em- 
ploy many  ves.sels  ? — Of  what  do  they  manufacture  a  great  variety  and  amount  i* 
7.  What  do  those  states  possess?  8.  Which  arc  the  largest  towns  in  New 
England  ?  —  For  what  is  Boston  noted  ?    9.  What  first  began  in  Boston  ? 


:f  Iri 


ir 


Jii-U 


\  : 


I!  ;« 


\[h  ! 


ftlf 


44 


PRIMARY  GEOGRAPHY. 


'^x^Ti^i 


?>'M 


ilUo;* 


# 


■..■tM\. 


\  irv,     Of  llOiCm. 


r-iiiiiLi'.  Hill. 


9.  In  Boston  the  American  Revolution  first  began;  the 
taxed  tea  sent  from  England  was  destroyed;  and,  in  the 
vicinity  of  tlie  city,  the  battles  of  Lexington  and  Bunker's 


Hill  were  fought 


m 


LESSON  26. 
MIDDLE   STATES. 

1.  The  Middle  States  are  situated  between  the  Eastern 
and  Southern  divisions  of  the  Union.  They  form  the  most 
])op7(lom  and  wcaMn/  .section  of  the  United  St  te»,  and  contain 
the  largest  cities  in  America. 

2.  The  climate  is  more  mild,  in  icinter,  than  in  New  Eng- 
land ;  the  cold  is  less  severe,  and  does  not  last  so  long. 


QcESTioNS.  — 1.  What  do  the  Middle  States  form?    2.  What  is  the  cli- 
mate, compared  with  that  of  New  EiigkHd?    3.  For  what  are  these  states 


MIDDLE  STATES.  45 

3.  These  Htates  are  'K)ted  for  fhch-  numrronfi  Cumth  and 
Rail-RdaiU.  The  jn'ople  carry  on  a  fUmrisliing  commerce, 
besides  various  and  cxk-Jisive  manuliictinvs. 

4.  New  York  has  nmrc  lnJuihifotif^  f/iaii  ani/  of/ii/-  st<ifr  in 
the  Union;  Pennsylvania  possesses  ru.sf  (/n(i>tfifi>.s  o/  ('(Mtl 
and  Iron  ;  New  Jersey  is  well  known  Ihr  Ji/ir  Frul/.s  and  Vtj/t- 
f<d)l(s- ;    Delaware  produces  CMxllcnt   Wheat. 


iViw  Viirk  Harbour,  aiemm-Bliiii,  4,c. 

5.  The  city  of  New  York  is  the  most  popuhm  on  the  West- 
ern Continent.  Its  liarbour  is  deep  and  commodious,  and  a 
great  multitude  of  vessels,  of  all  kinds,  steam-ships,  &c.,  are 
to  be  found  at  its  wharves.  •  ;  * 

6.  New  York  is  the  metropolis  of  the  United  States,  and  is 


noted  ?  4.  WImt  hns  Now  York  ?  —  What  docs  Pennsylvnnia  possess  ?  —  For 
what  is  New  Jersey  well  known  ?  —  What  does  Dehiwure  produce '!  5.  AVhat  is 
the  city  of  New  York  ?  (5.  Of  wiiat  is  Ni!w  York  the  metropoli.s  ?  7.  For 
what  is  Philadelphia  di,stingui.«hed  y     .S.  Wliat  was  signed  and  denlareu  in  the 


I.   :„ 


:t»,    1, 


J-i» 


v^ 


■1. 


46  PRIMARY  (iK'M.UArHV. 

also  ono  of  the  grontoHt  conuncrcinl  citioH  in  tlie  world.  Its 
iiiurchaiits  oiirrv  on  a  rich  iiiid  extensive  trade  witli  ahnost 
every  (juarter  of  the  jjtlohe. 

7.  Pliihidelpliia  is  next  to  New  York  in  the  mnnher  of  its 
inhahitiints.  It  is  distin;riiished  for  the  miulurltj/  of  itn  ntirch, 
iifi  welt  m  the  haitti/  of  it^  jmbllc  huUdimjs  and  primtc  dwcll- 


(/'oiigR'SS  Signing  the  Declaration  of  Indepondence. 

S.  In  the  State  House,  in  Phihidelphia,  Congress  signed 
and  dechvred  the  indepciuhnce  of  the  United  JS fates,  on  the  4th 
of  July,  177G. 

D.  Jirool-Ii/n,  Alhani,,  liix-hesicr,  and  Buffalo,  in  the  state  of 
New  York  ;  Newarh,  in  New  Jersey  ;  Lancaster  and  Pittsbuitf, 
in  Pennsylvania,  and  Wdnilngfon,  in  Delaware,  are,  after  New 
York  and  Philadelphia,  the  principal  cities  in  the  Middle 

States. 


wh 


State  House  in  Philadelphia?    !).  Which  are  the  principal  cities  in  the  Middle 

States? 


SOUTHERN  STATES.  ^J 

LESSON  27. 
tiOUTIIERN    STATES. 

1 .  The  SoiTiiEHN  Statks  form  flw  most  sonthrn  part  of  tU 
f  >no„.  The  ,.li„,atc  is  generally  warm,  and  ice  and  «now  are. 
m  many  i^laccM,  l)ut  seldom  seen. 

-^  Virginia  «!,s  tl.o  earliest  settled  state,  nn.l  l.ciicc  is  often  ci.llej  the  ",.M 
<l«"un,...n  I  Wmhin^nm,  Jefferson,  Madison,  Monroe,  a.ul  flnrrhon,  all  ill,,., 
tnous  patriot*,  and  presidents  of  tho  United  Ht.ates,  were  natives  of  N'irginia.  ' 

o.  Many  of  the  inhabitants  of  these  states  arc  Phf„fn',9 
who  own  extensive  farms,  or  plantations,  which  are  cultivated 
l)y  s  aves.  The  slave.-  are  negroes,  and  form  about  one-third 
of   the  popul.ition. 


Cotton  FipM. 


Of  "y^S"'  r  wJIt^'*  ^"  '^'  ^'tT  ^"*?  ^^™  ^    -  Who  were  natives 
or  Virginia/    3.  What  are  many  of  tho  people,  &c.  called?    4.  What  are 

D 


P: 


fir- -I 

■fi 


'       ,1*  i|ljn«»n^^«y» 


IS  PRIMARY  GKOOIIAI'HV, 

4.  In  Virginia  and  Maryland,  htrtjc  (/iKtntiliffi  of  TofMicttj  arc 
rai.v'jd.  North  and  Sontli  Carolina,  Cleorgia,  Alabama,  Mis- 
f^isj^ippi,  and  Texas,  are  noted  lV)r  (Jnthm,  and  T^oniwiana  lor 
.Siiijitr  ami  Mnfaxsrs.    Rice  is  cnltivatod  in  )Si)uth  Carolina  and 

(rtoiyid. 

4.  The  principal  eities  of  the  Sonthern  States  are,  Jhlti- 
tnnir,  ]V(is/ili/i/fitii,  f'/i<ir/(stini,  and  Xrir  ()r/iaii-i.  Baltimore 
i.s  noted  lor  /As  Jiaffh;  Moiinnn  nt,  and  the  Monument  ctxcttd  in 
iiuhiory  of   (nniral   Waiihintjton. 

(1.  The  city  of  Washington  is  the  capital  of  the  United 
States.  It  is  sitnated  in  the  Distrivt  of  Cohdnhia,  and  Ix^canie 
the  seat  of  government  in  1800  :  hero  the  President  resides 
and  Congress  assembles  every  year. 


>'!> 


CapitcJ  ut  \Vu.iiMtn(iti)n. 


riised  in  Virginia  and  Marjlar).!'*  —  For  what  arv?  North  and  South  Carolina, 
.<■(•.,  nolfd  ?  —  For  what  w  LnTtsiaRa  noted? — Where  is  rico  cultivated?  5. 
Which  are  the  i.rinoipal  iti*  *  ?  —  For  what  is  Baltinioro  noted  f     0.  Where  is 


for 


ano 


3. 

the  c 
what 

Qi 

often 
was  I 


hicco  arc 
uui,  Mis- 
•<i;iiui  I'or 
tlina  and 


itli  Car<*lina, 
tivtttofl  ?  5. 
6.  Wbere  is 


Wi;sTLIlN  STA'IL.S. 


40 


..  (  ongrcsM  cnnnkH  of  the  Members  of  the  Senate,  and  Ilou.e  of  Urnn  . 
-•««/„.<,. ..  tl...  b,Hly  is  ,1.0  I..gi.slHtun,  of  tho  i:„it.:.l  Stat..,  h„,1  ,.,1.    ... 

''"•  I  ''I'""".  "■"!  '■■  tlu,  largest  an,l  li.u.st  l.uil.lin;.  of  th.-  kiud  in  America. 

S   _(JlmrIe.ston  i.s  renmrUahlo  ihv  f/u' pol/fnus,  a,,/ /to.snifuJ. 

'f//  of  if^  mhalntanf..     New  Orle.ins  is  noted  lor  th.  nntnl.'r 

of  >S/ups  and  ShattfhKita  that  crotnl  Uh  levee,  or  huuling  aloi... 

no  nver.    A  vast  amount  of  .sugar,  mola8.ses,  cotton,  and  to'"- 

biiceo   IS  scut  Irom  this  city. 


LESSON  28. 

WESTERN    STATES. 

1.  Tlie  region  conipoHing  the  Western  States  and  Tfrri- 
TORIES,  IS  often  called  the  Western  Cuuntn,.  It  i.s  situated 
westward  ol  the  Middle  and  Southern  States,  and  is  noted 
lor  Its  large  tracts  of  fertile  land. 

2.  The  greater  part  of  those  states  was,  hut  a  few  years 
ago,  theatmhonhjuf  r,,.lo,ns  and  wild  hemt,  ;  hut  they  now 
nmta.n  a  vast  nunt!'  .vhite  inhahitants,  and  thoi'tsand.. 
oi  people  are  every  ^  ...    e.nigrating  to  this  land  of  plenty. 

3.  Among  tho  early  :^>«k.r.,  Darnel  Boone,  quo  of  tbo  first  white  men  that 

if!j(l^i!f"'t''"^'^tn*i-  I  Of  what  does  Congress  conHi,st?~T^ 
what  IS  Charle.t<.n  r.^m*rkable  I  -  for  what  is  New  Orleans  noted  ? 

oftrn"™'''7\vw"'  ''  '}^  '^?™  composing  the  Western  States,  &«.. 
oiren  caiiul  I  What  were  tho  Western  States  a  few  years  aco ''  '\  Wlu 
was  one  of  tie  first  white  men  that  lived  in  KontuckJ/   4    What  is  OuSl- 


^ 


iW 


!'r 


I 


\ 


50 


PRIMARY  OEOGRAFHY. 


t'vor  lived  in  Kentucky,  was  noted  for  his  courage  and  hardihood  :  lie  resided  for 
;)  considerable  time  in  the  .solitary  wilderness,  with  no  companions  but  his  dogs. 


Daniel  Boone, 


?l 


4.  Ohio  is  the  most  popnhiis  of  the  Western  States,  and  is 
noted  for  its  canals  and  manufactures.  Kentucky  is  noted 
for  Us  great  Cures,  and  Tennessee  as  the  largest  corn-growing 
State  in  the  Union. 

5.  Indiana  and  ^Michigan  contain  extensive  PJains,  or  Prairies :  Missouri, 
Wisconsin,  and  Iowa,  are  celebrated  for  their  Lead  Mines,  Arkansas  for  its 
Hot  Springs,  and  Michigan  for  Copper. 

6.  Cincinnati,  Louisville,  St.  Louis,  Chicago,  Milwaukie,  Detroit,  Cleve- 
lond,  and  JVashville,  ai*e  the  chief  cities  in  the  Western  States. 

7.  Cincinnati  was  founded  in  the  year  1789,  on  a  spot  surrounded  by  thick 
woods.  It  now  contains  more  than  100,000  inhabitants,  and  has  numerous 
ehurchcs,  schools,  and  other  public  institutions. 


—  For  what  is  Kentucky  noted  ?  —  Tennessee  ?  5.  What  do  Michigan,  Iqdi- 
ana,  and  Illinois  contain  ?  —  For  what  are  Missouri,  Wisconsin,  and  I-^ra  cele- 
brated ?   Arkansas  ?     6.  Which  arc  the  chief  cities  ?     7.  When  was  Cincinnati 


'■Jkim 


warn 


.ii«ni»ii  JiimiBi  ■ 


ichigan,  Iqdi- 
nd  lo'^a  cele- 
'na  Cincinnati 


WESTERN  TERRITORIES. 


51 


LESSON  29. 
*  WESTERN    TERRITORIES. 

1.  The  Territories  belonging  to  tlio  Union  arc  Oregon,  Mi^;- 
souri,  Minnesota,  Upper  California,  New  Mexico,  and  the  In- 
dian Territory.  Of  these,  Upper  California  and  New  Mexico 
were  conquered  from  Mexico  during  the  late  war,  and  were 
confirmed  to  the  United  States  by  the  treaty  of  1848. 
^  2.  Orci^on  and  Upper  California  lie  on  the  Pacific  Ocean ;  the  other  territo- 
ries are  all  situated  in  the  interior.  Great  quantities  of  gold  are  found  in  Upper 
California,  on  the  Sacramento  River  and  its  branches.  Oregon  City  is  the  chief 
town  of  Oregon ;  San  Francisco  is  the  largest  of  Upper  California. 

3.  Missouri  and  3Iiunesot;i  ^'erritorics  adjoin  British  America;  the  fii-st  i.« 
noted  for  the  abundance  of  buflalo  and  other  game  it  contains,  and  the  latter 
for  its  white  pine  lumber,  and  wild  rice.  The  town  of  St.  Paul,  on  the  Mis- 
sissippi, is  the  capital  of  Minnesota. 

4.  New  Mexico  lies  on  both  sides  of  the  Rio  Grande ;  Santa  Fe  is  its  chief 
town.  The  Indian  Territory  lies  westward  of  the  States  of  Missouri  and  Ar- 
kansas. Almost  all  the  Indian  tribes  formerly  resident  in  Georgia,  Alabama, 
and  other  states  cast  of  the  Mississippi  River,  have  removed  hither. 

5.  Nearly  :J1  the  Indians  iu  the  United  States  reside  in  the  Western  Terri- 
tories. Some  of  them,  especially  those  in  the  Indian  Territory,  have  good 
Houses  and  Farms,  and  have  been  taught  to  read  and  write  by  the  missionaries. 
Others  roam  over  the  vast  prairies  of  the  far  "West,  and  hunt  the  Bufalo  and 
other  wild  Beasts. 

The  missionaries  are  good  men,  who  teach  su-age  nations  to  read  the  Bible, 
worship  the  true  God,  and  to  live  like  Christians. 

founded  ?     1.  Name  the  Territ(jries.  —  What  is  said  of  Upper  California,  &c  '^ 

2.  Of  Oregon,  &c.?  — Gold?  — Oregon  (Jity?  — San  Francisco?     3.  Mis-sou- 

ri,  and  Mumcsota ?  —  St.  Paul?     4.  New  Mexico?  — The  Indian  Territory'^ 

Where  do  nearly  all  the  Indians,  &c.,  reside?- What  do  some  of  thcui 

-  What  do  others  hunt  ?  —  What  is  said  of  the  missionaries  ? 


•>■ 


'ES 


.f- 

I 
■17 

f 

a 

?3      % 

r 

C.     5 

>.    .^ 

W  ^^ 

»^  ;' 

^^ 

.n  / 

?-i7 

i,<,'^.-„ 

^R'-- 

"v'"'- 

i:> 

^oW?.:. 

^?^|i;s 

->^: 

>J-'-  ■  ■  ■ 

sv 

1 1 

f4.1 

'/ 

c 

1 

'■12 

2V 

L 

irtejton 

• 

- 

2) 


MAP   OF  THE  NEW  ENGLAND  STATES. 


LESSON  30. 


63 


Map  No.  4  is  a  Map  of  the  Eastorn,  or  New  England  States. 

This  divi.sion  of  tlie  United  States  coinin-i.se.s  six  StatoH.  It  h  bounded  oa 
the  north  by  Ciuada  E:i.st;  south  by  the  Atlantic  <Jcean  and  Long  Island 
Sound;  ojwt  by  New  Brunswiek  and  the  Atlantic  Ofoan,  and  west  }iy  the  State 
t)f  New  York. 

l*oint  out,  on  the  JLip,  Maine— J^cw  Hampshire — Vermont — Massachusclts 
—  Connecticut — UImb;  Inland.  Tlie.sc  are  tlie  ]'];ust<Tn  States.  Maine  is  tlio 
largest.  Khode  fsland  is  the  smalh^st  Stjite,  and  the  smallest  in  the  Union" 
Massachusetts  cmtains  more  inhabitants  than  any  of  the  other  i-Iastern  States. 

I'<)int  out  Canada  East — JVcio  Brunswick — JVew  York — Jit/antic  Ocean 

Lonr;  Island  Sound. 

I'liint  (ait  St.  Johrs  River.— St.  Croix  R.— Penobscot  R.— Kennebec  R  — 
.indrosco^giu  R.~Merrimac  R.— Connecticut  R.— Thames  R.     The.se  are 
th  i  prinoi|i..';    ■--s  in  New  England.     The  St.  John'.s  river  is  partly  in  Maine 
and  partly  '•    .^   '-.■  Brunswick.  ' 

i'oint  c  r  ■■•  ■  JVhite  Mountains — Green  Mountains  —  Mount  Katnhdin. 
These  arc  lue  principal  mountains  in  the  Eastern  States.  Jlount  WtishinTfen' 
i.s  the  highest  of  the  White  Mount^iins,  and  the  highest  in  New  England,  it  is 
about  a  mile  and  a  quarter  high.  The  fiummit  is  nearly  all  the  time  covered 
with  snow. 

Point  out  Lake  Champlain — Mnosrhcad  L. —  Grand  L. —  Winnipiseogee  L. 
[  JVin-ne-pis-sok'-ke.']  Lake  (Jhaniplain  belongs  partly  to  A'ermont,  and  partly  to 
New  York.  Its  waters  flow  into  Sorclle  lliver,  and  theneo  into  the  St.  Law- 
rence. 

Point  out  Grand  Men  an  Island — Mount  Desert  Island — JVanlucket  Island 
—Martha''s  Vineyard — Block  Island.  The  first  island  belongs  to  New  Bruns- 
wick ;  the  second,  to  Maine ;  the  third  and  fourth,  to  Ma.ssachusett;^ ;  and  the 
fifth,  to  llhode  Island.  Nantucket  is  noted  for  the  number  of  ves.sel8  belon<rin'» 
to  it,  that  are  euiployed  in  the  whale  fishery.  "    ° 

Point  out  JluiTusta  — Concord  —  Montpelier — Boston — Providence — Mio- 
port—Mw  Haven— Hartford.  These  cities  are  the  capitals  of  the  New  J':ng- 
land  States.     Khode  Island  and  Connecticut  have  each  two  capitals. 

Point  out  Portland— Bangor— Portsmouth— J^ewlmryport—  Salem—  Lovdl 
—JVcw  London.  These  are  among  the  most  importiiut  cities  in  the  Eiist^rn 
States,  that  are  not  capitals. 

Point  out  Passamaquoddy  Bay— Penobscot  Bay — Cape  Cod. 


it 


Vl. 


MAP  OF  THE  MIDDLE  £iAiES.  55 


LESSON  31. 

yo.  5  is  a  Map  of  the  Middle  States.  This  scotinn  of  the  Union  comprises 
I'oMf  States.  It  is  bounded,  en  tiie  north,  by  Cuiuuhi;  east,  by  New  EnirianJ, 
iuid  the  Atlantic  OceHu;  south,  by  Maryland  aud  Virginia;  and  west,  byOhio 
and  Canada. 

^'oint  out,  OH  the  Map,  JVcw  York—^Yao  Jersey— Pennsylvania— Delaware. 
T;j  '^•o  are  the  Middle  States. 

N^w  York  is  the  largest  of  the  Middle  States ;  Pennsylvania  is  the  second  in 
ext<;nt;  New  Jersey  is  the  third;  Delaware  is  the  smallest. 

Point  out  Canada  East— Canada  West— Vermont— Massachuselts— Con- 
nccliciU —  O/iio —  Virginia— Maryland— Atlantic  Ocean. 

Point  out  Lake  Ontario— Lake  Erie—L.  Champlain—L.  George— Oneida 
L.— Cayuga  L.— Seneca  L.  Lake  Ontario,  and  part  of  Lake  Erie,  separate 
the  INIiddle  States  from  Canada  West. 

I'oint  out  the  St.  Lawrence  River— Hudson  R.—Delaioare  R.— Susque- 
hanna R.—  Ohio  R.—Jlllegtiany  R.—Monnngahela  R.— Juniata  R.—Schuul- 
kill  R.  [^SkooVkiq— Genesee  R.—Muhawk  R. 

^  The  St.  Lawrence  river  forms  part  of  the  boundary  between  New  York  and 
Canada  West.  The  Delaware  river  forms  the  boundary  between  the  States  af 
Pennsylvania  and  New  Jersey.  ~ 

Point  out  the  Falls  of  Magara.  These  falls  arc  the  most  celebrated  in  the 
world.  They  are  in  the  Niagiira  river,  which  forms  part  of  the  boundary  be- 
tween New  York  and  Canada  West. 

Point  out  the  Alleghany  Mountains— Blue  Ridge — Highlands. 

Vomt  out  Albany— Trenton— Ilarrisburg— Dover.  These  are  the  capitals 
of  the  Middle  Stu.V-s.  ' 

Point  out  JVeio  York—  Brooklyn  — Troy  —  Rochester,  and  Buffalo,  m  the 
State  of  New  York;  JVewark,  Brunswick. -dnd  Camden,  in  New  Jersey;  Phila- 
drlplua— Lancaster,  and  Pittsburg,  in  I'ennsylvania;  Wilminglon,  in  J)elawaro. 
Iheso  are  the  principal  cities,  in  the  Middle  States,  that  are  not  capitals. 

I'oint  out  L^ng  Island  —  Delaivare  Bay.  Long  Island  forms  part  of  the 
State  of  New  York. 

_    Point  out  the  Eric  Canal.    This  work  extends  from  Albany  to  Buflfalo.     It 
IS  tliree  hundred  ano  sixty  miles  in  length. 

P«int  out  the  Pennsylvania  Canal  and  Railroad.  These  works  extend  from 
1  hiladelphia  to  Pittsburg,  three  hundred  and  ninety-four  miles. 


?«■■ 


1%' 


■  -'f>'''s'^9=mtsf0^'mi-^s^if^im^i  ■ 


MAP  OF  TIIF,  SOUTHERN   STATES. 


LESSON  32. 


57 


_  Map  No.  G  i.s  a  >riip  of  tlic  Southern  States.  This  section  of  the  United 
States  I'duipriscM  ten  Stiitcs,  iiiid  mv.  Dit*trict. 

Point  out^  Mtiri/land—  Virginia — Xoiih  Carolina — South  Carolina  — 
(:(:or<iiu--Floriila — Alabama — Mississippi — Louisiana^  and  Tesas.  Tlirso 
;:ro  till!  Southern  States.  Texas  is  the  largest  Southern  State.  It  onee  i.o 
loi,;';d  to  Me.vieo,  Imt  the  pciiiilo  deehired  their  Jndcpende-»oe  in  1830.  In  tlie 
anio  year,  they  defeated  the  Moxieans  at  the  battle  of  San  Jacinto.  Austin  is 
the  capital.     For  the  position  of  Texa,s,  see  Map  No.  3. 

Point  out  JVashinirlnn  Cih/.  It  is  situated  in  the  District  of  rolunihiu. 
This  District  is  ten  miles  long,  and  from  nine  to  live  wide,  and  on  the  north  side 
111' the  i'otoniae  river,  besides  Washington  City,  it  contains  Georgetown.  You 
will  see  the  District  of  Cohunhia  on  Map  No.  5. 

The  Southern  States  are  bounded  on  the  north  by  the  Middle  a  i  "^''estern 
States;  ea.-t,  by  the  Atlantic  Ocean;  south,  by  the  (lulf  of  Mexico;  ....d  west, 
by  Kentucky,  Tennessee,  Arkansas,  and  New  Mexico.     See  ]\[ap  No,  3. 

J'oint  out  Pcnnsiilvania—Allanlic  Ocran — Guff  of  Mexico — Keiitticky — 
'Jhufsscc — Arkansas — JVcw  Mexico.     See  Map  No.  3. 

Point  out  Jhinapolis  —  Richmond— Raleigh— Cohmhia— MiUedgevillc— 
Muiilgnmrnj— Jackson— Raton  Rouge— Tallahassee— Austin.  These  arc  the 
capitals  of  the  Southern  States.  Piiint  out  Ballimore— Charleston— Savan- 
nah—Mobile.  These  are  the  chief  cities  in  the  Southern  States,  that  are  not 
capitals. 

I'ouit  out  the  Potomac  River. — James  R. — Roanoke  R. — JVeuse  R.—Cape 
Fear  R.— Great  Pedec  R.  —  Saniee  R.  —  Alatamaka  R.  — St.  John's  R. 
These  are  the  principal  rivers  of  the  Southern  States  that  flow  into  the  Atlantic 
Ocean. 

Point  out  the  Chattahoochee  River— Alabama  R.— Pearl  R.— Mississippi 
R.— Sabine  R.  These  rivers  flow  into  the  Gulf  of  Mexico.  The  lower  part 
of  the  ('hatt^ihoochce  river  is  called  the  Apalachicola. 

Point  out  the  Red  River —Washita  R.  — Yazoo  R.  These  flow  into  the 
Mississippi.  I'oint  out  the  Tennessee  R.  — Kanawha  R.  —  Monongahela  R. 
These  flow  into  the  Ohio. 

Point  out  Chesapeake  Bay— Tampa  Bay—Apalnchec  Bay.  Roanoke  river 
flows  into  Albemarle  Sound ;  and  the  '^icusc  river  into  Pandico  Sound. 

Point  out  the  Cumberland  Mount nms— Alleghany  Mount ains— Blue  Ridge. 
The  Cumberland  mountains  separate  Virginia  and  Kentucky.  The  Alleghany 
mountains  separate  North  Carolina  and  Tennessee. 

Point  out  Cape  Hatteras—Cape  Cannaveral — Cape  Sable. 


Ill 


m 


No.  7.  — .MAI'  OF  TIIK  WKSTEUN  STATKS  AM)  TKRIUTOIIIMS. 


i 


^m 


<^.:^^j^ 


AST     K      S     T 


Zi'iiffitii  ''  |iW:7 /mm irns7/mf/fn/i\ 


(58) 


M 


X 

Tnii 
nortl 

I'.V  tl 
■  1". 

Sink 

1' 
\''i»r 
'I'lu- 
;in(l 
;in'  i 
of  tl 

Vi 
Clai 
-Miss 

!'( 
.M( 
ullg 
gave 

IV 
—  fl 
rivun 
souri 
braiK 

1\ 
tains 

P( 
most 

P( 
Chi} 
fulo 

Pi 

Jeffe 

capit 

P 

Clei 


■-■-  i\''fmt^t^^ii,ia^^Mtf.*i:j^^f^...i'^i^i^^^^ 


0^ 


:if. 


ao 


(58) 


MAP  OF  THR  WESTERN  STATES. 


LI':SSON  33. 


59 


No,  7  is  a  Map  ni  tlio  W'o^tcrn  States  and  TcrritorioM.  Tlii.-t  soction  of  tlio 
Unif>'<l  States  cimtiiiiis  tc-i  St;ite.s  and  six  Territories.  It  is  liounded,  on  the 
north,  >.y  Priti>li  Anieriea,  s(Mitii,  hy  (he  Southern  States  an<l  ."Mexico;  cast, 
hy  tlie  Soiitiurn  and  .Middle  Slates;  and  we.-f,  liy  the  I'aeifie  Oeean. 

I'nint  out,  nil  till'  .Ma;>,  ()/iio — Kinliic/:i/--Tni)texscf — Iiuhmm — Illinois — 
Misvmri— Michigan — .•Iri.an^ax — IVisconsin — Inira.  Tiiese  are  the  Western 
Slates. 

Point  out  J\  linn  ISO/ a  Tirrilnry — Indlnn  Trrritori/.  FartJier  west,  are  Mis- 
tniiri  Tcrritori/,  Oregon  Tirritorij^  Upprr  California^  au<l  »Vc//'  Mi'.rico. 
Tiiese  Territories  extend  aloiicr  the  west  or  I'aeitie  eoa^t  of  the  United  States, 
and  may  ho  seen  on  .^Iap  No.  ;!.  Tlie  Indian,  ."Vlissouri,  and  Oregon  Territories 
are  iidia))itcd  hy  Indians.  Tlic  Territory  of  New  Me.^ieo  lies  on  the  upper  pirt 
of  the  llio  Grande. 

Point  out  Lake  Superior — L.  Huron — L.  Mich  i /ran  —  L.Erie  —  L.  St. 
Clair  — Ilasca  L. —  Lake  of  the  Woods.  Itiusca  Lake  ia  the  source  of  the 
Mississippi  lliver. 

Point  out  the  Mississippi  River  —  Missouri  R. —  Ohio  R.  —  Illinois  R. — 
Jirkansas  R,  —  Tennessee  li.  —  JVisconsin  R.  —  Iowa  It.  Tiic.sc  rivers  have 
all  given  names  to  States.  The  Kentucky  River,  on  which  Frankfort  stands, 
giive  name  to  the  State  of  Kentucky. 

Point  out  St.  Peter^s  River— Dcs  Moines  R  —  Rock  R.  —  St.  Francis^  R. 
—  White  R.  — Platte  R.  — James  R.  —  Kanzas  R.  — Osage  R.  The  firet  five 
river.s  are  branches  of  the  Mississippi.  The  others  are  branches  of  the  Mis- 
souri. Point  out  the  Cumberland  River  —  Wabash  R.  —  Scioto  R.  These  are 
branches  of  the  Ohio. 

Point  out  the  Alleghany  Mountains  —  Cumberland  Mountains.  These  moun- 
tains separate  part  of  the  Western  from  the  Southern  States. 

Point  out  the  Choctaws —  Creeks —  Cherokecs —  Shaxcnees.  These  arc  the 
most  civilized  of  the  Indian  Tribes. 

Poihs  out  the  Oloes — Kickapoos — Osages — Jlssinihoines — Winnebagocs — 
Chippeioays — Sioux  [Soo].  These  Indians  generally  live  by  hunting  the  buf- 
falo and  other  game. 

Point  out  Columbus — Frankfort — IN'ashv  ille — Indianapolis —  Springfic  Id — 
Jefferson  City — Lansing — Little  Rock — Madison — Iowa  City.  These  are  the 
capitals  of  the  Western  States.     St.  Paul  is  the  capital  of  Minnesota  Territory. 

Point  out  Cincinnati — Louisville — St.  Louis — Chicago  —  Milwaukie — 
Cleveland — Lexington. 


i 


\i 


;!"-  anfeiw«Miiri"  lihiii  -^itel.tl^■1■l-a^l^.a■>fi^ 


^it 


^"  PRIMARY  OEOflRAPHY. 

LKSb'ON  r.i. 

GRRi:.\LANI),    UUITISII    A  \I  K  R  I  C  A  ,    ETC. 

1.  Chkknlaxi)  is  the  most  nortinn,  part  of  Awnni,  and 
tliorofuro  lies  nonivr  to  tlio  nortli  pol..  tliiin"  any  other  part 
of  tlu'  Western  lleiMisplioiv.  It  lu'longs  to  Doninark,  and 
IM  one  of  the  coldi'.st  countrios  in  tho  world.  Walrnses,  or 
Sea  CowH,  Seals,  White  Ihiw,  and  Rein  Deer  idjound  here. 


U'alrust'd  — Wliito  Iluurt. 


Qrccninmler  killing  a  Seal. 


2.  The  inhabitants  of  Greenland  are  similar  to  the  Esqui- 
maux ;  they  are  dexterous  in  the  manacjemcnt  of  their  Ca- 
noes or  Iu,J<d:^,  and  kill  Seals  in  the  way  shown  in  the  pic- 
ture. Some  of  these  people  have  been  taught,  by  the  mis- 
sionaries, to  read  the  Bible,  and  attend  Christiim  tcorship. 

torSliT' UM  7,  ^  ■  ^^''■'^  i^.«r "^""'^  •     -•  ^"  ^''^t  "^«  t''«  inhabitants  dex- 
terous !~V,  hut  iiavc  some  of  the  people  been  tanght ?    3.  What  does  Russian 


6.  ' 

Ameri 
(iuccd 


I'll  l8jmM.MH.H 


nUSSIAN  AND  DRITISII  AMr.UICA. 


01 


n.  RrssiAV  Amkiuca,  or  (lu!  Kussiuii  Posws.sions,  occiipifs 
ih:  wmt  urshm  jxirf  uf  Aim  ricn.  This  is  a  cold,  hanvK  rc-^ion, 
iiiliahitod  by  IiidiaiiH  and  Ks(niiiiiaii\,  jiiid  a  (i.'W  Kiissian.s  : 
till'  latter  nro  ciiiiM-jvil  i)riii('ii)ally  in  trading  with  tho  natives 
tor  l\irt<. 

4.  IJimisii  AMKiiK-A  hi'lon^M  to  Crcat  Britain.  It  contains 
Kiw  Jirifiiin,  Ciniii'lo,  Xni-  /inin.Kirir/,;  Xnra  ,%'nfi<i,  ami  Xnr- 
JniDidliiwI.  Canada  is  divided  into  thu  rrovincea  of  Canada 
East  and  ( jinada  West. 

T).  It  is  very  c(»ld  in  these  re<^ions  in  winter,  nnd  the  snin- 
mers  are  shorter  than  in  the  United  Statos;  yet,  in  some 
parts  of  the  coinitry,  ij,ml  crops  of  Indhn-corn,  Wheat,  Rye, 
Oa.tH,  ami  Ihfaffn'M  are  prodnced 


Falli  of  Niagara. 

C.  The  Cataract,  or  Full.s  of  Niagara,  surpass  all  others  in  the  world  for 


gran- 


America  occupy?    4.  What  does  British  America  contain  ?    5.  What  are  p.-v 
(luccl  !„  some  parts  of  tho  country  ?     0.  For  what  do  the  Falls  of  Niagara  but- 


li 


.„,ai.:  *. 


i! " 


\ 


:\ 


% 


im  '■' 


^2  TRIMARY  r.EOt!RAPIIY. 

drur  mid  mairnijiccnr.e.  :  !!..>  wholo  r.f  the  wutcr  flnwiii^  from  tlio  groat  lakc^ 
.lL-s,Tn.ls  -viT  a  r..ik  that  i.  inndi  higher  than  the  hight.st  houses :  tho  ronr  of 
fho  cataract  is  lioard  for  several  miles. 

7.  Montreal,  in  Canii<lii  East,  is  f/ie  mplfnl  of  the  Jintinh 
n>mc8moM.  It  i8  tho  largest  eity  In  British  iViiierica.  The 
IJonian  (^Mtholio  cathedral,  in  iMontreal,  is  the  laryent  place 
..f  worship  in  the  New  Worhl.  ]t  will  ncconinunlat.  ten 
thousand  pooi)le. 

S.  iNew  ]3rnnHwi(!k  lias  an  extensive  trade  in  tlwhrr,  and 
Nova  .Scotia,  to  which  the  island  of  Capo  Breton  is  attached, 
in  Pkififer  of  Ihris,  Coal,  and  Qnmh>'mcs.  Newibundland 
is  noted  for  its  Cod /Uierics,  which  employ  a  great  many  Ami:- 
rican,  Eivjlwh  and  French  vessels,  and  Jkhermen. 


LESSON  85. 

MEXICO    AND    UPPER   CALIFORNIA. 

1.  Mexico,  formerly  called  New  Spain,  is  an  extensive  coun- 
try, which  belonged  to  the  Spanish  government  for  almost 
three  hundred  years;  but  it  has  been  independent  of  that 
power  since  the  year  1821. 

2.  The  silver  mines  of  Mexico  have  been  long  celebrated,  and  have  yielded 


ill 
1 


pa^a  all  others?     7.  What  is  Montreal?    8.  In  what  has  New  Brunswick  an 

^T^^  Sf  f  r*?  ""^'S'^n  ^"^^  Scotia?-For  what  is  Newfoundland 
noted  r —  What  do  they  employ  ? 

i^  S!f  "?''"■  T\v^o''*r,'  ^^'i'^""'  ^"""^""^y  called  ?-Sinco  what  time  has 
It  been  independent?    2.  What  have  the  silver  mines  yielded?    3.  What  nro 


the  c 
peopl 
posed 
occur 
What 
—  W 


.ilr4iiii;»  riMWWir'  r'lrr 


MEXICO  AND  YUCATAN. 


0.1 


immcmc  irmlih.    ( )iio  cf  thcso  initios  ifl  mhl  to  bo  a  (,imrter  of  a  inilo  dtcp,  and 
to  oxtcml  eight  niilos  undur  grouml. 

'I  Indian-corn,  Suf^ar,  Cofrr,  Indigo,  and  Cochineal,  nro  tlio  chiof  pi^n 
(luctH.  Vvmi  Ihr  juice,  of  the  Mn-'w'n  plan/,  or  Ainoricmi  Aloe,  Pui.iuc,  ti.o 
pnuciiml  .Iiiiik  of  tlio  lower  diiM  ..f  tiu-  pcoplo,  is  miulo. 

4.  Tim  inhiibitiintH  of  Muxico  uniount  to  alKmt  s-wn  loillionH,  uii,l  all  profess 
Ihr.  Calhnfic  rflinim  :  Wwy  nro  eoinposod  .if  Whiles,  Indinns.nnd  other  races  : 
about  ono  half  iire  riidiaiiH,  who  nro,  for  tho  most  piirt,  fanners  and  lalMmr.Ts. 

T).  3Icxicr)  was  at  lir.st  a  jmwcrful  native  Slate  ;  aftrrwanls  it  imts  o^nqucre.d 
htj  the  Spaniards,  and  roniuinod  in  tiioir  i)ohs(>ss*1oh  for  three  hnndrcd  };  .irs.  In 
18:21  the  Mexicans  declared  their  indeprndrnee,!m\  sciianited  thoiiisclvcs  from 
Spain.  In  lS4(i,  'IT,  and  '-IS,  war  was  wa<;ed  between  the  United  Slates  and 
Mexico.  The  States  of  Upper  Calif ornia  and  Mm  Mexico  were  con  lerod 
by  th(,'  Americans.  Mexico,  and  several  other  cities,  were  also  captured,  but  wore 
restored. 

0.  Me.Kico,  the  capital,  is  one  of  the  finest  cities  inJlmerica:  it  contains  many 
handsome  buildings,  and  is  surrounded  by  lakes  and  hij^h  mountains.  On  some 
of  tho  lakes  in  the  vicinity  of  the  city,  there  are  Hoalin^  islands,  on  which  a 
variety  of  lino  fniils  and  vegetables  are  raised.  I'uobia,  Uuadaluxara,  and 
Guanaxuato,  are,  next  to  3Iexico,  tho  most  important  cities. 

7.  The  Peiiin,sula  of  Yucatiin  lios  northmml  of  Gitafuna/a, 
and  iccsftcard  of  Ilimdaras  Ihtj.  It  oiicu  furmetl  a  ^wr)!  o/ 
Mexico,  but  liiiH  heou  for  Home  years  independent.  Miiliog- 
any  and  log-wood  are  the  most  important  products.  Merida, 
an  inlanrl  town,  is  fhc  caintal  Campeche,  on  tho  west  side 
of  the  PeninsuUi,  is  tlie  prinelpal  sea-port. 


tho  chief  products?— From  what  is  th.,  principal  <lri,ik  of  the  lower  class  of  tho 
people  made .''  4.  What  do  tho  inhabitants  profess  ?  —  Of  what  u. ->  . ',ey  coiii- 
posed  ?  5.  What  wius  Mexico  at  first  ?  —  What  aftcr^vards  took  („  i.  ■  .-  —What 
occurred  in  1821  ?-  In  184(i,  '47,  '48  ?-  What  States  were  conquerod  ?  G. 
What  is  Mexico  t—\\  hut  aro  on  some  of  the  lakes  ?  7.  How  does  Yucatan  lie  ? 
—  What  did  It  onco  form  ?  —  What  is  Merida  ?  —  What  is  r-r.mpeehe  ?    ' 


11 


!,i 


l\ 


iM 


..H-  -mmi  s 


>'        » 


J        ,! 


i 


J'iM' 


64 


PRIMARY  GEOGRAPHY. 


LESSON  36. 
GUATIMALA    AND    THE   WEST   INDIES. 

1.  GuATiMALA,  or  Central  America,  occupies  the  most  south- 
ern part  of  North  America.  Like  Mexico,  it  was  long  subject 
to  Spain,  but  is  now  also  independent.  The  soil  is  fertile, 
and  silver  mines  are  numerous. 

2.  Among  the  mountains  there  are  several  volcanoes;  one  of  these,  the  Wafer 
Volcano,  occasionally  throws  out  vast  quantities  of  water.  Earthquakes  often 
occur  here,  l)y  some  of  which  cities  have  been  destroycl.  San  Salvador  is  the 
capital,  but  New  Guatimala  is  the  principal  town  of  this  republic. 

3.  Earthquakes  are  violent  shakings  of  the  earth,  in  which  the  ground  somo- 
tlmes  opens,  and  engulfs  large  cities :  fire,  smoke,  and  even  toiTcnts  of  water, 
occasionally  burst  forth  from  those  fearful  openings.  In  our  happy  country, 
earth(£ualies  seldom  take  place,  and  ai-c  never  very  violent. 

The  West  Indies  comprise  a  considerable  number  of  islands, 
of  which  Cuba,  Ilatjti,  and  Jamaica,  are  the  largest.  Some 
of  these  islands  belong  to  Spain,  some  to  Great  Britain,  and 
some  to  other  Eui'opean  nations. 

5.  Hayti,  or  St.  Domingo,  is  inhabited  almost  entirely  by 
negroes,  who  have  become  independent,  and  have  a  govern- 
ment and  president  of  their  own.  Port  au  Prince  is  the 
capital.  On  this  island  the  first  Spanish  colony  in  America 
was  established  by  Columbus.  : 


Questions.  —  1.  "What  does  Guatimala  occupy?  2.  What  is  one  of  the 
volcanoes  called  ? — What  often  occur  ?  3.  Describe  earthquakes  ?  4.  Which  arc 
the  largest  of  the  West  India  islands  ?  5.  On  what  island  are  the  negroes  inde- 
pendent ?  —  What  was  established  here  by  Columbus  ?  6.  What  are  the  chief  pro- 


■ftitf^a.tupiiiiisi  t»*}tmn 


•iStm 


M).»i;ii.fi|iiiBiujml.ilu 


astate'-gsii  if  towSM'Wi<iW»iainili>iiJrinjitir>\'i,jaiff . 


ng  subject 
I  is  fertile, 


)se,  the  Water 
'iquakes  often 
alvador  is  the 


ground  somo- 
cnts  of  water, 
ippy  country, 

of  islands, 
St.  Some 
•itain,  and 

Qtirely  by 

a  govern- 

ice  is  the 

n  America 


s  one  of  the 
4.  Wliieli  arc 
negroes  indc- 
the  chief  pro- 


THE  WEST  INDIES.  05 

G.  The  climate  of  the  West  Indies  is  warm,  and  the  soil 
very  fartile.  Siujar,  Coffee,  Allspice,  Oranges,  Pineapples, 
and  Biuana.^,  are  the  chief  products.  A  great  number  of 
^'fssels  trade  constantly  between  the  United  States  and  the 
iVest  Indies. 


I'  rricane  in  iho  West  Indies. 


7.  Tremendous  h'.rr.czr.cs.  or  storms  of  wind  and  rain,  sometimes  occur,  in 
which  great  .J.amao;.j  is  sustained.  Houses  and  trees  are  blown  down  by  the 
force  of  the  winj,  and  ships  are  wallowed  up  by  the  raging  waves  of  the 
ocean. 

8.  These  i,s1auds  are  inhabited  .'j.osLl-  by  negroes,  about  one-fourth  of  whom 
are  slaves.  The  white  inhabitants  are  chiefly  planters  and  merchants.  The 
blacks  who  were  formerly  slaves  in  the  British  and  French  islands  are  now  free. 

^  9.  Havana  is  the  largest  city  in  the  West  Indies;  Kingston  is  the  largest 
city  in  the  British  islands,  and  St.  Pierre  [Peer]  in  the  French. 


ducts?  7.  What  sometimes  occur?  — What  are  blown  down?  — What  are 
swallowed  up?  8.  By  whom  are  these  islands  mostly  inhabited?— What  are 
the  white  inhabitants  chiefly?  9.  Which  is  the  largest  city  in  the  West 
Indies? 


tef 


m 


No.  8.  — MAP   OF  NORTH   AMERICA. 


«fr 


m) 


111 
0 

U! 

0 


tai 


on 

i?( 

ica 

JV 

Gi 

tli( 
bio 

JVi 
Bv 

cai 

Th 
Iu( 


i  i 


:afe«ss>s 


^     ..■:-^^"" 


40 


'»'■■  v^ 


.  1  4',?''. 


MAP  OF  NORTH  AMERICA. 


LESSON  87. 


67 


No.  8  is  a  3I;ip  of  North  America.  This  is  the  largest  division  of  the  Wcst- 
eni  Continent.  It  contains  tlio  nuwt  important  nations,  ami  tlie  eiiicf  part  of 
llie  iiiliabitants  of  tlic  New  "World. 

The  Arctic  Ocean  bounds  North  America,  on  the  nortli;  the  Pacific' 
Ocean,  on  t!ic  west;  and  the  Atlantic  Ocean,  on  the  ea.st.  The  I'acific  Oceaic 
and  the  Caribliean  80a  bound  it  on  the  south. 

Point  out,  on  the  ^laj),  the  .flrclic  Ocean  — Pacific  Ocran  —  Jinnnlir 
Ocean— Carihhcan  Sca  —  Bufuis  Hay  —  Hudson's  Buy  —  Honduras  Ban 
—  Gulf  of  Mcrico  —  GiiJf  of  California. 

Point  out  Bihring's  IBcer'-ings']  'Sirail— Davis'  Sirail— Hudson's  Sirai' 
—Bcllisle  ITkl-ik'']  Sfrail.  lieining's  Strait  is  f(jrty  miles  wide.  It  .sc^parate  • 
North  America  from  Asia,  at  the  part  where  they  approiich  nearest  each  otiier. 

Point  out  tile  Rocky  Mountains — Mexican  Cordilleras  or  Sierra  Madre 

.QUcghany  Mountains— Mount  St.  E/ias  —  Mount  Brown.    The  highest  moun- 
tain in  North  America  is  3Iornt  St.  Elias.     It  is  more  than  three  iniles  liigh. 

Pomt  out  Grca^  Slave  Lake — L.  Winnipeg  —  L.  Superior  —  L.  Huron 

L.  Michigan — L.  Erie. 

Point  out  Mackenzie's  River— Mlson  R.—Saslcalchawan  R.— Mississippi 
R.  —  Rio  Grande —  Columhia  R.  —  St.  Laierence  R.  The  hist  is  the  river 
on  which  Montreal  stands. 

Point  out  the  West  Indies— tho  islands  of  Cuba— Hayli— Jamaica— Porl,> 
Rico—Caribhee  Islands— St.  Salvador.  The  latter  is  the  first  part  of  Amer- 
ica that  wiis  discovered  by  Columbus. 

Point  out  the  Peninsula  oi  Jllaska-Old  California— Yucatan-Florida— 
JYova  Scotia — Isthmus  of  Panama  or  Darien. 

Point  out  tho  Russian  Possessions — Greenland — U7iiled  Stales— Mexico — 
Guatimala,  or  Central  America. 

Point  out  JSfeio  Britain — Canada — Mw  Brunswick  (this  is  represented,  01. 
the  Map,  by  the  letters  N.  Bll.)— JVoua  Scotia— JYcufouiidl and.  These  divi- 
sions comprise  British  America. 

Point  out  Boothia  —  Prince  William's  Land — Labrador  —  East  Main — 
JVew  North  Wales — JVew  South  Wales.  These  aiv  districts  belonging  to  Nev 
Britain. 

Point  out  Montreal— Washington— Mezico — San  Salvador.  These  are  th. 
capitals  of  the  North  American  States. 

Point  out  JVciD  York  —  Philadeli'ui a  —  Baltimore  —  Puehla  —  Havanu. 
Tho  first  is  the  largest  city  in  America :  the  last  is  the  largest  in  the  Wes: 
Indies. 


I "11 

II*  •• 


Is^h ') 


'I'll  <)mk,^ 


.  t.'.'l 
.1  ■  - 1 


'-  I".'-'"'     ' 


win 


68  PRIMARY  GEOGRAPHY. 

LESSON  38. 
HISTORV    OF    AMERICA. 

Besides  the  geogi-aphy  of  ilie  United  States  nnd  other  parts  of  America  which 
rho  scholar  had  studied,  it  is  necessary  that  some  knowledge  of  the  history  of 
those  countries  should  be  acquired. 

1.  Geography  tells  us  where  a  coimtnj  is  situated,  and  v-hat 
it  contains.  By  history  we  are  informed  vJiat  eventfi  have 
tahen  place  in  any  j:)articidar  part  of  the  earth  in  times  past . 

2.  America  is  often  called  the  New  World,  because  it  has 
not  been  so  long  known  as  Europe,  Asia,  and  Africa.  It 
was  discovered  in  the  year  1492,  hy  Christopher  Columhus,  an 
Italian  navigator. 


Coluinhiia  leaving  I'alos. 


Questions.  —  1.    What  does  geography  tell  us?  —  Of  what  arc  we  in- 
formed by  history?    2.    When,  and  by  whom,  was  America  discovered? 


HISTORY  OF  AMERICA.  69 

Columbus  Avas  a  learned  and  ingenious  man  :  he  sup. 

posed  that  by  sailing  westward  from  Europe,  he  Avould  arrive 

at  the  East  Indies,  and  be  able  to  bring  back  with  him  the 

old,  diamonds,  and  rich  spices  Avith  which  that  part  of  the 

earth  was  known  to  abound. 

4.  After  experiencing  many  delays,  Columbus  set  sail  from 
:  Ul<)>^,  a  port  in  Spain,  and  in  a  few  weeks  he  landed  on  St. 
Sdlmdor,  or  Guanaliani,  one  of  the  islands  now  called  the 
West  Indies. 

5.  ColumLus  found  the  inhabitants  kind  and  friendly.,  but  different  in  form 
:ind  cninplcxion  from  any  race  he  had  ever  before  seen.  Ueing  persuaded  that 
the  i.sliiiids  he  discovered  were  a  part  of  India,  he  named  the  people  Indians  ; 
and  tlie  term  was  afterwards  applied  to  all  the  original  inhabitants  of  .i\jnerica. 

0.  On  the  return  of  Columbus  to  Spain,  he  was  received  with  great  dislinc- 
fion,  and  every  one  rejoiced  at  the  discovery  he  had  made.  He  afterwards  per- 
formed three  other  voyages  to  .America,  during  which  he  found  other  islands,  and 
discovered  the  Continent. 

7.  In  the  year  1499,  Amerieus  Vespucius,  also  an  Italian,  visited  the  New 
World.     On  his  return  to  Europe  he  published  the  first  account  ever  given  of 

t,  and  artfully  induced  many  persons  to  believe  that  ho  was  the  original  discov- 
•rer:  America  was,  in  consequence,  unjustly  named  after  him,  instead  of  being 
named  after  Gulumbus. 

8.  Being  found  to  contain  greal  quantities  of  gold  and  silver,  America  was 
soon  visited  by  many  unprincipled  Spaniards,  who,  in  their  pursuit  ifter  wealth, 
robbed  tho  natives,  and  treated  them  with  great  cruelty. 

8.  At  what  part  of  tho  earth  did  Columbus  suppose  he  would  arrive  ?  4.  From 
what  port  did  he  set  sail  ?  -—  On  what  island  did  he  land  ?  5.  What  did  Colum- 
bus find  the  inhabitants  to  be  ?— What  did  he  call  them ?  6.  How  was  Colum- 
bus received,  on  his  return  to  Spain  ?  —  What  did  he  afterwards  perform  ?  7. 
When  did  Amerieus  Vespucius  visit  the  New  World  ?  8.  What  was  America 
found  to  coniain? 


IiIIhI 


I 


'jt& 


JO 


I'RIMARY  GEOGRAPHY. 


LESSON  39. 
IILSTORY    OV    NORTH    AMERMJA. 

1.  America,  at  the  tiiDo  it  was  discovered,  I'ontaii.cJl  two 
populous  Empires;  Mexico,  in  North,  and  lira,  in  South 
America. 

2.  The  inliabitants  of  tlicsc  countries  Avcre  Viot  P.'iva,a;es, 
like  many  of  the  other  Indians;  they  had  romlor  (jixcrn- 
r.iPTits,  and  lived  in  cities  and  ioams  of  nome  extuit,  one  of  v,  !,ie!i. 
tlie  city  cm'  Mexi'^o,  Avas  so  large,  that  it  was  supposed  to  con- 
lain  twenty  thou.'-and  Lenses. 

;1  la  a  short  (iiii..  Cortex.,  a  Spanish  General,  lanJoJ  in  ?i:i  xico,  and  began 
the  comjuoat  of  t}i.:;t  country  :  his  soldiers  were  supplied  with  gnus,  cannon  and 
horse- .  The  ^Icxicuns,  th(.u;.di  much  more  numerous,  were  armed  only  with 
bows  and  arrows,  and  clubs. 

4.  The  fire  and  noise  of  the  cannon  were  by  them  l)plieved  to  be  ligldning 
and  ihunder  front,  heaven ;  and  the  horses,  which  they  had  never  before  seen, 
they  suptiosed  to  be,  with  their  riders,  hideous  and  cruel  monsters.  The  Mexi- 
cans were,  in  consequence,  terrified  and  alarmed,  and  were  finally  subdued  by  the 
t?paniards. 

5.  The  first  settlement  or  colony  established  in  the  coun- 
try we  inhabit,  was  made  hy  ]^>coplc  from  Einjland,  in  the  year 
1607.  The  first  town  they  built  was  Jamrfitmvn,  on  James 
river,  in  A'^irginia. 


QUKSTIONS.  —  1 .  What  empires  were  in  America  at  the  time  it  was  discov- 
ered ?  2.  What  had  the  inhabitants  ?  —  In  what  did  they  live  ?  3.  Who  landed 
in  Mexico?  4.  What  did  these  people  l)clieve  the  fire  and  noise  of  the  cannon 
to  be  ?  — What  did  they  suppose  the  horses  and  their  riders  to  be  ?  5.  By  whom 
was  the  first  settlement,  &c.,  made,  and  in  what  year?  —  What  town  did  they 


witl 
wa.s 


i 

tod 
into 
spixi 
8 
glad 
En^ 
pres 


the 

buih 
to  S{ 

Q 


nMM 


•f  ^v};icIl, 
1  to  coii- 

aiid  Ijogan 
eaniKin  ami 
1  only  vitli 

e  lightning 
)oforo  Hcen, 
The  Mcxi- 
lucd  by  tiio 

he  coun- 

tJw  year 

n  James 


s^as  discov- 
Vho  laiulwl 
the  cannon 
'.  By  whom 
u  did  they 


HISTORY  OF  NORTH  AMERICA. 


ettlcrs  were  often  attacked  by  the  natives,  and  fought  many  battles 
a  DUO  of  which,  Caplnin  John  Smith,  a  bravo  and  i^ilhuit  soldier, 
irisoncr. 


71 


rucahontnu  saving  tliu  Lifo  of  Captain  Snutli. 

7.  Captain  Smith  was  condemned  to  death ;  and,  when  the  savages  were  about 
to  destroy  him  with  tlicir  clubs,  Pocahontas,  the  daughter  of  the  Indian  chief 
into  whoso  power  ho  had  fallen,  interceded  for  him,  and  induced  her  father  to 
spixro  his  lifo. 

8.  He  returned  to  Jamestown,  and  was  received  by  his  friends  with  joy  and 
gladness.  Pocahontas,  his  deliverer,  was,  some  time  afterwards,  married  to  an 
Englishman  of  the  name  of  Rolfc,  who  carried  her  to  England,  where  she  was 
presented  at  the  court  of  Kiag  James  I. 


LESSON  40. 
HISTORY    OF   THE   UNITED    STATES. 

1.  At  various  periods,  within  seventy  or  eighty  years  after 
the  settlement  of  Virginia,  colonies  were  established  by  the 

build  ?    G.  Who  was  taken  prisoner  by  the  Indians  ?    7.  Who  induced  her  father 
to  spare  Captain  Smith's  life  'i     8.  To  whom  was  Pocahontas  married  ?  . 

Questions.  —  1.    Where  were   colonies   established   by  the   English? 


'«M 


m 


\  ,"^'1 


fMitli^'^  'HJ'jjtlffJf  r  ftf -*■ 


i.^mSfe, 


72 


PRIMARY  GEOGRAPHY. 


P^nglish,  ill  Kcw  Eiujlaml,  Ponisyhania,  Marjlaml,  and  the 
Caroluias. 

*-.  ISew  York  w.ih  colonized  by  the  Dutch,  but  was  nftorwards  conquered  by 
the  Kiigli.sh.  Now  Jersey  was  at  first  settled  by  the  Danes;  Delaware  by  the 
Sjredcs  and  Firms ;  and  IMiehigan,  Illinois,  &c.,  by  the  French.  All  these 
colouie.s  became  in  time  ]?ritis^h  provinces. 


Landing  of  the  I'ilgriing. 

3.  The  first  white  inhabitants  of  iSTew  Enghmd  hinded 
nt  P///mouth,  in  the  year  1G20,  and  were  called  ihe  Pikjrirm. 
They  were  a  religious  and  moral  people,  Avho  left  their 
native  country,  because  they  were  not  permitted  to  wor- 
ship God  in  the  manner  they  believed  lo  be  agreeable  to 
his  Avill. 

4.  The  I'ilgrims  suffered  much  from  the  hostilities  of  the  natives,  ar:d  the 
severities  of  the  climate,  but  they  persevered  in  their  exertions  to  sef.tlo 


•2.  What  nation  colonized   New  York?  —  Who  settled   New  Jersey?  —  De- 
laware?—Midiigan,  and   Illinois?     i].   Where,  and  at  what  time,  did   the 

What  were   thoy  called? 


first  white  inhabitants  of  Now   England  land? 


From   what   did    the    Pilgrims   suffer?      5.   When  did   William   I'cun 


G 
the 
paii 

7. 

/lis  ti 
a  Ion 


como 
the  : 


HISTORY  OF  THK  UNITED  STATES. 


73 


tlio  country.  Tlicy  fnuiuluJ  citios  ami  towns,  cburclics  and  uollcf^cs ;  ami 
tVoni  a  HmuU  uud  foublo  band,  havo  become  a  nii  roud  aud  important 
IHjople. 

0.  Ill  the  year  1G82,  a  numbov  of  Friends,  or  Quakers, 
came  with  William  Peun  iVom  England.  They  fonnded  the 
city  of  Philadelphia,  and  settled  Pennsylvania;  ^vhich  be- 
came, in  a  .short  time,  one  of  the  most  nourishing  colonies 
in  North  America. 


William  I'ciin's  Treaty  Willi  the  Indians,  at  riiilaJelpliia. 

G.  William  Penu  was  a  good  and  just  man.  lie  acquired 
the  friendship  of  the  Indians,  formed  a  trcatij  icith  them,  and 
paid  them  for  the  lands  that  the  colonists  occiq)led. 

7.  lie  wa.s,  in  conseciiicncc,  greatly  beloved  by  tbesc  people.  They  respected 
/lis  memonjfor  many  years  after  his  death,  and  lived  iu  peace  and  harmony  for 
a  long  time  with  the  inhabitants  of  Pennsylvania. 


como  from  England ?     G.  What  was  William  Pcnn?  — What  did  ho  do  with 
the  Indians'!'     7.    What  took  place   in   consequence?     8.   When  was   Can- 


:f^'^i; 


I 


ii 


■a>i.^> 


74 


nuMAitY  fJKoorsAniY. 


8.  Citniulu,  anil  nearly  tlui  wh.lir  (if  wliiit  i.s  ii>(\v  15ri(i>-!i  Aiiiericii,  wmh  first 
Buttlfil  liy,  atul  rciiKJiicrl  for  a  conMili'mblo  jMiriiil  in,  the  inw.-io.-iwiou  uf  tliu 
l"V;iich ;  but  about  cifflitj  years  affo,  it  wiw  udiKii.ieivd  by  tliu  Knglisli. 

1).  At  tlio  bii'ili;  of  Qdobi'',  f  .w;.'lir  bdtwocn  tlu;  si.iilior.s  of  tluso  two  nations 
the  f^duruls  of  buth  (innics  wcrf  kilkd.  Goiicnil  \\'(;lff  wiim  the  Kiigii.-!i,  nu'l 
tho  Mun|uid  IMoutculiu  tlio  Fivm-h  tainin:a»lci-. 


II  ii 


if 


Mi 


I.KS.SOX  41. 
HISTORY    OF    THH    UNITED    S  T  A  T  E  S  -  CW.««„/. 

1.  Tho  I'rUi.sli  Colonies,  now  the  Uuitod  Sttitcs,  thougli 
mucli  sinnUiT  vsevcuty  yeiirs  ago  tliiiu  ttt  present,  were,  how- 
ever, i-tri/  Jlonrishiiiii  <uiil proxpcroas.  George  III.,  then  king 
of  Gretit  Britain,  imjnsdy  hiid  a  tax  iii>ui)  ka  ami  eariuiis-  otlur 
ariklcfi that  thcj   <>plv  urrc  in  the liaint ofoljlalniiKj  from Kiirojn  . 

2.  The  payment  of  tho  tjix  being  resisted  by  tho  Aniericiiii  i)eople,  they  were, 
in  conicquonec,  called  rehch  by  the  British  goveruujcnt,  aud  fleets  and  armio) 
were  s'jut  from  England  ti  fight  against  them. 

8.  In  order  to  defend  themselves,  tliu  inhabitants  of  thJH  country  raised  ar- 
mies, and  appointed  George  lV,is/ihi«;lon  to  lie  eommander-in-thief,  with  Gene- 
rals Gnrw:,  Gates,  fVui/ne,  Putnam,  and  ol Iters,  under  him. 

4.  The  fir.  battle  was  f  night  at  Lexini^'ton,  and  tJic  next  at  Bnnker''s  Hill. 
Though  the  Amerieans  were  unaceustomed  to  war,  and  badly  armed,  yet  they 
repulsed  many  of  tho  bravest  soldier.s  in  the  kiiig'.s  army,  commanded  by  some 
f)f  his  best  generals. 


ada  conquered  by  the  English?     9.  What  took  rdaco  at  the  battle  of  Que- 
bec? 

Q1JEST10X.S.  —  1.  ^^'Ilat  were  tho  British  colonies  seventy  years  ago? — Upon 
what  did  the  King  of  England  lay  a  tax?  2.  Wiiat  were  the  Amerieans 
called?  —  What  Aveie  sent  from  England  to  light  against  them?  o.  Who  was 
appointed  eommaniler-iii-ehief? — Yvho  were  ajipointed  \(nder  him?  4.  Where 
were    the    two   lirst   batile.s   fougiit?      [>.    M'hat   did   (ieneral   Wa^iiin'-'ton 


.vcjMhMMH 


HISTORY  or  Tin:  amhrican  revolution. 


75 


ffl 


inucJ. 

s,  though 
eve,  how- 
theii  kiiitr 
•'ioifs-  other 
>n  Ki'i'ojii . 

t',  tlu'V  W(Tl', 

and  armies 

ry  riiisod  ar- 
witli  (jiene- 

jiker's  Hill. 
uil,  yot  they 
lud  by  soinu 

;tlo  of  Quu- 


Aiiiericmis 
!.  Who  was 

4.  Where 
W'iisliingtoii 


H'irrenili'r  of  tlio  Ilciniaiis,  ,i(  TrcnKiii. 

T).  (loncral  Washington  afterwards  took  the  Urmnm  prisoners  at  Trrnion, 
'ind  Lml  Corrtmillis  and  his  armtj  prisoners  at  Yorklown ;  and  at  h-.ijrtli, 
after  a  war  whi.h  lasted  eij.dit  year,-,  the  15ritis!i  arniios  were  driven  from  tho 
country. 

t 

^  0.  This  period  is  called  the  American  Rernlnlion,  or  tho  War  of  the  Ilevolu- 
tion.  In  that  contest,  Great,  Britain  hut  Jifh/  thnnsand  soldiers,  and  spent  more 
limn  four  hundred  millions  of  dollars. 

7.  On  tho  4th  of  July  177G.  Cnnrirrm  declared  the  conntrf/ 
fire  (ind  iiidrpetidenf,  under  the  title  of  United  States  of 
America.  It  is  in  reiuombranco  of  this  Gjreat  national  event, 
that  tlio  4tli  of  July  is  celebrated  as  a  holyday,  or  a  day  of 
rejoicing. 

8.  Besides  the  gallant  patriots  who  fought  to  achieve  tho  independence  of  our 
country,  Fr««/.-;/n,  Jifrrsmu  Adams,  Hancock,  and  many  others,  were  highly 
distinguished  for  their  abilities  as  writers,  orators,  and  statesmen. 


i7-r9^*'  J^'l'?n  '^*'"'  J"'''"'  '^•'"'''^  •     '•  ^''''■'^'  ™«  '^™''  "'1  the  4th  of  Julv 
ilihf     8.   \V  ho  distinguished  themselves  as  statesmen,  &c.  ? 


■  k  'I 


76  PRIMARY  (iKOaRAPIIY, 

LKSSON  42. 
HISTORY    OF   Till',    UNITED  STATES,    ETC. 

1.  /m ///« //«o*  1780,  Gt'iionil  Washington  AvaH  ek'Otcd  tlu 
fir.st  PiVHulent  of  the  United  StiituH.    Jle  porfonncMl  the  duties 
oi'  that  station  Ibr  ('ajht  >/<<tr(f,  and  then  retired  to  his  resi- 
dence, at  Mount  Vrnion,  Avhere,  to  the  regret  oi'  the  AvhoU' 
nation,  he  shortly  afterwards  died. 


Tho  Washington  Family. 

2.  This  great  mnn  is  called  the  Father  of  his  counlnj,  because,  by  his  skill  in 
war,  he  secured  tho  Independence  of  the  United  States;  and,  by  the  wisdom 
of  his  govcruiiicnt,  gained  for  his  native  land  the  respect  of  foreign  nations. 

3.  The  presidents  -wlio  succeeded  Washington  were  JoJin 
Adams,  Thomas  Jefferson,  James  Madison,  James  Monroe,  John 
Qu'tnc}/  'Adams,  Andrcio  Jttclcson,   Martin   Van  Buren,   Wil- 

QuKSTiONS. — 1.  When  was  General  Washington  elected  president?  —  How 
long  did  he  perform  the  duties  of  that  station  ?  —  Where  did  ho  die?  2.  What 
is  he  called?    5J.  Name  the  presidents  that  succeeded  General  Washington. 


4. 
were  i 
took  \ 
tured 

— w: 


1 


L'Ctcd  t\\v 
the  duties 
I  his  rc'si- 
he  AvliuU' 


f  Im  Hklll  in 
thp  wisJoiu 
nations. 

vere  JuJnt 
iroe,  John 
ren, 

?nt?  —  How 
?  2.  What 
kVashinglon. 


HIHTOIIY  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES,  ETC.  77 

Ham  Uinry  Uorrlm,,,  John  Tijln',  James  K,  JhIL  and  Zarhanj 
hn/lor, 

4.  Ill  (lu!  jc'.'ir  1H12,  and  .luring  tlio  ].ri'.Mi.lfiipy  of  Mr.  Mu(li,ion,  war  iraa  dc- 
rhtrcd  hj  Con^nsn  a^ainsl  (irml  liriinin,  locau.-f  tliat  imti.m  capturotl  our 
vi'Mwis,  uiiil  iiii|ir(ssiMl  our  Ktuuicn. 

5.  ThiH  Hecon.l  pontost  wi(li  tlio  Uriti.li  lOinpiro  Ia,sto.l  two  years  and  a  half; 
lurii.-  which  iH'rio.1,  iniMiy  buttlus  wen;  fought,  and  koiuo  l.rillii.ut  vii'toriuH  gained, 
iiotli  liy  our  army  and  navy. 

(>.  Ptrnfs  victon/,  on  I,a!<o  Krie;  M' lhnnufili\  virtnry,  on  Luke  Chaiu- 
plaiu;  Ihfi  capture  of  Proctor's  army,  in  Canada,  l.y  (!,.n.  rai  llarrlNMi,  and  Ih, 
victory  of  JVcw  Orleans,  gained  by  Generul  Jaekson,  were  the  inoBt  istrikinj;- 
events  of  tiiin  war, 

7.  Since  thu  im-hnl  of  the  revolution,  the  United  States 
luive  heconio  a  grout  mid  powerful  nation  ;  the  Stute.s  have 
increased //-ow  fhirtcai  to  thirt,/,  and  thu  inhabitants  aro  .seven 
times  more  numerou.s  than  they  were  .sixty  years  ago. 

S.  In  the  year  184(i,  Coiigross  deelarod  war  against  Mexic-o;  a  number  of  bat- 
tles wore  fought  between  the  United  Htatcs  and  Mexican  forces,  in  wliich  the 
latter  were  in  every  instance  defeated.  General,  now  President,  Taylor  gained 
splendid  victories  nt  Monterey  and  Bueua  Vista. 

0.  (fenend  Scott  afterwards  captured  the  cities  of  A'era  Cruz,  Riebla,  and 
Slexico;  nil  of  which  were  subsequently  restored.  Previous  to  the  capture  of 
the  latter  place,  several  hardly  contested  battles  were  fought  in  the  vicinity.  The 
Provinces  of  Upper  California  and  New  Mexico  were  also  conrjuered,  and  were 
confirmed  to  the  United  States  by  the  treaty  of  1S48. 

4.  What  took  place  in  1812?  5.  How  long  did  the  war  last?  0.  What 
were  its  most  striking  events?  7.  How  have  the  States  increased  ?  8.  What 
took  place  m  1840? -What  is  said  of  Gen.  Taylor?  0.  What  cities  were  can 
tured  by  Gen.  Scott  -What  took  ,.Iace  previous  to  the  capture  of  MexSf? 
—  ^\  hat  18  said  of  Upper  California,  &c.  ?  ' 


--T^-yv- 


i«^i 


IK) 


m 


78  PRIMARY  GEOGRAPHY. 

LESSON  43. 
SOUTH    AMERICA. 

1.  South  America,  the  soutliern  division  of  the  Western 
Continent,  is  (ai  extensive  Peniasida,  united  to  North  America 
by  flie  Isiliimis  of  Darien. 

2.  It  is  famous  for  its  lanje  rivers,  hhjli  mountains,  and  the 
ahiindance  of  its  <joId,  silver,  and  diamonds. 

3.  Tlic  Andes  is  the  most  extensive  range  of  mountains  in 
South  America.  Sorato  is  the  highest  peak  of  the  Andes. 
Cuiopaxl  is  the  most  elevated  volcano  on  the  globe.  It  has 
had  six  eruptions  within  a  century. 

4.  The  Amazon,  La  Plata,  Orinoco,  and  St.  Francisco,  are 
the  chief  rivers  of  the  region.  The  Amazon  is,  next  to  the 
Mississippi,  the  largest  river  in  the  world,  and  is  navigable 
for  three  thousand  miles. 

5.  Coffee,  Sugar,  and  the  Chocolatc-J^ut,  with  Pine-apples,  Bananas,  Or- 
anges, Lemons,  and  oilier  fruits,  arc  raised  in  various  quarters.  The  vanilla 
bean,  well  known  for  its  fragrant  odour,  grows  here. 

The  milk-trco,  which  produces  a  liquid  similar  to  cows'  inilk,  and  the  varlou.T 
trees  from  which  the  ludian-rubbor,  or  gum-clastic,  is  obtained,  abound  in  the 
warmer  regions. 

6.  The  principal  beasts  are,  t/ie  Jaguar,  or  Jlmerican  Tiger,  the  Puma,  T,'- 
pir,  Lama,  Great  Ant-eater,  and  Slolh.  Serpents  are  numerous,  and  some  ure 
BO  large  as  to  be  able  to  destroy  and  swallow  deer,  and  other  animals. 

Questions.  —  1.  What  is  South  America  ?  —  By  what  is  it  united  to  North 
America  ?  2.  For  what  is  it  famous '{  3.  Which  is  the  most  extensive  range 
of  mountains?  —  Which  is  the  higlie«t  peak? — Tlic  most  elevated  volcano? 
4.  Which  are  the  chief  rivers  ?     5.  W' hat  are  raised  in  various  quarters  ?     6. 


T 

twel 
but, 
dest 

{ 

Bn 

( 

1 

Ecu 
Un. 

Wh: 
dot 
10. 


'iiiliE^SiMMli 


0  Western 
ii  America 

'IS,  and  the 

uiitaiiis  in 
he  Andes, 
e.     It  has 


mcisco,  are 
ext  to  the 
navigal)le 


Bananas,  Or- 
The  vanilla 

ul  the  various 
bound  in  the 

i.e  Puma,  T>- 
and  some  ure 
lis. 

lited  to  North 
:tcnsive  range 
ated  volcano? 
quarters  ?     6. 


SOUTH  AMERICA. 


79 


7.  The  Rhea,  or  American  Ostrich,  and  the  Condor,  are  the  largest  Ameri- 
can birds :  besides  these,  there  is  an  almost  endless  variety  of  smaller  kinds  j 
Toucans,  Chatterers,  &c. 

Of  the  beautiful  little  Humming-Bird,  there  arc  nearly  a  hundred  diflferent 
species,  of  which  some  are  hardly  bigger  than  a  humble-bee. 


Toucan. 


IIiinimiiig-Biri). 


Chatterer. 


The  Rhea  is  taller  than  a  man,  and  the  wings  of  the  Condor  are  from  nine  to 
twelve  feet  iu  extent,  from  tip  to  tip.  The  Condor  generally  feeds  on  carrion ; 
but,  impelled  by  hunger,  a  couple  of  these  birds  have  been  known  to  attack  and 
destroy  a  full-grown  ox. 

8.  The  inhabitants  of  South  America  comprise  Whites, 
Indians,  and  Ncyroe-s.  The  latter  are  most  numerous  in 
Brazil,  where  they  are  held  as  slaves. 

9.  The  whites  are  chiefly  descendants  of  tlic  Spaniards  and 
Portuguese,  and  speak  the  language  of  those  nations. 

10.  South  America  includes  the  countries  of  JVew  Granada,  Venezuela, 
Ecuador,  Guiana,  Brazil,  Peru,  Bolivia,  Chili,  Buenos  Jlyrcs,  Paraguay, 
Uruguay,  and  the  Indian  territory  of  Patagonia. 

Which  are  the  principal  bea,sts ?  7.  Which  are  the  largest  birds?  8.  What 
do  the  inhabitants  of  South  America  comprise  f  9.  What  are  the  whites  chiefly  ? 
10.  What  countries  does  South  America  include  ? 


m^ 


■ff^nt'l 


20 


10 


50 


(80) 


MAP  OF  SOUTH  AMERICA. 


LESSON  44. 


81 


No.  9  is  a  Map  of  South  America.  TliLs  part  of  the  AVcstern  Continent  i, 
wtuated  to  the  southward  of  North  America.     It  is  also  .smaller  in  extent. 

South  America  i.s  bounded,  on  the  north,  by  the  Caribbean  Se;, ;  east,  by  th< 
Atlantic  Ocean;  smd  west,  })y  the  Pacific  Ocean.  It  is  a  great  Peninsula,  sur- 
rounded on  every  ,«ide  by  water,  except  where  the  Isthmus  of  Darien  or  J^anani;. 
[Pan-a-ma'']  connects  it  with  North  Anu-rica. 

J'oint  out,  on  the  Map,  the  Caribbean  Sea— Atlantic  Ocean— Pacific  Ocean 
— Isthmus  of  Darien  or  Panama. 

I'oint  out  the  Amazon  River— R.  dc  la  Plata— Orinoco  R.—R.  St.  Fran- 
cisco. These  are  the  principal  rivers  of  South  America.  The  Amazon  i.s,  next 
to  the  Mis,sissippi,  the  longest  river  in  the  world. 

Point  out  the  R.  JVcgro  —  R.  Caqueta  — Madeira  R.  —  Tapajos  R.—Ara- 
guay  R.—  Tocantins  R.— Paraguay  R.— Parana  R.  The  last  is  called,  in  the 
lower  part  of  its  course,  the  llio  de  la  Plata. 

Point  out  Lake  Maracaybo—L.  Titicaca.  The  last  is  situated  among  th. 
Andes,  at  an  elevation  of  more  than  two  miles  above  the  sea. 

Point  out  the  Andes  Mountains  —  Motint  Sorato  —  Mount  Cotopaxi.  The 
Andes  extend  four  thousand  eight  hundred  miles  along  the  west  coast  of  South 
America.  Mount  Sorato  is  the  highest  mountain  in  America,  It  i.s  almost 
live  miles  high.  Mount  Cotopaxi  is  the  highest  volcano  in  the  world.  It  is 
nearly  three  miles  and  a  half  high. 

Point  out  Cape  GaUinas  —  C.  Horn—C.  St.  Roque  [Roke'\—C.  Blanco. 
These  are  the  most  northern,  southern,  eastern,  and  western  points  of  South 
xVmerica. 

I'oint  out  the  Galapagos  Islands— Juan  Fernandez  Islands— L  of  Chiloe— 
Wellington  I.— Terra  del  Fuego  I.— Falkland  Is.— South  Georgi'i  L -St. 
Catharina  I. — Joannes  I. 

Point  out  Brazil— New  Granada— Venezuela— Ecuador— Peru— Bolivia 

—  Chili  [Chil'le']  —  Buenos  Ayres  —  Paraguay —  Uraguay  —  Patagonia 

Guiana  XGe-a'-na"].     British  Guiana  is  represented,  on  the  iMap,  by  the  letter 
B;  Dutt-L  Guiana  by  D;  and  French  Guiana  by  F. 

Point  out  Rio  Janeiro — Bogota  [Bo-go-ta'] — Caraccas—'-jr''o  [Kee'to'\ 

Lima  [Lce'wui] — Cliuquisaca  [Choo-kc-sa'-kal  —  Santiago— Buenos  Ayres 

Assumption-Montevideo     These  cities  are  the  capitals  of  the  South  American 
States.     Eio  Janeiro  is  the  largest  city  in  South  America. 

Point  out  Georgetotcn— Paramaribo— Cayenne  [Ki-enn''].  These  ore  th( 
capitals  of  British,  Dutch,  and  French  Guiana. 


?  !,. 


o^ 


PRIMARY  GEOGRAPHY. 


LESSOxN  45. 
NEW    GRANADA,   VENEZUELA,    &c. 

1.  For  some  time  previous  to  the  year  1831,  New  Grana- 
J)\,  Venezuela,  and  Ecuador,  formed  (he  Repuhlk  of  Colom- 
hki ;  but  they  are  now  separate  states.  They  contain  much 
fcrtih^  land,  and  abound  in  gold,  silver,  and  precious  stones. 
1.  Quito,  Bogota,  and  Caraccas,  arc  the  capitsds  of  these  countries.  Caraceas 
wa.s  destroyed  by  an  earthquake,  in  the  year  1812.  In  this  awful  visitation,  the 
strongest  buildings  were  overthrown,  and  the  earth  opened  and  swallowed  many 
o'  the  inhabitants.     The  city  has  been  since  rebuilt. 


Ciirarcns  (leftnij'cd  liy  an  Eartliqunku. 


3.  Guiana  is  a  fine,  fertile  region,  comprising  British  Gui- 
<ina,Duieh  Guiana,  and  French  Guiana.    Sugar,  coffee,  cloves, 


Questions.  —  1 .  What  did  New  Grenada,  Venezuela,  and  Ecuador  form, 
liefore  18B1  ?     2.  When  wris  Camiccas  destroyed?    3.  What  docs  Guiana  com- 


and 
Par 

4 
the 
For 

5. 
in  th 
naml 
comn 
in  Ai 

6. 

Janc{ 
other 


prise 
cover 
Whai 


BRAZIL-PERU.  So 

and  Cayenne  pepper,  grow  lieri  abundantly      GeorgetowM. 
Paramaribo,  and  Cayenne,  [Kirenn')  are  the  chief  towns. 

4.  Brazil,  the  largest  division  of  South  America,  is  one  of 
the  most  fertile  countries  in  the  world.  It  once  belonged  to 
Portugal,  but  it  now  forms  an  independent  empire. 

5.  The  greater  part  of  this  country  is  covered  with  vast  forests^  which  abound 
in  the  most  valuable  kinds  of  wood :  llio  Janeiro,  Bahia,  (Ba-ee'-a)  and  Per- 
nambuco,  are  the  chief  cities.  Eio  Janeiro,  the  capital,  is  the  largest  and  most 
commercial  city  in  South  America.  Its  harbour  is  considered  one  of  tho  finest 
in  America,  and  it  is  the  greatest  mart  in  the  world  for  the  exportation  of  coffee. 

6.  Sugar,  Coffee,  Cotton,  and  many  other  articles,  are  produced  in  abun- 
dance. Gold  mines  are  numerous,  and  diamonds  more  plentiful  than  in  am 
other  part  of  tho  earth. 

7.  Peru  has  long  been  famous  for  its  mipcs  of  gold  and 


Silvir  Mini;  iji  IV.u. 


4.  What  is  Brazil  ?  5.  With  wh&t  is  the  greater  part  of  this  countr\ 
covered?  —  What  is  the  capital?  6.  What  are  produced  in  abundance?  — 
What  are  numerous  and  plentii"ul  ?    7.  For  what  has  Peru  been  long  famous '! 


..>.,Si^.::««i 


84 


PRIMARY  GEOGRAPHY. 


Ufcr,  wliich  have  produced  vast  wealth ;  but  they  are  not 
0  rich  at  present  as  they  were  formerly, 

8.  On  tlio  cuiiHt  of  I'cvu  the  climate  i.s  hot,  itna  rain  i.s  uhiiost  unknown ; 
iuiong  tlio  mountiiins,  however,  tlie  weather  is  tempcralc,  and  sometimes  cold, 
•■vliile  niin  is  aljuncltiut.  Lima  (Lee'-ma)  i.s  the  capital.  Jlrequipa  and  Cuzco 
■i!C  the  chief  cities 

U.  Bolivia,  formerly  called  Upper  Peru,  was  named  after 
'hiicral  Bolivar.  It  is,  for  the  most  part,  nn  elevated  and 
temperate  region.  Wheat,  rye,  oats,  and  potatoes,  ar^  the 
;)roducts  of  the  higher  districts ;  and  rice,  cotton,  indigo,  &c., 
if  the  lower. 

10.  Mount  Sorato,  the  highest  uiountiiin  in  America,  is  in  Boli\ia :  Chuqui- 
-aca  is  the  capital.  I'otosi  i.^  one  of  the  chief  towns.  It  stands  on  a  mountain 
■/nil  is  famous  for  the  vast  quunttiies  of  silver  it  has  produced. 


LESSON  4G. 
CHILI,    BUENOS    AYRES,    ETC. 

1 .  Chili  is  uJInc,  fcffik  country,  situated  between  the  Andes 
and  the  Pacific  Ocean.  Earthqnalccs  are  frequ'  %  and  volca- 
noes numerous,  in  this  country 

2.  Wheat  and  loine  are  the  chief  products.  Gold,  dicer, 
and  copper  mines  abound.  Santiago  is  the  capital  of  Chili' 
and  Valparaiso  the  chief  connnercial  city. 


S.  What  ii3  almost  unknown  on  the  coast  of  Peru?  — What  is  the  weather 
miong  the  mountains ?- Which  are  the  chief  cities?     9.  After  whom  wa.s 
iJoluia  named .''     10.  Ou  .vhat  does  Potosi  stand  ? 
Questions.  —  1.  What  is  Chili ?  —  What  uo  frequent  and  numerous?    2. 


COI 

on 

5 
so,  ^ 
this 
a  pc 

0 
verj 
capi 
hea\ 

\Vh 
and 
dot 
G.  ^ 


ra?..a<ii»;3gM'i.  .iW— 


y  are  not 

<t  unknown ; 
nctimcs  cold^ 
a  and  Cuzcn 

ined  after 
'ated  and 
i,  arj  the 
uliuo,  &c., 

ia:  Cliuqui- 
1  a  mounlain 


ho  Andes 
ind  volca- 

h7,  ,si/cer, 
of  Chili, 


ho  weather, 
whoiu  w;i;i 

lerous?    2. 


BUENOS  AYRES. 


85 


3.  Some  cIIstaiHo  westward  from  Chili,  are  the  Juan  Fernandez  islands.  On 
'iuc  of  these,  All  .:;'.);dcr  Selkirk,  a  Scotch  sailor,  resided  bj'  him.seU'  tor  several 
years.  This  circnuihtancc  is  suppD,5cd  to  have  given  rise  to  the  well-known  story 
•if  Kobinson  Cru-oo. 


Alexander  tselkirk. 

4.  Buenos  Ayres  is  a  large,  but  thinly  settled  country.  It 
(consists,  for  the  most  part,  of  extensive  2:>lains,  called  Pampm, 
on  which  numerous  lierds  of  wild  Iiorses  and  cattle  feed. 

5.  The  inhabitants  catch  these  animals  by  skilfully  throwing  over  them  a  las- 
so, or  leather  rope.  Ikcf,  without  bread  or  salt,  is  the  chief  ar'icle  of  food  in 
this  part  of  South  Anjerica,  and  is  so  cheap,  that  it  is  often  sold  for  half  a  cent 
a  pound. 

0.  Horses  are  exceedingly  numerous ;  and  a  good  ou^  may  be  bought  for  a 
very  small  sum.  Almost  every  person  r'  les  on  horseback.  Buenos  Ayrcs,  the 
capital,  is  an  important  city.  The  kdics  of  this  phice  arc  noted  for  their 
heauty. 

What  are  the  chief  products  ?  —  What  abound  ?  3.  On  what  isli'uds  did  Alc.v- 
ander  Selkirk  reside  i*  4.  Of  what  does  Buenos  Ayres  consist  ?  .5.  W^ith  what 
do  the  inhabitants  cat<3h  these  animals  ?  —  What  is  the  chief  article  of  food  ? 
6.  What  are  numerous  ?  —  For  what  are  t lie  ladies  of  Buenos  Ayres  noted  ? 


n»,Wiifft^  MM^ 


i    1     ■ 


* 


80 


PRIMARY  GEOGRAPHY. 


id 


7.  Taraguay  is  a  fine,  fertile  district,  situated  hrfwccn  thr 
Paraguay  and  Paraim  rivers.  It  is  the  only  South  American 
State  that  is  destitute  of  a  sea-coast. 

Mate,  or  Paraguay  Tea,  is  the  most  noted  production  of  this  country.  It  is 
the  leaf  of  an  evergreen  tree  that  grows  wild  in  the  woods.  An  infusion  of  the 
dried  leaves  in  hot  water,  similar  to  the  manner  of  our  using  the  Chinese  tea, 
is  drunk  in  several  countries  of  South  America. 

Uruguay,  like  Buenos  Ay  res,  contains  exteimve  Plains,  wif/i 
large  Mrds  of  cattle.  The  latter  furnish  an  abundance  of  food 
for  the  inhabitants. 


Mutliod  of  catcliiriK  Cattle  on  the  Puinpas  of  Uueiios  Ayrcs  and  L'ruguay. 

9.    Tallouu  hides,  and  horns,  are  sent  in  considerable  quantities  to  the  United 

States,  and  other  countries.     Jlontevideo  is  the  capital  of  Uruguay.   It  is  much 

less  important  than  it  once  was,  having  suffered  greatly  from  the  ravages  of  war. 

10.  Patagonia,  the  most  southern  dicision  of  South  America, 

is  a  cold,  barren  region.    It  is  inhabited  by  various  tribes  of 


7.  Where  is  Paraguay  situated  ?     8.  ^V'hat  does  Uruguay  contain  ?     9    What 
are  sent  to  the  United  States,  &c.  ?    10.  What  is  Pat;igonia  ?  —  What  are  the 


sa-\ 
tal 

1 

so  c 
and 
rabl 


1 

149 

by; 

2. 

monr 
subjc 
iis  a ! 


twcen  the 
Linorican 

itry.  It  is 
ision  of  tL(! 
hinesc  tea, 

'ins,  iclf/i 
e  ot"  Ibod 


he  Unitoil 
[t  is  much 
;es  of  war. 

bnerica, 
L'ibes  of 

9.  What 
it  arc  the 


HISTORY  OF  SOUTH  AMERICA.  87 

savage  Indians,  who  have  been  long  reported  to  be  r/eneml/,/ 
fuller  and  stouter  than  the  people  of  other  countries. 

11  Scmth  of  r,U«gouia  is  the  island  of  J^crra  dd  Fuego,  or  land  of  Jlrc  ; 
HO  called  from  the  fires  soeu  d«„g  its  shores  by  MageUan,  the  first  discoverer 
and  supposed  by  hi.n  to  proceed  from  volcanoes.  It  is  inhabited  by  u  few  mise- 
rable siu-ages,  iu  the  lowest  state  of  wretchedness. 


LESSON  47. 
HISTORY    OF   SOUTH   AMERICA. 

1.  South  America  was  discovered  by  Columbus,  in  the  year 
1497,  during  his  third  voyage  to  the  New  World,  and  wan 
by  him  supposed  to  be  a  part  of  the  coast  of  Asia. 

2.  Peru  was,  at  that  time,  the  most  improved  of  all  the  Indian  S/atcs.  Iu 
monarchs,  called  Incas,  maintained  a  regular  government,  and  ruled  over  their 
subjects  with  mildness  and  justice.  The  latter  adored  the  Incas,  regarded  them 
as  a  sacred  race,  and  believed  them  to  bo  descendants  of  the  sun. 

3  About  thirty  years  after  the  discovery  of  America,  Pizarro,  a  brave  but 
cruel  Spaniard,  invaded  Peru  with  a  small  army,  and  in  a  few  vears  obtained 
possession  of  the  whole  country.  In  order  the  more  readily  to  conquer  the 
I  eruvians  Pizarro  invited  the  Inca  to  a  feast,  treacherous!,,  made  him  prisoner, 
and  loaded  him  with  chains. 

4.  To  regain  his  liberty,  the  Inca  offered  to  fit  the  room  in  which  he 


inhabitants  of  Patagonia  reported  to  be?     11.  What  island  lies  south  of  Pata- 

P  ^7^'''w'!':~  ^-  ^y^?.  ''"'''  '"^""'^  ^'"'^"^''^  di.scovored?-2.  What  was 
Peru  ?  -  What  were  its  kings  called  ?  3.  Who  invaded  Peru  v  -  What  dU 
Pizarro  do  when  ho  had  invited  the  Inca  to  a  feast?    4.  What  did  the  Inca 


! 


88 


PRIMARY  GEOOUAPUY. 


3i'; 


ri/,ii]i\)  iiml  tlif  Iiini. 


was  confi7iC(l,  as  high  as  he  could  reach,  vilh  vrssrls  of  gold.  This  offer 
riziirro  uecoptcd,  aiul  uctually  rccoivod  tlio  gdl.l  promised  j  but  instead  of  rc- 
leasini,  his  prisoner,  he  cruelly  put  liim  to  death. 

5.  In  a  short  time  Spain  took  possession  of  the  northern  and  western 
parts  of  South  America,  and  Portugal  of  the  eastern.  After  being  badly 
governed  for  .I'li"-;'.  three  hundred  years,  the  Spanish  colonies,  about  the  year 
1810,  declared  Ihcvselves  independent,  and,  in  1821,  Brazil  became  independ- 
ent of  rori...i;7U. 

G.  To  m;iinin)ii  'heir  authority,  the  Spaniards  sent  several  armies  to  South 
Jlmerica,  whie. ,  after  fighting  many  battk'S  with  the  tolonist^s,  were  finally 
driven  from  the  country.  Jit  the  battle  of  Jlyachuco  \_I-a-koo' -cho'],  the  Colom- 
bians and  Peruvians  totally  defeated  the  last  Spanish  army. 

7.  Among  the  eminent  men  who  becanii;  celebrated  during  the  contest  be- 
tween Spain  and  her  colonies,  Simon  Bolivar,  the  first  President  of  Colombia, 
called  also  the  Liberator,  was  the  most  conspicuous. 


offer  r  5.  "What  did  the  Spanish  colonists  do  in  the  year  1810  ?_— Of  what 
power  did  Brazil  become  independtut,?  6.  "What  did  the  Spaniards  do  to 
maintain   their  authority?  —  "Where  waa  tlie   last   Spanish   army  defeated!:' 


maintain   their  authority?  —  "Where  waa 


B>i«fir'<(>1»manpfjtp 


EUROPE. 


89 


TliiH  offor 
itcad  of  re- 
nd western 
)cing  badly 
ut  the  year 
,e  iudepend- 

es  to  South 
were  finally 
,  the  Colom- 

contest  be- 
''  Colombia, 


—  Of  what 
iards  do  to 
Y  defeated'!' 


fJoncrul  Ilolivar  cnl.  ring  tl,u  Cty  ,      l,ii„a  ad  XJl.tra 


K  lh..sd.,st,nguisLed  iu.lividual  has  been  culled  the  Washington  of  South 
.'mer,ca,  nnd  seeniH,  for  a  time,  to  have  almo.f,  merited  that  title:  but  hi. 
a  te.npt.,  a  tcTwards  to  obtain  arbitrary  power,  and  to  destroy  the  eonstitution 
o  Ins  oun.  ry,  plaee  hun,  u  character,  x.tr  beucath  the  pure  and  virtuous  patriot 


LESSON  48. 

EUROPE. 

1.  Europe  is  the  smallest  of  the  grand  J Imsmis  of  the  earth  ■ 
yet  It  Ls  the  most  important  and  thic dy  settled:  thou-h 
only  one-lifth  the  extent  of  America,  it  contains  nearly  L 
times  as  many  inhabitants.  ' 

Ur  ^""  "'"'*  <^«"¥cuous  in  thiT^ontest?  ~Zm^^i^i^^^,^ 
QuKSTioNs.-!.  What  is  Europc?-IIow  many  more  inhabitants  does  it 


,1 


'f  f| 


-  lia.^.jisSKkiJI^M*' 


mv 


90 


PRIMARY  r.EOGRAPIIY. 


2.  T/i(]  AlfM,  Apainlniff,  PijreiHiH,  Cdqxif/ndn,  Si(tnd'iii(iKian 
or  JJofidJirh/,  (lint  CiiucuHm,  arc  tlie  inoHt  noted  mountains. 

3.  Tho  chiel'  rivers  are,  the  Vohja,  jMinn/n;  Don,  JJnirjter, 
Ural,  liU'uii;  and  T<(</us.  The  Thames,  in  Eni^iiind,  and  the 
Seine,  in  France,  thougli  ))oth  small,  are  important  and  well- 
known  rivers. 

4.  JVIicat,  Rye,  liarlri/,  <md  Oitl.%  uru  the  priiiciiml  kiiuls  of  grain  miscJ  in 
tho  cci.trivl  parts  of  lOurope ;  ami  Indian-corn  mid  Rice  in  its  .southern  regioux : 
in  the  lattor,  (haprs,  Figs,  Oranges,  and  Olives,  gi-ow  abundantly. 

Wine  i.s  njaJo  from  (iirapea,  and  aweut  oil  from  tho  Olive.  JlaininH  arc  dried 
gnipe.s.  Groat  (piuntitie.s  of  all  those  products  are  brought  from  France,  Spain, 
Portugal,  and  Italy,  iiUo  tho  United  States. 


G  rapes. 


Ftgf. 


Olivci. 


5.  Tho  wild  animals  of  Europe  are  not  numerous.    Bears,  Wolves,  and  Wild 
Boars,  are  found  in  some  parts,  amongst  tho  mountains   and   forests.     The 


contain  than  America?  2.  Name  tho  most  noted  mountains.  3.  Which  are  the 
chief  rivers  ?  4.  What  are  the  principal  kinds  of  grain  raised  in  Central  Eu- 
rope ?  —  In  its  southern  regions  ? — What  grows  abundantly  in  the  latter  ?     5. 


^:, 


4, 


'^'"^-rtiw 


'^>. 


1^  "jikT?'- 


V^.    ^Ti 


IMAGE  EVALUATION 
TEST  TARGET  (MT-3) 


1.0 


I.I 


11.25 


I^UI  121 
•ii  £2    112.2 


u  llllll 


iio 


llllll 

U    IIIIII.6 


u 


,     1 

4. 


»,> 


7 


Photographic 

Sciences 

Corporation 


23  WEST  MAIN  STREET 

WEBSTER,  N.Y.  14580 

(716)87i-4503 


'4^ 


'4^7^" 


■jUiliWIIOTi 


.^tiS\ 


CIHM/ICMH 

Microfiche 

Series. 


Canadian  Institute  for  Historical  Microreproductions  /  Institut  Canadian  de  microreproductions  historiques 


1^ 

4 


^.Q 


'^^ 


,1 


f 


fecMiiys^fp' 


■#5 


EUROPE 


domestic  animal.,  cattle,  sheep,  and  hor.e.,  are  abundant,  and  are  raised  in  great 
perfection  in  England  and  Holland.  ^ 


6.  Manufactures  and  commerce  are  extensively  carried  on 
by  the  British,  French,  Dutch,  Belgiam,  and  Pnmians.  The 
most  nnportant  European  States  are,  Great  Britain,  France 
limmi,  Austria,  and  Pnmia.  These  are  called  the  five  great 
powers.  ° 

7.  xXearly  all  the  nations  of  Europe  spealc  different  languages,  and  in  almost 
every  European  country  the  inhabitants  comprise  two  ckssev/ic  noUlUyand 
me  common  people.  " 

8.  The  nobility  are  often  very  rich,  and  live  in  pomp  and 

splendour,  while  the  common  people  work  very  hard,  and  can 

obtain  only  the  most  indifferent  food..     The  latter  enjoy  much 

less  comfort  than  the  poorest  inhabitants  of  the  United  States 

9.  Europe  contains  suly  different  Slates,  of  which  some  are  very  small,  while 
0  hers  are  extensive  countries.    There  are  three  Empires,  fifteen  Kingdoms  and 
nine  Republics.     The  others  are  Grand  Duchies,  Duchies,  PrincipSZ;  I 
The  people  amount  to  about  250  millions.  r         ,  at.. 


M"     li 


I-       ':, 


No.  10.  — MAP   OF   EUROPE. 


] 
the 
eas 

] 
M 

1 
sepi 
Cas 

I 
hla 

C 
wcs 
\st\ 

I 

Ma, 
I" 
are 

P 

Sea 
?tine 

P 
Cm 

P 
latte 
(lash 

Pi 

ofV 
Arcl 

P( 
with 
Afii( 

P( 
soutl 
Nort: 


MAP  OF  EUROPE. 


93 


<p 


r^_ 


Aiasc 


(92) 


3& 


LESSON  49. 

Nc.  10  is  a  Blap  of  the  whole  of  Europe,  with  parts  of  Asia  ami  Africa 

fho^nT  '^  *'l?  "?"'•''  ;^'''"''™  ''^  *^'^  ^'^"•'^^^■'■"  t'""'!u<'nt.  It  is  bouudod,  ou 
the  nortli,  by  the  Arct.e  Ocean;  south,  hy  the  Meditcn-aneau  and  liiaclc  Seas; 
east,  hy  Asia;  and  west,  by  the  Atlantic  Ocean.  ' 

Mat'Vocem  '^''''''^  ^'''''"  "  •'*^^'^''^"'"^«»f ««  Sea  — Black  Sm-Asia~ 

«™V^v''f '"^  ^r/°  ^''Pl^ates  Europe  from  America;  the  Mediterranean  Sea 
rSV  ""  Africa;  the  Black  Sea,  Cauca.sus  and  Ural  Mountains,  and  the 
Caspian  Sea,  separate  it  from  Asia. 

Point  out  the  Islands  of  Great  Britain- Ireland- Iceland- Kov a  Zem- 
bla— Majorca—  Corsica—  Sardinia—  Sicily  —  Candia. 

Great  Britain  is  the  largest  island  belonging  to  Europe.  Iceland  is  the  most 
western,  and  nearest  to  America.  Nova  z'emtla  is  the  most  northeri  Canch 
ih  tlie  most  southern  island. 

Point  out  the  Baltic  Sea  —  Wliite  Sea  —  J^orth  Sea  — Irish  Sea— Sea  of 
Marmora-  Sea  of  Jzov - Karskoe  Sea-Caspian  Sea.  -^ 

Point  out  tho  Volga  River -Danube  R.- Von  R.- Dnieper  R.  These 
are  the  longest  rivers  in  Europe. 

Point  out  the  Mps  — Pyrenees—  Carpathian  Mountains ~ Balkan  Mis.— 
Scandinavian  or  Dofrafield  Mts.-Ural  Mts.  -  Caucasus  Mts.  ThoJipen. 
nine    JWl!».  extend  through  Italy.  ^.n^^ipen 

Point  out  jyorway  and  Sweden—  6pain  and  Portugal— Italy  — Morea  — 
Crimea  — Jutland.    These  all  form  peninsulas. 

yJ^T  7-  i'jf  FT\  J'\^^^\-I^offoden  Islands-  The  Malslrom.  The 
latter  ib  a  frightful  whirlpool  in  the  sea;  it  sometimes  engulfs  small  vessels,  and 
dashes  them  to  pieces.     Whales  have  been  also  drawn  into  its  vortex 

Point  out  tlie  Gulfof  Bothnia-Gulf  of  Finland-Bay  of  Biscay-Gulf 
of  J^cnice.  The  Gulf  of  Venice  is  sometimes  called  the  Adriatic  sL  The 
Archipelago  is  a  sea  that  lies  to  the  eastward  of  Greece. 

Point  out  the  Strait  of  Gibraltar.  This  Strait  connects  the  Atlantic  Ocean 
AfiScl     ^^^'"^'^^"•''^'^^^'i  «ea.   It  is  fifteen  miles  wide,  and  separates  Europe  from 

Noi  Fri/d  Zonr  "' ''  '"'  '^  Temperate  Zone,  the  remainder  is  in  the 


i: 

,■■; 

;j 

•  i! 

<' 

1 

M 


"wr- 


94 


PRIMARY  GEOGRAPHY. 


LESSON  39. 
SWEDEN    AND    NORWAY,    RUSSIA,    ETC. 

1.  Sweden  and  Norway /orw  one  Icingdom,  and  are  govern- 
ed by  the  same  king.  These  countries  occupy  i?ar<  of  the  most 
northern,  and  coldest  regions  of  Europe. 

2.  Sweden  is  noted  for  its  mines  of  iron  and  copper,  and 
Norway  for  its  trade  in  fish,  and  in  hoards,  planJc,  and  other 
timber.  Stockholm,  in  Sweden,  is  the  capital  of  the  king- 
dom.    Gottenburg  is  its  chief  sea-port. 

3.  Norway  is  inliabited  by  a  hardy  and  courageous  people,  some  of  whom  live 
to  a  great  age.  Many  parts  of  this  country  contain  very  high  mountains ;  other 
parts  are  covered  with  thick  forests,  in  which  Bears  are  numerous:  these  are 
often  killed  in  the  manner  shown  in  the  picture. 


Norwegian  killing  a  Dear. 


Questions.  —1.  What  do  Norway  and  Sweden  form? --What  do  they  oc- 
cupy?   2.  For  what  is  Sweden  noted?    3.  By  what  is  Norway  inhabited r 


mr 
dis 

ra 

pi 
( 

chi 
ing 
as 


it( 
Bri 

4.  ^ 
lane 
sian 


MMMili  I  ■!    IIJ  IIII.I.JJIJW-Hii.  J 


3  govem- 
f  the  most 


and 

%nd  other 


pper, 


the 


king- 


)f  whom  live 
itains;  other 
a:  these  are 


at  do  they  oc- 
ly  inhabited? 


LAPLAND  — RUSSIA. 


95 


4.  Swi'ilon  was  once  an  important  kinjriloui,  and  has  produced  somn  cmincn' 
mrn.  Clustavu.s  Adulphus,  wlio  lived  about  two  hundred  years  ago,  was  the  most 
distinguished  monareli  of  his  lime. 

5.  Lapland  is  a  cold,  harren  rcijlon,  inlnibitod  by  an  ignu- 
raiit  and  rudo  race,  called  Lai)l!tn(levs.  They  are  greatly  at- 
tached to  their  own  country,  and  think  it  the  finest  and  most 
plea.sant  in  the  world. 

G.  These  people  have  large  herds  of  rcin-ilrcr,  the  milk  of  which  forms  tlio 
chief  part  of  their  food ;  and  of  the  skins  of  these  animals  they  make  their  cloth- 
ing. In  winter,  the  Laplanders  travel  over  the  iee  and  snow  in  little  sledges  — 
aa  you  will  see  in  the  engraving. 


Laplanders. 


7.  The  Russlvn  Empire  is  the  kmjcst  in  the  icorld,  though 
it  does  not  contain  so  many  inhabitants  as  the  Chinese  or 
British  empire;    they  ambunt  to  61  millions. 


4.  What  has  Sweden  produced ?    5.  What  is  Lapland?— To  what  are  the  Lap- 
landers gi-eatly  attached  ?    G.  What  have  these  people  ?     7.  What  is  the  Rus- 
sian empire  ?     8.  What  are  the  chief  divisions  of  the  empire  ?    9.  Of  what  do 
G 


ft   !' 


m> 


tTjBa'''|W">J'tl|l«flF. 


-i     3  "Jv 


OG 


PRIMARY  GEOORAPHY. 


8.  Russia  in  Europe,  cuid  Russia  in  Asia,  are  the  chief  divi- 
sions of  the  empire.  The  Kussian  Possessions  in  America 
are  of  less  importance. 

9.  The  people  of  Russia  consist  of  Russians,  Poks,  Tartars, 
Finns,  Cossacl's,  Circassians,  a)i(l  other  races.  The  Russian 
ariuy  is  larger  ihtn  that  of  auij  other  European  nation.  It 
amounts  to  almost  six  hundred  thousand  men. 

10.  Nearly  all  the  lower  class  of  Russians  arc  slaves  to  the  great  lords,  or 
nobles  :  they  work  hard,  and  arc  often  ill  nsed  by  their  masters.  Pt.  Petcrsburi' 
is  the  capital  of  the  Russian  empire :  it  is  ouc  of  the  finest  cities  in  the  world. 
It  was  founded  by  Peter  the  Great,  in  tho  year  1703. 


Retreat  of  the  Frcndi  from  Moscow. 

11.  Moscow,  the  ancient  capital,  was  set  on  fire  in  the  j/ear  1812,  that  it  might 
not  afford  shelter  to  the  army  of  Napoleon  Bonaparte,  whose  soldiers,  in  the 
retreat  from  Moscow,  were  nearly  all  frozen  to  death  by  the  intense  cold. 

the  people  consist?  —  What  is  the  Russian  army?  10.  "What  are  nearly  all 
the  Russians?  —  "What  is  St.  Petersburg?  11.  When  was  3Ioscow  set  on 
fire  ? 


pe 
th 

ha? 
par 
one 

] 
the 

in] 
tri 

con 

Mc 

to   I 

bu 
co^ 

tni 

( 

call 
was 
For 


POLAND,  DENMARK,  HOLLAND  AND  DELGIU.M. 


LESSON  51. 
POLAND,    DENMARK,    HOLLAND    AND    BELGIUM. 

1.  Poland  is  inhabited  by  the  Pok.%  a  bravo  and  gallant 
people,  some  of  whom  now  live  in  the  United  States,  where 
they  are  called  the  Polkh  exiles. 

2.  This  is  a  very  largo  country,  and  was  once  an  indepcndcnl  kingdom,  but  it 
has  bceu  conquered  by  the.  Russians,  Jluslriiins,  and  Prussians.  Tiic  largest 
part  of  its  territory  now  belongs  to  Russia.  Warsaw  is  the  chief  city,  and  wa.'^ 
once  the  capital  of  I'olaud. 

Ko.sciusko  and  Pulaski,  both  distinguished  officers  in  the  American  army  during • 
the  war  of  the  Kcvolution,  were  natives  of  Poland. 

3.  Denmark  is  a  level,  and  mode mtel//  fertile  country.  The 
inhabitants  are  called  Danes .-  they  are  a  quiet,  and  indus- 
trious people.     Copenhagen  is  the  capital. 

4.  Iceland  is  an  island,  which  is  .situated  at  a  considerable  distance  from  this 
country,  and  forms  a  part  of  the  DanLsh  dominions.  It  is  noted  for  its  volcano. 
Mount  Hech,  and  llic  Geysers,  or  hot  springs  :  the  latter  spout  up  hot  water 
to  a  much  greater  height  than  the  highest  houses. 

6.  Holland,  the  country  of  the  Dutch,  is  a  low,  and  flat, 
but  well  cultivated  region  :  many  parts  of  it  were  formerly 
covered  by  the  sea.  It  is  famous  for  its  canals  and  loind- 
inills. 


Questions.  — 1.  By  whom  is  Poland  inhabited?— By  what  name  are  those 
called  that  live  in  the  United  States  ?    2.  What  was  Poland  once  ?  —By  whom 
was  It  conriucred  ?     3.  What  is  Denmark  ?  —  What  are  the  people  called  ?     4 
i or  what  is  Iceland  noted?     5.  What  is  Holland ?  — For  what  is  it  famous? 
6.  What  arc  the  Dutch?— In  what  are  there  many  persons  engaged?   7.  What 


m 


mi 


KM-^-     t^^'^j..'^'*--. 


;*!(i'  I 


)8 


IMUMARY  GKOCiUAl'IIY. 


(').  TIic  I>ntcli  iiro  firrat  .imoknii,  iiiul  iirc  hmic'^f,  iiKluntiirms,  and  fnigiil. 
Tlioir  ori'IiiinlM  luid  jxjudciis  iiru  kejit  in  tlio  nuatcst  nniniicr.  Tlic  iMininion  ujff 
lloUitnd  is  very  great,  and  there  ure  munj'  persons  t'ngnjrcil  mftshini;. 

7.  Anistcnliini,  t/ir  chief  city,  1ms  lon}^  liccn  a  \A\m\  iit'^rvcat  trade.  A  town 
.■ailed  the  Hague  is  the  eaiiital  of  Holland.  Haarlem  eontains  the  largest  organ 
m  the  xnirld.  It  is  noted  for  its  great  trade  in  flower-roots,  cspeeially  tulijis. 
■iaardan  is  a  town  of  wooden  houses,  which  arc  all  painted  green. 

8.  Bki,(;ium,  or  Flanders,  is  ami  of  f/ir  mod  popnhm  and 
'n-st  vultinikd  coinitrltH  in  Euro])e.  It  lui.s  long  boon  nototl  lor 
its  various  nuinufucturcs. 

0.  The  people  arc  called  Belgians  :  they  resemble  the  Dutch,  but  speak  Ihc 
French  language.  Schools  are  numerous,  and  almost  every  one  can  read  and 
write.     Brassels  is  tlic  capital:  Antwerp  and  Ghent  lu-e  important  cities. 

10.  3Iaiiy  famous  battles  have  been  fought  in  llelgium;  the  last  occurred 
■It  Waterloo,  in  the  year  LSla.  Here,  Napoleon,  the  emperor  of  the  Frcueli, 
'.vas  defeated,  and  many  tlujusand  soldiers  were  killed  on  both  sides. 


LESSON  52. 

great  britain,  england,  wales. 

1.  The  united  Kingdom  of  Great  Britain  and  Ireland 
comprises  Enrjland,  St-otlaml,  Ireland,  and  Wales :  these  coun- 
tries, with  numerous  colonies  in  various  quarters  of  the  earth, 
tbrni  the  British  Empire. 


is  Amsterdam  'i — What  does  Haarlem  contain  ?  8.  What  is  Belgium  ?  9.  What 
.are  the  inhabitantfi  called?  —  What  language  do  the  IJelgiaus  speak?  lU. 
When  Wiis  the  battle  of  Waterloo  fought? 

Questions.  —  1.  What  does  the  United  Kingdom  comprise?  —  What  do 
these  countries,  &c.,  form  ?    2.  For  what  has  this  kingdom  been  long  noted  il* 


-z-jtm 


M' 


and  fnifr;il. 
(iiniiiorcuief 

A'- 

le.  A  town 
truest  or i^ (I II 
L'iully  tuliji.-t. 

(Jam  and 
noted  for 

ut  speak  the 
an  rend  and 
nt  cities. 
a.st  occuiTod 
tlic  Freueli, 


>  Ireland 
lose  coun- 
the  earth, 


m?  9.  What 
speak  ?     10. 

—  What  do 
long  noted  i* 


GREAT  I3KITA1N,  EXGLAND,  WALES.  0(l 

2.  TluH  kingdom  has  been  h)ng  noted  for  It.s  n-ntlih  nun' 
hnpnrhnin;  ami  ihr  inimlnr  (if  If.i  nhqts  uf  war.  It  contain.s. 
iiu'luding  the  wljole  of  iiH  pos.seHsions,  nearly  one-lii'th  i)i.\x\ 
()(■  the  luunan  race. 

'5.  The  hihahitiints  consist  of  the  Eii-lish,  Seoteh,  Wel.sh. 
and  Irish.  The  three  first  are  called  Bnt,n,.s .-  the  whole  an 
called  the  Jh-lfis/t.  The  chief  part  of  the  people  of  these  na- 
tions are  similar,  in  most  respects,  to  ourselves. 

Nearly  all  fho  first  settlors  of  the  United  States  eai.  from  Great  IJrituin 
There  the  forefathers  of  Washington,  Jufforsun,  Franklin,  and  Ad.nis,  lived 
and  died. 


Curoimlioii  of  Quucii  Victoria. 


4.  The  British  emiiiro  is  at  present  governed  by  Queen  Victoria.  She  wa- 
crowned  in  the  year  1838,  in  Westminster  Abbey,  in  the  city  of  London.  This 
ceremony,  called  the  Coronation,  was  conducted  with  great  pomp  and  splen- 
dour. 


3.  What  are  the  inhabitants  called?  — What  do  they  include?    4.  Uv  whom 
18  the  JJntjsh  empire  now  governed  ?     5.  AVhat  is  England  ?    G.  "\N'hat  un 


^1 


M 


100 


PRIMARY  GEOURArilY. 


5.  England,  the  mmt  snuthvni  part  of  (he  Mitnd  of  Great 
Britain,  is  a  beautiful  and  an  inti-roHting  region ;  the  land  is 
<',ultivated  witii  great  care,  and  extennivo  portions  of  the 
iiountry  a|)pear  like  a  garden. 

(i.  Vast  mnniifdclurcH  of  wool hn^  rollon,  sill:,  iron,  ^Irtus,  Hfc,  im)  carric(l 
111.  (IuuhIh  auil  liiih-uiids  uro  uumerous,  uuJ  htoiimshiii.s  sail  to  almost  every 
jiart  of  the  "arth. 

7.  Ill  Kugliiiiil  tliuro  arc  many  iiidividiialH  who  posscH,^  large  fortunes.  Tho 
iiolilo  and  till!  r'wh  liavo  .spUiiidid  lioiises  and  couiitry-soatn,  elegant  eoai^Iies,  and 
.1  nudtitudo  of  ne.vant.ij  whilo  tlio  poor  live  meanly,  and  ofteu  suU'er  mueh 
diHtre,s.s. 

8.  London,  the  capital  of  the  British  empiro,  ih  the  Inrgrst  and  most  wealth/ 
r.itif  in  the  world ;  its  trade  extend.s  to  every  (juarter  of  tiie  jrlolie,  and  it 
i.s  visited  by  numerous  individuals  from  our  own,  and  every  other  civilized 
country. 

9.  Manchester,  Liverpool,  Birmingham,  Leeds,  and  liristol,  arc  important 
•  itics:  Liverpool  and  IJii^itol  are  noted  for  commerce,  and  the  others  for  manu- 
factures. 

10.  Bath  is  the  most  elegant  city  in  England.  Cambridge  and  Oxford  contain 
celebrated  universities,  in  which  many  distinguished  men  have  been  educated. 

11.  Wales  joins  England  on  the  west,  and  is  inhabited 
by  the  Welsh.  These  people  make  <jreat  qaarditie-s  of  jiannel, 
from  the  wool  furnished  by  their  numerous  flocks  of  sheep. 
Mines  of  coal,  iron,  and  copper  abound,  and  great  quantities 
of  railroad  iron  are  made. 

carried  on?  7.  What  do  many  individuals  possess?  8.  What  is  London? 
1).  Name  the  important  cities.  10.  What  is  IJath  ?— What  do  Cambridge  and 
Oxford  contain?  11.  By  whom  is  Wales  inhabited ?  — What  do  these  people 
make  ? 


%^' 


mmasmm 


of  Gmd 
ic  land  is 
IS  of  the 

,  arc  I'urriuil 
Imost  every 

\xincs.  The 
BuU'cr  much 

nost  torallhii 
\o\k',  iiiul  it 
her  civilized 

re  important 
ra  for  munu- 

sford  contain 
1  educated. 

inhabited 
>f  Jlannel, 
of  sheep, 
(quantities 


is  London? 

mbridgc  and 

these  people 


SCOTLAND,  lUKLAND,  die. 

LKSSOX  53. 
H  C  O  T  I<  A  .\  D,    I  R  K  L  A  N  D,    *,.-, 


101 


Slicplisrdoai,  IliBlilaiiil  Piper,  Soldier. 

1.  Scotland  is  situated  to  the  northward  of  Enghind,  and 
is  divided,  by  the  Grampian  IJills,  into  the  Ulyhhuuh  and 
Loii'latuls. 

2.  Like  the  itilialiitunts  of  N'cw  England,  the  Scotch  arc  rdiqiom^  morula  and 
hulnslrious.  Tiic  churches  are  well  attended,  Hch()(j]s  arc  uunicnuis,  and  the 
people  are  umon','  the  best  educated  in  Europe.  IJruco  and  Wallace,  ]5uriiM 
and  AValter  Scott,  were  celebrated  Scotchmen  :  the  two  first  gallantly  defended 
the  riglit.s  of  their  country;  the  latter  distinguished  themselves  an  pocta  and 
writer.^. 

3.  The  Highlands  is  a  rugged,  hilhj  region.  The  iidiabitiuts  Rf-cak  a  pecu- 
liar language,  and  wear  a  dress  different  from  that  of  any  other  nation.  Tho 
Highlanders  raise  many  sheep  and  cattle.  The  bagpipes  is  their  favourite 
nmsical  instrument. 


Questions.  — 1.  How  is  Scotland  divided?    2.  Wliat  are  tho  Scotch ?  — 


What  aro  the  people  ?    3.  What  is  the  Highlands , 


■What  do  the  Higlilaudcrt 


i'.'', 


"S«^^^S^^S35^S?f •;^^-^i'-ft^*«"-«  '■'-'' •*'*i^'  ^•-^-■^ '-  '^>v-' 


idd  I 


102 


rniMARY  GEOGRAPHY. 


4.  The  Lowlands  is  a  kvd  (tiid  fertile  country,  and  moro  thickly  settled. 
Ediiibiirfrh  and  Glasgow  arc  the  principal  cities  in  Scotland  :  Edinburgh  is  noted 
f.ir  its  vnlvcmitii,  for  its  castle,  and  for  Ilohjrood  House,  the  ancient  palace  of 
lite  Scottish  kings. 

5.  Ireland  is  afiiic,fni!Je  isldi/J,  situated  to  the  westward 
of  Great  Britain.  The  country  is  haJli/  [joverncd,  and  the 
inliabitants  are  miieJi  oppressed:  they  often  suffer- for  Avant 
of  food.     Ireland  is  famous  for  potatoes. 


■*'>■,:■ 


liisli  Kmigiauls  Laving  their  native  tiiuiitiy  f'Jr  Anniiia. 

6.  The  people  of  Ireland  are  called  the  Irish :  numbers  of  them  leave  their 
native  country,  a7id  come  to  the  United  States,  where  they  form,  in  many  places, 
11  considerable  part  of  the  population.  Dublin,  Cork,  Ikdfast,  and  Limerick, 
are  the  chief  cities  of  Ireland.  Belfast  is  noted  for  the  manufacture  of  linen, 
and  Limerick  for  that  of  iish-hooks. 

General  IMontgomery,  who  fell  at  Quebec,  in  the  cause  of  American  freedom, 
as  well  as  many  other  gallant  patriots  who  adopted  our  country  as  their  home, 
were  natives  of  Ireland. 

raise  ?  4.  What  is  the  Lowlands  ? — For  what  is  Edinburgh  noted  ?  5.  What 
is  Ireland  ? — What  is  the  country  ?  —  What  are  the  inhabitants  ?  6.  What  do 
many  of  the  people  do  ?     7.  What  was  France  ?  —  For  v/hat  is  it  famous  ? 


liickly  settlecl. 
iburgli  is  noted 
icnl  jialace  of 

e  westwavd 
(.1,  aud  tilt' 
;r-for  want 


«K 


liiM 


un  leave  their 
n  many  places, 
and  Limerick, 
Lcturc  of  linen, 

;rican  freedom, 
as  their  home, 


cd?     5.  What 

'     6.  What  do 

is  it  famous? 


15 


FRANCE. 


103 


7.  Fraxci:  was  formerly  governed  l)y  kings,  but,  in  the 
year  1848,  tlie  people  deposed  the  I'eigning  monarch  (Louis 
Philippe),  and  adopted  a  Republican  government,  with  a 
President  and  Assembly,  or  Congress.  The  country  is 
beautiful  and  fertile :  it  is  flimous  for  its  wines,  hmnJ//,  and 
silk  (joods. 


Interior  of  a  Fruncli  Cafe  (Coffee-liouse). 

8.  The  inhabitants  of  France  are  called  the  French.  They  are  very  polite 
and  gay  in  their  maimers.  Dancing  is  a  favourite  amusement,  in  wliith  all 
classes  excel.  There  are  many  learned  men  in  this  country ;  but  numbers  of 
the  poor  can  neither  read  nor  write.  France  is  the  native  land  of  La  Fay- 
ette, and  other  gallant  Frenchmen,  who  assisted  the  United  States  in  the  war 
(if  the  Kevolution. 

0.  Paris,  the  capital,  is  one  of  the  finest  cities  in  the  world  :  it  is  the  centre 
of  fashion  for  the  civilized  world,  and  is  much  visited  by  strangers:  many 
Americans  arc  always  to  be  found  there.  Lyons,  Marseilles,  and  Bordeaux,  arc 
important  cities. 


<S.  What  is  said  of  the  French?  —  What  is  a  favounto  amusement?  — Of  what 
class  ar^  there  many  ?    9.  What  is  Paris  ? 


;■      1 


,'   f 


I 


!«'<! 


104  PRIMARY  GEOGRAPHY. 

LESSON  54. 
SPAIN,   PORTUGAL,   AND    GERMANY. 

1.  Spain  is  the  coxininj  of  the  Spaniards.  Though  now 
amongst  the  weakest,  it  was  once  the  most  important  king- 
dom in  Europe,  and  possessed  vast  territories  in  North  and 
South  America. 

2.  Tlio  climate  is  pleasant,  and  the  soil  fertile,  but  badly  cultivated.  Oranges, 
figs,  and  grapes,  grow  in  great  perfection.  Wine  and  raisins  are  imported  into 
the  United  States  from  Spain.  There  arc  many  merino  sheep  in  Spain,  from 
which  the  finest  wool  in  Europe  is  obtained.  Madrid  is  the  capital :  Barcelona 
SeuUc,  and  Cadiz,  are  impoi-tant  cities. 


Bull  Fight. 

3.  Bull  fights  are  a  favourite  amusement  in  this  country,  and  are  attended 
by  all  classes  of  the  inhabitants.  In  these  cruel  exhibitions,  both  men  and  horses 
are  sometimes  killed  by  the  tortured  and  infuriated  bulls.  The  lower  class  of 
Spaniards  are  lively,  and  fond  of  music  and  dancing,  but  the  nobility  and  gentry 
are  grave  and  stately  in  their  manners. 

Questions.  —  1.  What  is  Spain  ?  2.  What  grow  in  perfection  ? — Of  what 
are  there  many  ?    3.  What  are  a  favourite  amusement  ?     4.  In  what  respect 


4 
cou 
call 

5. 

are  i 

lUgJl 

Port 
C 
reg 
Stat 
ant 
I 
all 
ing 
am 

thr 
edi 
the 

T 
edf 

T 
Am 

( 

< 

is  ] 
con( 
Gcr 
wlui 
the 


ugh  now 
lilt  kiiisx- 
orth  and 

1.  Oranges, 
uportod  into 
Spsiin,  from 
:  Barcelona 


^■^ 


ire  attended 
1  and  horses 
yor  class  of 
r  and  gentry 


?— Of  what 

(vhat  respect 


PORTUGAL— GERMANY. 


105 


4.  Portugal  joins  Spain  on  the  west,  and  is  very  like  that 
country  in  its  climate  and  productions.  The  inliabitants  aro 
called  the  Ihrtiujucse. 

5.  Both  these  kingdoms  arc  badly  governed  :  the  greater  part  of  the  people 
are  very  po(jr,  and  much  oppressed  by  the  rich.  Lisbon  is  the  cnpilal  of  Por- 
Ingjtl :  Lisbon  wine  comes  from  this  city.  Oporto  is  famous  for  its  trade  iu 
Port  wine 

G.  Germany  is  inhabited  by  the  Gvrmans.  It  is  an  extensive 
region,  including  Austria,  Prussia,  Bavaria,  Hanover,  and  other 
states :  these  amount,  altogether,  to  thirty-eight  in  number, 
and  form  the  Germanic  Confederation. 

7.  The  Germans  are  composed  of  various  nations,  yet  they 
all  speak  the  same  language.  They  are  an  industrious  and 
ingenious  people,  and  were  the  inventors  oi printing,  icatches, 
and  (jlohes. 

8.  Universities,  schools,  and  learned  men,  are  numerous 
throughout  Germany,  and  many  of  the  inhabitants  are  well 
educated.  Music  and  dancing  are  favourite  amusements  of 
the  people. 

There  are  many  Germans  in  the  United  States,  where  they  are  much  respect- 
ed for  their  good  morals  and  industrious  habits. 

The  Barons  De  Kalb  and  Steuben,  who  distinguished  themselves  in  the 
American  army  dm-ing  our  revolutionary  war,  were  both  Germans. 

9.  The  empire  of  Austria  is  the  largest  German  state.    The 

is  Portugal  like  Spain?  —  What  aro  the  inhabitants  called?  5.  In  what 
condition  are  both  these  kingdoms  ?  —  What  is  Lisbon  ?  G.  By  what  people  is 
Germany  inhabited  ?  —  What  docs  it  include  ?  —  What  do  they  form  ?  7.  Of 
what  were  the  Germans  the  inventors  ?  8.  \Vhat  are  numerous  ?  9.  What  is 
the  empire  of  Austria  ?  —  What  are  the  people  called  ?  —  What  is  Prussia  ?  — 


]0G 


PRIMARY  GEOGRAPHY. 


people  are  called  Austrians.  Prussia  is  the  vonntnj  of  th> 
Prasslam.  Here  every  man  is  compelled  to  serve  un  a  sold'u  r 
for  three  years. 

In  Prussia,  all  little  boys  and  girls  must  go  to  school  after  they  have  attainiM] 
a  certain  age :  this  is  the  law,  and  none  are  allowed  to  stay  at  home  during 
biliool  hours. 

10.  "\'ienna  is  the  capital  of  Austria,  and  the  largest  city  in  Germanij 
]K'rlin  is  the  capital  of  I'russia.  Hamburg  is  the  chief  commercial  city  of 
Cirmany :  it  carries  on  a  great  trade  with  England  and  the  United  States 
Kureniborg  is  famous  for  children's  toys. 


LESSON  55. 
SWITZERLAND    AND    ITALY. 

1.  Switzerland,  the  country  of  the  Swiss,  is  a  rcjmhlii, 
and  one  of  the  few  European  states  that  is  not  governed  h\ 


1^  £=?av3g  ai  «!;;»;;>»  m~xK\,ic>^'^ 


Avalanche  in  Switzerland. 


In  whai  capacity  is  every  man  compelled  to  serve?     10.  What  is  Vienna?  — 
Berlin  ?  —  Hamburg  ? 

Questions.  —  1 .  What  is  Switzerland  ?  —  Where  is  it  situated  ?    2.  What 


an 

OS' 

sid 
del 

W 

of 

tin 
y/K, 
tll( 

pal 


501 

4. 

is 


<«>tii(SU 


dry  i>f  tla- 
IS  a  soklkt' 

have  attainei] 
homo  during 

in  Germany, 
rcial  city  of 
luitud  States 


verned  l)y 


'i5^ 


$ 


3  Vienna?  — 
?    2.  What 


SWITZERLAND  AND  ITALY. 


107 


fui  cmpci'or,  or  king :  it  is  situated  amomjd  the  AIj^s,  the  high- 
est mountains  in  Europe, 

2.  Vast  bodies  of  snow,  called  Jli'alanchcs,  sometimes  rush  down  the  lofty 
sidca  of  the  Alps,  and  bury  the  towns  and  villages,  with  their  inhabitants,  to  the 
depth  of  many  feet. 

o.  The  Swi.<s  are  an  honest,  brave,  and  industrious  people.  The  renowned 
AVilliam  Tell  wa.s  a  native  of  Switzerland :  he  fought  bravely  against  the  enemica 
of  his  country. 

4.  Berne,  Zurich,  and  Lucerne,  arc  each,  in  their  turn,  for  two  years  at  a 
time,  the  capital  of  Switzerland.  Geneva,  the  largest  city,  is  remarkable  for  the 
number  of  watches  made  in  it.  The  lidie  on  which  Geneva  is  situated,  is  one  of 
the  most  celebrated  in  Europe. 

The  Swiss  have  no  language  of  their  own :  the  French  is  spoken  in  various 
parts  of  the  country;  the  German  in  some,  and  the  It^dian  in  others. 


IlalLins  — Viow  in  Rn.iie. 


5.  Italy  is  the  most  fertile  and  pleasant  country  in  Europe: 

sometimes  nish  down  the  lofty  sides  of  the  Alps?  3.  What  are  the  Swiss? 
4.  What  cities  are  each,  in  their  turn,  the  capital  of  Switzerland  ?  — ^'For  what 
is  Geneva  remarkable  ?     5.  What  is  Italy  ?     G.  For  what  are  the  inhabitants 


i! 


I.: 


jtHmif" 


lOS 


PRIMARY  GEOGRAPHY. 


:l 


it  is  unsurpassed  for  the  mildness  of  its  climate,  the  grandeur 
of  its  mountains,  and  the  beauty  of  its  lakes  and  plains, 

G.  The  inhabitants  are  called  Italians,  and  are  distin- 
guished for  tlalr  .skill  in  music.  Many  of  them  are  amongst 
the  finest  singers  in  the  world.  The  most  celebrated  paint- 
ers, sculptors,  and  architects,  have  been  natives  of  Italij. 

Painting  is  the  art  of  producing  beautiful  pictures.  The  sculptor  carves  figures, 
likenesses,  and  ornaments,  out  of  marble.  The  architect  builds  palaces,  chm-ebes, 
aud  other  edifices. 

7.  Italy  includes  tlie  IdiKjdom  of  SariJinia,  the  Jiingdom  of 
Lomhanlij  and  Venice,  and  the  ki))(/doni  of  Naples ;  also  the 
states  of  the  Church,  and  some  smaller  territories. 

8.  Rome  is  the  most  celebrated  city  in  Italy,  and  has  been 
renowned  in  liistory  for  more  than  two  thousand  years.  This 
city  contains  many  splendid  buildings ;  one  of  these,  St. 
Peters  church,  is  the  largest  in  the  world. 

This  vast  edifice  was  one  hundred  and  eleven  years  in  building :  it  is  near  five 
hundred  feet  high,  and  about  half  a  mile  in  circumference. 

The  Vatican  is  an  immense  palace,  consisting  of  a  number  of  differcut  build- 
ings, wliich  contain,  altog(!ther,  between  four  and  five  thousand  rooms. 

9.  Naples  is  tlie  largest  city  in  Italy,  and  Milan  the  most  elegant.  Venice  is 
built  on  seventy-two  islands :  here  tliey  have  canals  instead  of  streets,  and  boats 
in  place  of  carriages.  The  lowest  class  of  the  people  in  Naples  are  called  Laz- 
zaroni.     Some  of  them  are  so  ignorant  that  they  do  not  know  their  own  names. 

10.  Genoa  is  the  birthplace  of  Columbus,  and  Florence  of  Americus  Vcspu- 
cius.    Turin  is  the  most  regularly  built  of  all  the  Italian  cities. 

distinguished?  —  What  have  the  most  celebrated  painters,  sculptors,  and  archi- 
tects, been  ?  7.  Wliat  does  Italy  include  ?  8.  What  is  Rome  ?  —  Which  is 
tlie  largest  clmrch  in  the  world?  9.  What  is  Naples?  —  What  is  Milan?  — 
On  what  is  Venice  built  ?  10.  Of  whom  was  G  enoa  the  birthplace  ?  —  Flor- 
ence ?  —  What  is  Turin  ? 


;.s7( 

is 
and 

an 

/7?C 

4 
yea 
nov 


( 

the 
in  t 


111 


mm 


mmmmmm 


)  granJouv 
plains, 
lire  distin- 
•e  amongst 
ited  paint- 
Ikih/. 

carves  figures, 
ices,  churches, 

ingdom  of 
ij  also  the 

1  lias  been 

)ars.    This 

these,  St. 

it  is  near  five 

iffereut  huild- 

)ms. 

nt.    Venice  is 

lets,  and  boats 

ro  called  Laz- 

:r  own  names. 

ericti^  Vcspu- 


irs,  and  archi- 
—  Which  is 
is  Milan  ?  — 

lace  ?  —  Flor- 


GREECE. 


LESSON  56. 


109 


IONIAN    REPUBLIC,    GREECE    AND    TURKEY. 

1.  The  Ionian  Republic  comprises  scccml  small,  hut  fertile 
i-ilanih,  sitvatid  on  the  tccst  coast  of  Greece.  This  little  state 
is  under  the  protection  of  Great  Britain. 

2.  The  inhabitants  are  chiefly  Greeks  and  Italians  :  they  trade  in  wine,  oil, 
and  currants.     Zauto  and  Corfu  arc  the  principal  towns. 

3.  Greece  is  inhabited  hy  the  Greeks:  they  are  a  brave 

and  handsome  race  of  people,  and,  in  ancient  times,  were  th 

i/wst  civilized  and  learned  nation  in  the  world. 

4.  The  Greeks  were  latterly  subject  to  the  Turks, /or  more  than  three  hundred 
years  ;  but,  after  fighting  many  battles,  they  have  become  independent,  and  arc 
now  governed  by  their  own  king. 


liultle  of  \avarina. 


Questions.  —  1.  What  does  the  Ionian  Republic  compirise?  2.  What  are 
the  inhabitants  chiefly  ?  3.  By  whom  is  Greece  inhabited  ?  —  What  were  they 
in  ancient  times  ?    4.  IIow  long  were  they  subject  to  the  Turks  ?  — What  have 


110 


PRIMARY  GEOGRAPHY. 


5.  The  battle  of  Niivnrino,  fought  in  the  year  1827,  seciircil  the  independence 
of  Greece.  In  this  cnnflicf,  thu  allied  Jloet  of  Englai)d,  rnuiuc,  aiul  Ktissia, 
tlestroyud  two  hundred  and  fourteen  ves.selH  belonging  to  the  Turks  and  J'ig,yii. 
tians. 

6.  Athens,  the  capital  of  Greece,  is  one  of  the  oldest  cities  in  the  world  :  it 
vfoa  the  birthplace  of  many  of  the  most  dinlinguished  men  of  ancient  times.  Tiio 
ruins  of  some  of  the  most  celebrated  buildings  ever  erected,  are  still  to  be  seen 
in  Athens.     Napuli  and  Missolonghi  are  not^d  towns. 

7.  Turkey,  or  the  Ottoman  Empire,  comprises  Turhy  in 
Europe,  and  Tiirlry  in  An-iu.  The  inhabitants  are  called 
Turks.  They  are  Mahomedans,  and  differ  greatly  from 
Christians. 


Turkish  Car  — Turks,  and  Scenery  in  Turkey. 

8.  The  Turks  do  not  use  chairs,  but  sit  cross-legged,  on  cushions,  or  carpets : 
they  wear  turbans  instead  of  hats,  and  take  their  food  with  their  fingers,  without 
knife  or  fork.    Among  these  people,  the  rich  are  allowed  to  have  several  wives, 

they  become  ?  5.  When  Wiis  the  battle  of  Navarino  fought  ?  —  What  did  that 
conflict  secure  ?  0.  What  is  Athens?  —  Of  whom  was  it  the  birthplace ?  7. 
What  does  Turkey  comprise? — What  arc  the  Turks?    8.  How  do  they  sit?  — 


non 
cl.ifi 
not 
is  u 

dn 

im^ 

coi 

1 

cusi 
ado 
in  t 
of  ( 
1 
•■ity 
Mai 
are 
was 


Wli 
arc 
Wh 
med 


\i 


indcprndrnce 
,  unci  Ihissia, 
Hi  and  Efffli. 

he  icorhl :  it. 
1/  times.  Til! 
ill  to  bo  seen 

Tiirh'ij  ill 
are  called 
atly  from 


TURKEY. 


Ill 


none  of  whom,  awording  to  custom,  go  abnnd  without  l)cing  veiled  The  poorer 
class  have  feldnin  more  than  one  wife.  Like  the  ]Mahoniniedans,  the  Turks  do 
not  use  pork  or  wine.  They  all  .smoke  the  pipe,  and  drink  coffee.  The  latter 
is  used  without  either  milk  or  sugar. 

9.  The  Turks  were  once  apoiccrfuJ  ndtlon,  and  wore  long 
dreaded  by  the  adjoining  states ;  hut  they  are  now  of  A'.w 
importance ;  some  very  valuable  territories  have  been  lately 
conquered  from  them. 

10.  The  Sultan,  or  Emperor  of  Turkey,  wishes  his  subjects  t/)  adopt  Christian 
customs  and  habits.  He  is  also  in  favour  of  establishing  schools,  on  the  plan 
a<lopted  iu  the  United  States.  Considerable  changes  have  already  taken  place 
in  the  jiriuciples  of  the  govcmmeut,  and  in  the  manners  of  the  higher  i.-lasscs 
of  the  Turks. 

11.  Constantinople  is //ic  crt/)i<«Z  o/Z/jc  Turkish  empire.  The  houses  in  this 
city  are  mostly  built  of  wood,  and  extensive  fires  sometimes  take  place.  The 
Mahorcmcdan  places  of  worship,  or  mosques,  are  numerous,  and  some  of  them 
are  very  fine  buildings.  The  most  celebrated  of  these,  the  mc  sque  of  St.  Sophia, 
was  once  a  Christian  church. 


i 


s,  or  carpets : 
igers,  without 
tevcrul  wives, 

Vhat  did  that 
rthplace  ?  7. 
5  they  sit?  — 


Mnsqiie. 


Whiit  arc  the  rich  allowed  to  have?  9.  What  were  the  Turks  once?  —  What 
arc  they  now?  10.  What  docs  the  Sultan  wish  his  subjects  to  adopt?  11. 
Whpt  is  Constantinople?  —  What  sometimes  takes  place?  —  What  are  Mahom- 
medan  places  of  worship  called  ? 

H 


I 


S??^ 


ir 


m 


(i' 


Vo.  11.  — MAP   OF   CKNTRAI-   AM)  SOCTHKR.N    r^UKori:. 


.'l(  1.1  ID 


o        I,        III       ir.       lid      jr,       :'.ii      :ir< 


f  I   '  I  '  ■     ' — 'I  »' 


>■- /    11  m.ll  m    I'LJ 


lil-J«    »'i   ■  1 


tf, 


i 


,  .v'.i.'.vi*'!'.    .  .  ■ '■"'..Aijjr.    — -«    ' 


V.^i'iAx 


I  .0-'  P        I. 


«      "  r.niliiilnilrKnfffrnLiWnnlilnf'l.  n 


VL-^  V^ 


1  ''^^  'l^< 


TT 


(112) 


till' 
l!r 

'II 

wti 

wit 
I"' 

Th 

t:il: 

(II 
]rc 

pri 

] 

()] 

\ 
Th 

] 

Jh 

of 

] 

iinr 
rut 

Eu 

it  i 


ijuiiori:. 


t.«^ 


A'' 


(112) 


Tru 


MAi'  Ot   CKNTKAL  AND  HOUTUERN   El'ROrK. 


LKSSON  57. 


11;; 


No.  H  in  II  Miip  of  CVntntl  and  Smitlicrii  Kiirnpc 

I'Mitit  rmt  Kn<>lntiil — Snilinnil — Wales — Inland.  Tlic  (liroo  first  (icr'ni>v 
llio  Iclaiul  iif  (Jiciif,  Jtiitiiiii.  Tilt;  wlicilt!  tuniH  tlic  uiiitcil  kiii^^dmii  of  ( Irciit 
liiitiiiii  Mild   Ircl.'ind. 

I '"int.  out  JIuslria — I'nisaiit — Jinx^nrin — Hanover — Sa.rnny  —  Wirtrmbrri;. 
Tlii'sc  nri!  tlio  princi|i!d  states  (if  (icrinaiiy. 

I'niiit  out  Jliiiiijari/.  'I'liiH  is  a  proviin'i'  liolonginjT  to  Austria,  the  jx-oplo  of 
wliitii  n'cciitlv  ciidcavouri'd  to  Imtoiiic  indcpi'iidi'iit. 

I'diiit  out  Denmark- —  llollaivl — Ihlglum — France — Swilzer/aml.  TIm-sc. 
witli  (Irciit  Hritaiii,  tlic  (l.'niiaii  States,  and  the  western  part  of  llnvsia,  aiv  tlie 
principal  countries  in  Central  Kiiropc. 

Point  out  Spain —  Vorhifial  —  Italy —  Ionian  Islanih  —  (irevce  —  Turkcii. 
'J'liesc  occupy  Soiitliern  Kiirnpc. 

Point  out  .SV.  I'elersliurn — Stockholm — Copenhagen.  These  uro  the  fiijii- 
tals  of  Kussia,  Swcileii  and  Norway,  .•ind  Denmark. 

I  'oint  out  London —  Liverpool— JManchealer — Kdinlmrgh  [ Ed'iti-hnr-ro'] — 
(ilasi;(iu- — Dublin — Cork.  Theso  are  the  principal  cities  in  lueat  JJrituin  and 
Ireland.     London  i.s  the  capital. 

Point  out  Pari.'! — Lyons — Nantes — Bordeaux — Marseilles.  These  are  the 
principal  cities  in  France.      I'aris  is  the  ciijjilal. 

Point  out  Madrid  —  Lisbon  —  Barcelona  —  Seville  —  (Sranadit  —  Cadiz — 
Oporto,     Thise  are  the  principal  cities  in  Spain  and  Portuirai. 

Point  out  Vienna —  Berlin —  Hamhurff — Jimsterdani  —  Bn^i.^els — (ieneva. 
ThcHC  are  the  chief  cities  in  (iennaiiy,  Holland,  IJelfriiini,  and  Swity.erlaiiil. 

I 'oint  out  J^ajiks —  Rome — Florence — Genoa —  Turin — Milan — Constan- 
tinople— Miens.     These  are  the  chief  cities  of  Italy,  Turkey,  and  (ireeee. 

J 'oint  out  the  Vistula — Oder — Elbe  —  Rhine — Loire— Douro — Tagus — 
Dneister  [Jutes' -ter].  Theso  are  the  most  iinport;int  of  the  secoud-nite  rivers 
of  Europe. 

I'oint  out  the  Shctlnd  Mands  —  Orkney  Islands  —  Hebrides,  or  Western. 
Islands.     These  belong  to  Scotland. 

Point  r-i  Cape  Clear  —  St.  GeorgeJ's  Channel — English  Channel.  The 
narrowest  ,,.iit  (,f  the  Engli.,h  C'liann.  1  is  called  the  Strait  of  Dover.  It  sepa- 
rates England  from  France. 

Toint  out  Mont  Blanc— Mount  Etna.  The  first  is  the  highest  mountain  in 
Europe.  It  is  three  miles  hi^li.  Mount  Etna  is  the  most  important' volcano : 
it  is  about  two  miles  high. 


114 


PKIM.VRY  CKOdlUIMIY. 


■M 


III 


<ffi!n 


I'. 


LKSHON  AS. 
HISTORY    OF    KU  R  ()  I'K. 

1.  EiMioi'K,  it  irt  Hupposoil,  was  not  Huttlod  at  so  oarly  a 
period  ax  Asia  or  AlVica :  tlio.so  two  divisions  coutuiiied  jHun  ,- 
fid  cmplrrH  and  2»>pnl<>nH  citicN,  while  the  inluibitantw  of  Eu- 
rope were  wtill  in  a  state  of  l)arharism. 

'2.  TIio  GrcdkH  wcro  Ihr  carlienl  Kuropenn  prnplr  of  whom  ler  know  nnij  tkhft 
with  artninly.  Tlioy  liw.l,  iit  liint,  nn  roolH,  lirrbn,  and  acomx,  uml  hUoUltimI 
tliciiiHi'lvcH  ill  ciivos  and  liullitw  tri'cs. 

•J.  Moul  ii'iiOO  years  af(n,  a,  colony  of  KjiyjitiimH  ncttli'd  in  Greece,  who,  In  ii 
short  time,  wron^dit  iinjmrtant  ehsingi's  iiiiupii-r  tiie  riKh-  inhiibitants.  Tlic  hiltcr 
>)oon  l)oji;iin  to  live  in  Imrnx,  and  lo  form  ri^nJar  frovrrnmcnln  ;  and  at  !  n^^tii 
became  a  renowned  and  important  nation. 

4.  Tiic  people  of  Greece  cultivated  teaming^  and  the  sciences,  and  aerpiired 
•rrcat  skill  in  archileclure,  sintunry.  pninting,  and  other  arts.  They  founded 
hcmiliful  cities,  and  built  splendid  temples ;  of  the  latter  some  remain  to  tiio 
present  day. 

').  The  Romans  Ix-camo,  afterwards,  the  most  powerful  nation  in  the  world: 
they  extended  their  ilominion  over  (!im  ^  ,■,  and  many  ether  countries  in  Europe, 
.Xsia,  and  AfVi<'a.  These  renowned  people  were,  however,  compiered  in  their 
Uim,  by  the  Goths,  and  Vandnl:;,  and  other  barbarous  nations,  who  destroyed 
nearly  every  trace  of  learning  and  refinement. 

0.  For  several  hundred  years  aftvr  the  downfall  of  the  Roman  empire,  the 
people  of  Europe  were  very  rude  and  ignorant,  but  in  time  they  became 

QCKSTIONS.  —  1.  What  did  Asia  and  Africa  contain,  while  Europe  was  still 
in  a  stiite  of  barbarism?  2.  What  were  the  Greeks?  —  On  what  did  they  Hvo 
at  first?  3.  When  did  the  Egyptians  settle  in  Greece?  —  What  did  the  rude 
inhabitants  soon  begin  to  do?  4.  What  did  the  people  of  Greece  cultivate?  — 
Tn  what  did  they  acquire  great  skill  ?  —  What  did  they  found  and  build  ?  5. 
What  did  the  Romans  afterwards  become?  —  By  whom  were  m  y  ca  qur .ed? 
0.  What  were  the  people  of  P]urope  af'cr  the  downfall  of  the  RnraaV.  ompivf)?— 


'     Wi 


i 


HISTORY  or  KUROPF 


lir. 


PI  i 


so  rnrly  a 
iiud  fHni'n- 
iiitH  of  Ku- 


nnw  any  thin<j 
and  HholttTiMl 

oco,  who,  in  w 
M.  TIio  lutttr 
iind  at  I'  iiji^th 

,  and  a('r|uirc(l 
They  fdimdnd 
remain  to  tiio 

in  the  world: 
ios  in  Europe, 
lorcd  in  their 
vho  destroyed 

n  empire,  the 
they  bccumo 

rope  was  still 

;  did  tliey  livo 
did  tlio  rude 
cultivate?  — 

id  build '!     5. 

y  ('It  qiir.ed? 

an  finipire  ?— 


improved  and  civilized,  ami,  with  their  dosceudiint!*  in  other  <{Uttrt<'f?.  they  uow 
eonijiriso  /Ac  most  vnlifihli  nrd  and  jiowirfnl  noliom  in  rxiitltncv. 

7.  All  tile  iialidhH  <ij'  Muropc,  willi  the  execptinn  of  the  Turks,  prole.v-i  thx 
('hrhiidii  ri'liffidn  :  they  are  heller  ediicalml,  mid  <  iijty  «  grcaUi  'ire  offff. 
iliim,  limn  Ihc  inhdhilanls  of  Jinin  or  Jlfrica. 

N.  T  •  i'liii  jie  the  worjcl  in  iiideliteil  I'nr  iiiiiiy  nf  tlii>  tinist  useful  entions  ; 
of  1.  '  ,  («  'Vi  tif  printing,  villi  tin;  inarinrr^H  ntrijtmx,  irri/c/ifs,  i  scopes, 
itnd  riiilmru(ii!.i,  aro  itoiiio  of  the  results  of  Kurojv;ja  ingenuity 

0  Mnni;  di  >ti>iirniKhtd  mm  have  lived  in  Muropi^  iu  ffii)dern  tiincH  •  houio  arc 
noti:ii  v>r  th'ir  leariiiii^f,  (soiue  for  tlu!  u.sefiil  di.-*eovories  they  have  miuie,  nd 
(itiierH  i'r  tluir  aliiiitieH  an  Htiitesnieii  and  warrinru. 

10.  Amoiij;  the  latter  was  Napoleon  Uonaparte,  a  D.iUivo  of  (Jorsiea  :  he  ]r  lunie 
finpi  for  of  till'  Fnnrh,  and  kiiii!  of  lliihj,  and  w  u*  the  jrreatest,  genenil  an  ' 
iiKiimreh  of  lii.s  lime.  IJnii.iparte  raimd  mighty  tirmir^,  and  conquered,  manf 
nali litis  :  ho  was  at  hint,  however,  defeated  at  the  battle  of  Waterloo,  and  wa^ 
sent  as  a  prisoner  /c  the  lnhind  of  St.  llrlcnn,  where  he  died  in  the  year  18"J1, 
after  a  resid(  tieo  of  six  years. 


lloniip.'irlK  01  tliu  hi'iiil  of  hill  army. 


What  do  they  now  connprise ?  7.  What  do  the  nation.^  of  Europe  profess?  — 
What  do  they  enjoy?  H.  What  are  some  of  the  results  of  European  inj^enuity ? 
S^.  Who  have  lived  ii>  Europe,  &c.  ?  10.  What  did  Napoleon  Jionaparto  Veome? 
— \vhat  did  ho  do  ?  — Where  v.;i.s  ho  scut  as  u  prisoner?  — When  did  ho  die  ? 


mggg, 


<■  ifw^MJ*«nTi  iri  to»<ii  L 1 1  ^>iiiii»t> 


116 


PRIMARY  GEOGRArHY. 


i  li 


LESSON  59. 

ASIA. 

1.  Asia  is  tJic  lanjest  dlcUlon  of  tlie  earth,  and  contains  more 
than  one  half  of  its  inhahitants.  It  comprises  many  countries 
and  nations,  with  extensive  ranges  of  high  mountains,  and 
numerous  rivers. 

2.  The  nations  of  Asia  are  often  called  Oriental  nations  ; 
and  the  manners  and  customs  of  the  people  are  called 
Oriental  manners  and  customs.     Oriental  means  eastern. 

3.  The  principal  mountains  of  Asia  are  the  Himmahh, 
or  irnnalaya :  these  are  the  highest  in  the  world.  The  others 
are,  the  Altai,  Thian-chan,  Kuen-lan,  Caucasus,  and  Taurus 
mountains. 

4.  The  chief  rivers  are  the  Kiang,  or  Yang-tse-7dang,  Iloang- 
Ho,  Ohi,  Lena,  Yencs'  ',  Cambodia',  Irraicaddy,  Ganges,  Indus, 
and  Euphrates. 

5.  Asia  furnishes  tea,  sugar,  cnffcc,  indigo,  pepper,  cinnamon,  and  cotton, 
l)csidcs  other  useful  products.  Gold,  and  diamonds,  and  precious  stotics  of 
various  Icinds,  arc  found  in  this  quarter  of  the  world. 

0.  The  principal  Asiatic  auinials  arc,  elephants,  hath  ivild  and  tame,  the  rhi- 
noceros, tiger,  leopard,  horse,  camel,  and  dromedary,  with  antelopes  of  diferenl 
species.  The  olephnnt  ciocs  not  breed  in  a  state  of  servitude.  To  keep  up  the 
stock,  wild  elephants  are  caught  when  young  in  the  woods,  and  arc  readily 
taught  to  obey  the  voice  of  their  keeper. 


Questions.  —  1.  What  is  Asia?  —  What  does  it  contain?  2.  What  are 
the  natives  of  Asia  often  called?  —  What  does  oriental  mean?  3.  Which  are 
the  principal  mountains  ?  4.  Which  are  the  principal  rivers  ?  5.  What  does 
Asia  furnish  ?  — What  are  found  ?   6.  Which  are  the  principal  Asiatic  animals  ? 


^■r-npi 


ASIA. 


117 


iitains  more 
\y  countries 
lutains,  and 

ial  iiat'u)iii:< ; 

are   called 

eastern. 

Illmmahh, 

The  others 
and  Taurus 

ang,  Iloanij- 
)iges,  Inclm, 

on,  and  cotton, 
rious  st07ics  of 

d  tame,  the  rhi- 
pes  of  different 
To  keep  up  the 
md  arc  readily 


2.  What  arc 

3.  Which  arc 

5.  What  does 

siatic  aniuials  'i 


Rhinoceros,  Gazclli:. 

7.  The  gazelle  is  a  kind  of  antelope,  much  admired  for  the  beauty  of  Us  eyes. 
The  camel  and  dromedary  are  animals  of  the  same  species,  and  have  a  stronjr 
resemblance  to  each  other.  Tiie  former  h;is  two  humps  on  its  back,  and  the 
latter  has  but  cue. 


Oolilcu  Plieasnnt. 

8.  The  cassowary,  cranes  of  various  kinds,  some  of  which  are  as  tall  as  a 
man,  the  icild  pea-fowl,  parrots  in  great  variety,  and  the  most  splendid  pheasants 
in  the  world,  arc  a  few  of  the  largest  Asiatic  birds.  The  Gold  Pheasant  and 
the  Silver  Phca.saut  both  inhabit  China. 

9.  The  people  of  Asia  differ  greatly  from  those  of  Europe  and  America.  ]\Iany 
of  them  make  no  use  of  tables,  knives,  forks,  or  plates,  at  their  meals :  they  sit 
on  the  floor,  and  a  whole  family  will  cat  their  victuals  out  of  a  large  wooden  bowl. 

7.  For  what  is  the  Gazelle  admired?     8.  Which  are  the  largest  Asiajtc  birds? 
S>.  Of  what  do  many  of  the  people  make  no  use?  —  On  what  do  tl;ey  sit? 


i 


118 


PRIMARY  GEOGRAPHY. 


10.  Tlicy  sleep  on  mats,  or  carpets,  and  do  not  uiidres.s  wlicu  thoy  lie  down 
to  rest  at  uiglit.  Many  of  the  inliabitauts  wear  long  beards_  ind  shave  their 
heads.  The  women  are  generally  ignorant,  and  very  few  of  them  can  read  antl 
write. 

11.  The  principal  countries  in  Asia  are,  .Lsiatic  Russia, 
TarLaj,  Arabia,  Persia,  Tartar//,  India,  China,  and  Jaj)an. 
The  people  of  Asia  number  450  millions. 


CD 

ni 

c 

L 

in 
ai 


iW 


LESSON  GO.* 
ASIATIC    RUSSIA,    TURKEY,    AND    SYRIA. 

1.  Asiatic  Russia  is  an  immense  territory,  comprising  t/te 
third  part  of  Asia.  It  includes  Siberia,  Gcoryia,  (oid  ,-,or„>' 
other  smaller  districts,  and  extends  from  the  Ural  Mountains 
to  the  Pacific  Ocean. 

2.  Siberia  occupies  the  most  northern  part  of  Asia;  it  is,  for  the  nio.st  part, 
o  cold  and  sterile  region.  The  inhabitants  are  composed  of  Russians,  with 
Tartars,  Tungouscs,  and  other  barbarous  tribes.  It  is  not«d  for  its  mines  of 
gold  and  precious  stones,  and  the  abundance  of  its  fossil  ivory.  The  latte-  is 
found  embedded  in  the  frozen  earth  and  ice  of  the  Northern  coasts.  It  consists 
of  the  teeth  and  tusks  of  the  Mammoth,  an  extinct  animal,  similar  to  the  ele- 
phant. 


10.  On  what  do  they  sleep? — What  do  many  of  the  inhabitants  wear ? — What 
arc  the  women  generally?     11.  Name  tlie  principal  countries  in  Asia. 

QuKSTTONS.  —  1.  What    does   Asiatic   Russia  comprise?  —  What  does   it 
include?     2.  What  is  Siberia? — What  are   the   inhabitants  composed   of? 

*  To  prepare  tlip  Pupils  to  answor  tlip  Qurflions  » itiiniit  thn  assistance  hitherto  rendered  in  tlic  teM 
llie  ii>-e  iil'lhe  It.nlic  type  will  l)e  gradually  UiacoiitinucU  in  wlmt  follows,  and  in  a  few  of  tlic  closing  l*s 
iions  allogulhor  ilispeiisud  Willi. 


sol( 
0th 
Thi 

En 
an 

3. 

are 


GEORGIA-TURKEY  IN  ASIA. 


119 


Iit-y  lie  iIdwh 
I  shave  their 
cun  read  an<l 

ic  Russia, 
id  Japan. 


3.  Those  persons  who  have  displeased  the  emperor  of  Russia,  or  who  have 
coiumitted  certain  crimes,  are  exiled  to  this  country,  and  are  seldom  evei  per- 
mitted to  see  their  friends  a^ain. 

4.  Georgia  is  a  country  situated  on  the  south  side  of  the 
Caucasus  Mountains.  The  inhabitants  are  called  Georgians. 
Like  the  Circassians,  who  reside  on  the  opposite  side  of  the 
mountains,  they  are  a  handsome,  well-formed  people,  but 
are  not  so  warlike. 


H'ising  the 
(Old  .>.>??»<■ 
lountains 


10  most  part, 
ussians,  with 
its  mines  of 
L'he  latto-  is 
It  consist.s 
•  to  the  ele- 


■ar?-. What 
sia. 

hat  does  it 
mposed   of? 

nred  in  tlic  toxt, 
tlic  closing  Lvs 


Georgians  selling  their  Women. 


5.  The  Georgian  women  are  celebrated  for  their  beauty :  many  of  them  are 
sold  by  thek  parents  to  traders,  who  sell  them  to  the  Turks,  lersians,  and 
other  nations.  Some  of  these  women  thus  become  the  wives  of  kings  and  princes. 
The  Russian  government  has  prohibited  the  traffic,  but  it  is  still  carried  on. 

6.  Turkey  in  Asia  forms  a  part  of  tJie  Ottoman,  or  TurMsh 
Empire.  It  is  a  fine,  fertile  region,  but  is  badly  governed 
and  cultivated. 


3.  Who  are  exiled  to  Siberia?     4.  Where  is  Georgia  situated?     .').  For  what 
are  tho  women  celebrated?    G.  Of  what  does  Turkey  in  Asia  form  a  part? 


120 


PRIMARY  GEOGRAPHY. 


mu: 


7.  Mount  Ararat,  on  which  the  Ark  rested,  is  in  this  country ;  and  hero 
Noah  and  his  posterity  settled,  after  the  flood.  This  part  of  Asia  is  inhabited 
by  Turks,  ,irahs,  Turcomans,  .Armenians,  and  Kurds. 


*%»f'^^^/^?^^^:-% 


Nonli  and  his  Family  leaving  the  Ark. 

8.  Smyrna,  Bagdad,  and  Bussorah,  are  the  principal  cities.  Smyrna  is 
noted  for  Us  trade  in  figs,  of  which  large  quantities  are  imported  iiito  the  United 
States. 

9.  Syria  was  conquered  by  the  Turlcs  in  1516,  and  has 
belonged  to  tbeni  ever  since.  It  was  renoAvned  in  ancient 
times  /or  its  commerce  and  riches. 

10.  Tyre,  Baalbec,  and  ralrayra,  were  once  large  and  splendid  cities,  of  which 
nothing  remains  but  ruins.  Damascus  and  Aleppo  are  now  the  chief  cities  of 
SjTia :  the  former  is  situated  in  a  fertile  district.  Aleppo,  in  the  year  1822, 
was  nearly  all  destroyed  by  an  earthquake;  but  it  has  since  been  rebuilt. 


7.  On  what  mountain  did  the  ark  rest  ? — By  whom  is  this  part  of  Asia  inhabited  ? 

8.  Which  are  the  principal  cities?  —  For  what  is  Smyrna  noted?  9.  When 
and  by  what  people  was  Syria  conquered  ? — For  what  was  it  ren  jwned  in  ancient 
times?  10.  What  were  Tyre,  Baalbco,  and  Palmyra?  —  Which  are  now  the 
chief  cities  ? — When  was  Aleppo  nearly  destroyed  ? 


ai 
l)i 

110 

Ik) 
V\ 

vv 

to 

[f' 

va 

an 

M 

ye 


fh. 
W 
liv 
do 


■K' 


j;  and  hero 
is  inhabited 


Smyrna  is 
to  the  United 

I,  and  has 
in  ancient 


ities,  of  which 
;hief  cities  of 
he  year  1822, 
een  rebuilt. 


sia  inhabited  ? 

I?     9.  When 

led  in  ancient 

are  now  the 


PALESTINE  — ARABIA  — PERSIA,  &,c.  121 

LESSON  Gl. 
PALESTINE,    ARABIA,    PERSIA,    Sec. 

I.  Palestine,  or  the  Holy  Land,  is  the  most  celebrated 
riMintry  in  the  world.  It  was  long  inhabited  by  the  Jews, 
and  was  also  the  residence  of  our  Saviour,  Jesus  Christ. 

2.  In  this  piu-t  of  Asia,  Abraham,  Isaac,  and  Jacob  fed  their  flocks,  and 
David  and  Solomon  reigned.  It  was  a  fertile  and  populous  territory;  but  is 
now  badly  governed,  and  badly  cultivated. 

3.  Jerusalem,  the  capitid  of  Palestine,  has  been  renowned  for  more  than 
three  thousand  years.  It  i.s  much  inferior  to  what  it  was  in  ancient  time;:. 
( 'hristians,  Jews,  and  Mahommedans,  regard  it  as  a  holy  city. 

4.  Arabia  is  a  dry,  sandy  country,  poorly  supplied  with 
water.  The  people  are  called  Arabs.  They  live  ^mrtly  in 
towns,  and  partly  in  tents. 

5.  Those  who  live  in  tents  inhabit  the  desert,  and  are  called  Bedouins 
[  Bed'-oo-eens'].  They  raise  many  horses  and  camels,  and  often  plunder  the  cara- 
vans that  travel  through  their  country. 

The  Arabs  are  supposed  to  be  descended  from  Ishmael,  the  son  of  Abrahfira 
and  Ilagar,  of  whom  we  read  in  the  Bible. 

6.  Some  parts  of  Arabia  are  fertile,  and  produce  tlw  finest  coffee  in  the  world. 
Muscat,  Sana,  and  Mecca,  are  the  principal  towns.  The  latter  is  visited  every 
year  by  many  thousand  pilgrims. 


Questions.  —  1.  What  is  Talestine?  —  Who  resided  here?  2.  Who  fed 
f heir  flocks  ?  —  Who  reigned  ?  3.  How  long  has  Jerusalem  been  renowned  ? — 
What  do  Christians,  &c.,  regard  it  ?  4.  What  is  Arabia  ? — How  do  the  Arabs 
live  ?  5.  What  are  those  who  inhabit  the  desert  called  ?  —  What  do  the  Be- 
douins often  do  ?     G.  What  do  some  parts  of  Arabia  produce  ?  —  By  whom  is 


m 


I- 1 


122 


PRIMARY  GEOGRAPHY. 


7.  Persia,  the  country  of  the  Persians,  is  a  very  ancient 
and  famous  cm  pi  re.  It  is  badly  governed,  and  is  not  S(i 
nourishing  and  pcnvertul  as  it  formerly  "was. 

In  the  ]«iW(!  \vc  rciiil  of  Cyrus,  the  friend  of  tlie  Jews,  and  of  Aliasuuru.i. 
who  made  Esther  his  (|ueon :  these  were  both  sovereigns  of  Persia. 


1  t.far^r^^ 


rersiaiis  — Vitw  of  li>iiuliaii 


8.  The  inhahitants  are  the  most  ix)lite  and  learned  of  all  the  Eastern  nations. 
They  make  haudsoiuc  shawls,  carpets,  and  various  articles  of  silk.  Teheran  \s 
the  capital :  Ispahan  and  Tabrcez  are  the  chief  towns. 

9.  Afghanistan  [Af-gan-is-tan']  and  Belogchistan  [Bel- 
oo-chis-tan']  are  situated  directly  cast  of  Persia.  The  people 
of  Afghanistan  are  called  Afghans,  and  those  of  Beloochistan 
Belooches,     They  live  partly  in  towns,  and  partly  in  tents. 

10.  Considerable  portions  of  these  countries  are  barren  and  desert ;  yet  there 
are  many  fertile  tracts,  on  which  fine  peaches,  apricots,  and  quinces  are  raised. 
Cabul  and  Kclat  are  the  principal  cities. 


Mecca  visited  every  year ; 


What  is  Persia?     8.  What  are  the  inhabitants? 


— What  do  they  make  ?  9.  What  are  the  people  of  Aighanistau  called  ? — Of 
Beloochistan?  10.  What  are  considerable  portions  of  these  countries?  — 
What  arc  raised? 


i  It 


y  ancieiif 

s  not  so 

Aliasucru.s. 


r 
•is. 


item  nations. 
Teheran  w 

TAN  [Bel- 
he  people 
loochistan 
in  tents. 

r/ ;  yet  there 
cs  lire  raised. 


inhabitants? 
called?— Of 
countries-  ?  — 


TARTARY,  INDIA  AND  HINDOOSTAN.  123 

LESSON  G2. 
TARTAUY,    INDIA,    AND    HINDOOSTAN. 

1.  Tartaky  is  an  extensive  region,  which  stretches  from 
tlie  Caspian  Sea  to  the  Pacific  Ocean.  It  comprises  two  great 
divisions,  Clihicf^e  Tartan/,  and  ladcjxindeiit  Tartary.  The 
inhabitants  are  called  Tartars. 

'2.  Chinese  Tartai  j  i",cludes  Soonirariit,  Liltle  Bokhara,  Mongolia,  and  Mant- 
chooria.  Independent  Tartary  includes  Ihc  country  of  the  Kirguis  [Kirg-hees'] 
Tribm,  with  Khivn  [Klieo'va],  Tiirconiania,  Great  Bokhara,  and  Khokan 
[Ko'-kan].     The  chief  cities  are  Bokhara,  Khokan,  and  Samarcand. 

'5.  The  people  of  Great  and  Little  Bokhara  and  Khokan  inhabit  cities  and 
towns ;  but  nearly  all  the  other  Tartar  nations  live  in  tents,  and  roam  from  place 
to  place  with  their  camels,  horses,  and  cattle. 


Turcomans  carrying  off  Persians  into  slavery 


Qdestioxs.  —  1.  What  does  Tartary  comprise  ?  2.  What  docs  Chinese 
Tartary  include  ?  —  What  does  Independent  Tartary  include  ?  .3.  What  do  the 
people  of  Great  and  Little  Bokhara  and  Khokan  inhabit  ?  — What  do  nearly 


\ 


124 


PRIMARY  OKOGRAl'HY. 


«f^;' 


4.  The  Turcoman^!,  who  live  on  tlio  castcni  shores  of  tlio  Caspian  Soa,  oftei! 
nttack  and  plunder  tin  liiwnx  and  villngrs  of  llir.  Persians,  arid  carrij  off  and 
sell  the.  people  for  slaves.  Thoy  also  soizo  npon  snch  Kussiiin  snlycLts  us  fall 
into  thi'ir  hands  when  trailing  along  the  shores  of  the  Casjiian  Sea. 

5.  Many  of  the  Tartars  eat  horse-fiesh,  and  prefer  it  to  any  other.  A  favour- 
ite drink  of  the  Kirguis  is  kooniis,  a  whey  made  from  marc's  milkj  from  th- 
latter  they  likewise  make  a  rich,  well-tasted  eheese.  Wild  horses  ahound  in 
various  parts  of  Tartary :  they  are  hunted  by  the  inhabitants  for  food. 

0.  India  is  on",  of  the  most  cvhhnitcd  roniifrlcs  in  the  vin'hl 
It  is  a  very  extensive  and  fertile  region.  Ilindmstdn,  lilnnah. 
Skim,  and  Anam,  are  its  principal  divisions.  Rice  is  iXw 
chief  food  in  all  these  rerrions. 


Tiger  Hunting. 

7.  This  part  of  Asia  has  bccu  long  noted  for  its  diamonds,  spices,  and  cotton 
goods.  The  elephant,  rhinoceros,  and  tigtr,  are  found  here:  the  last-mentioned 
animal  is  the  most  ferocious  and  cruel  in  the  world :  and  is  often  hunted  and 
k'Ued  by  men  riding  on  elephants. 

all  the  other  Tartar  nations  live  in  ?  4.  What  do  the  Turcomans  often  do  ?  5. 
What  do  many  of  the  Tartars  eat?  —  What  is  a  favourite  drink  of  the 
Kirguis?  G.  What  is  India?  —  Name  its  principal  divisions.  7.  For  what 
has    this  part  of  Asia  becu   long  noted?  —  What  animals  are  found  here? 


o 
b 
w 

w 
T 

in 
J{ 

th 

ru 


8. 
pl( 
an 
th( 
Ca 


-ownwit^niiiiiii  ji  i.ii  iuiJii';"!:;' 


iin  Sea,  ofton 
(trrii  off  and 
bj('C't8  us  fall 

Y.  A  favoii!- 
k ;  from  tli'' 
>H  abound  ill 

)0(1. 

the  v'orhl 
I,  Blnnah, 
ice  is  tho 


IS,  and  cotton 
[ist-mcntioucd 
I  hunted  and 


often  do?    5. 

[Jrink  of  the 
7.  For  what 
found  here? 


I3IRMAH,  LTC,  CHINA,  AM)  JAl'AN. 


12;-3 


8.  IIiNDoosTAx  is  the  country  oi"  the  Hindoos :  it  is  very 
popuhjus,  iiiul  contains  many  diilerent  states  :  these  nre  near- 
ly all  subject  to  (Ireat  Britain,  and  Ibrni  that  division  of  the 
British  Empire  called  British  India. 

!).  The  iuhaliitantH  are  of  a  dark  complexion,  but  have  features  similar  to  those 
of  Eurojxans  and  Jimcrkaui.  The  native  princes  are  called  Rajahs,  and  Na- 
bobs: they  live  luxuriously,  while  their  people  often  perish  by  thousands,  for 
want  of  fond. 

10.  The  IIindoo.s  are  divided  into  four  classes,  or  castes,  tho  individuals  of 
which  are  not  allowed  to  intermarry  iritfi  one  another,  or  to  cit  or  sleep  together. 
The  mi.s.sionarics  have  converted  many  of  the  natives  to  tho  Christian  religion. 

11,  Calcutta  is  the  capital  of  British  India.  In  this  city,  the  wealthy  English 
inhabitants  live  in  houses  that  rival  palaces  in  elegance  and  extent.  Madras  and 
IJombay  are  important  cities. 

The  Banyan,  or  Wonder  Tree,  grows  in  lliiidoostan.  A  well-known  tree  of 
this  species  has  upwards  of  three  thousand  dejiending  branches,  that  have  taken 
nxit  in  the  ground. 


Tho  Banyan  Tree. 


8.  To  whom  is  nearly  the  whole  of  Illndoostan  subject?  9.  Of  what  com- 
plexion are  the  inhabitants  ?  — To  whom  are  their  features  similar? — What 
are  tho  native  princes  called?  10.  How  are  the  Hindoos  divided ? —What  are 
they  not  allowed  to  do?  —  What  have  the  missionaries  done?  11  What  k 
Calcutta? — What  do  the  wealthy  inhabitants  live  in? 


;,.- 


120 


IMUMARY  (iKOGRAPIiy. 


um 


LKSSON  G;1. 
BIRMAH,    ETC..    CHINA.    AND    JAPAN. 

1.  BiUMAii,  HiAM,  Anam,  and  Malacca,  are  countries  which 
form  the  eastern  part  of  India.  These  are  well-watered, 
warm,  and  fertile  regions. 

'2.  The  inhabitants  nrc  idolaters.  Almost  every  family  in  lhcnc  countries,  as 
well  IIS  in  China  and  Japan,  have  images  in  tlieir  houses,  which  they  worship 

privately. 

3.  The  American  nii.ssionaries  have  converted  many  of  the  Ihrmans,  hnrnis, 
md  other  races,  to  the  faith  of  the  Gospel.  The  people  of  I^Iulacca  arc  ci.Unl 
Malays,  and  ore  mostly  pirates.  Monchaboo  is  the  capital  of  Birmah ;  ih'xc,- 
kok,  of  Siani ;   and  Hue,  of  Anam. 

4.  The  Empire  of  China  is  very  extensive;  it  contains 
many  large  cities  and  tmvm,  and  a  greater  popidation  than  awj  , 
otlver  empire  in  the  world. 

5.  The  inhabitants  of  this  country  are  called  Chinese  :  they  are  a  proud,  vain 
people,  and  believe  all  other  nations  to  bo  much  inferior  to  themselves.  The 
Emperor  is  called  the  Son  of  Heaven. 

6.  In  China,  very  small  feet  are  thought  to  be  t'ie  chic.-  oeauty  of  a  woman. 
The  poor  often  suffer  from  a  want  of  food,  and  jat  dogs,  cats,  rats,  and  mice, 
while  the  rich  fare  sumptuously. 

7.  Besides  China  Proper,  the  Chinese  Empire  comprises  Thiliet,  Little  Bokhi- 
ra,  Soongaria,  Mongolia,  Mantchooria,  and  Corea.  Pekin  is  the  capital  of  tht 
(Chinese  Empire.  Canton  is  the  chief  sea-port :  nearly  all  the  tea  that  wo  use 
comes  from  Canton. 

Questions.  —  !.  What  do  Birmah,  &c.,  form?  2.  What  are  the  inhabit- 
ants  ?  3.  What  have  the  American  missionaries  done  ?  —  What  are  the  people 
of  Malicca  called?  — What  are  they  mostly?  4.  What  does  the  empire  of 
China  contain  ?  5.  What  are  the  Chinese  ?  6.  What  is  thought  to  be  the  chief 
beauty  of  the  women  ?  7.  Besides  China  Proper,  what  does  the  Chmeso  Em- 
pire comprise?     8.  For  what  is  China  noted?  — What  is  a  remarkable  build- 


fni 


I 


be 
re. 

a  r 

he 


po 
fei 

vei 
Co 

inj 
fol 
of. 
all. 


;*ies  which 
l-watcM'e<K 

onuntrios,  n« 
they  worsbij) 

taw,  Kor'-nn, 
•ca  uri;  ct.Ui'il 
rmuL;  ih<\q,- 

t  contains 
u  than  amj  , 

n  proud,  vain 
iselvcs.     The 

of  a  woman. 
its,  and  mice, 

Little  Bokbv 
capital  of  tht 
a  that  wc  vm 


B  the  inhabit- 
are  the  people 
he  empire  of 
io  be  the  chief 
!  Chinese  Em- 
arkable  build- 


TlimET-TIIB  RMPIRE  OF  JAPAN. 


127 


8.  Tlie  (iroiit  Wall,  and  tho  Orand  Canal,  arc  mU^d  works.      Tlw  I'orcr- 
tain  Tomer  is  a  rcmarkabio  buil.ling.     Tea  in  the  loaf  of  a  Hhrub  thiit 
principally  in  this  country. 


grows 


Turcetaln  Towor. 


Tna  Plant. 


9.  TmiiET  is  a  cohl  and  mountainous  country,  situated 
between  India  and  China.  It  is  remarkable  for  hc'uig  tJie 
rcdtknce  of  the  Grand  Lama. 

10.  This  princo  is  the  sovereign  pontiff  of  the  Shaman  religion.  Though  but 
a  man,  iiis  followers  believe  that  he  is  God  liimsclf,  in  a  human  form,  and  that 
he  Dover  dies.     Lassa  is  tho  capital  of  Thibet. 

11.  The  Empire  op  Japan  consists  of  several  large  and 
populous  islands,  which  lie  eastward  of  China.  The  soil  is 
fertile,  and  well  cultivated. 

12.  Manufactures  of  various  kindt  are  carried  on  by  the  Japanese.  They  aro 
very  jealous  of  ot/icr  nations,  and  do  not  allow  any  but  the  people  of  China, 
Corea,  and  tho  Dutch,  to  trade  with  them.    Jedo,  the  capital,  is  a  very  largo  city. 

ing?_What  is  tea?  9.  For  what  is  Thibet  remarkable?  10.  What  do  the 
followers  of  the  Orand  Lama  believe  him  to  be  ?  1 1 .  Of  what  docs  the  P]mpiro 
of  Japan  consist  ?  12.  Of  whom  arc  the  inhabitants  jealous  ?— Whom  do  they 
allow  to  trade  with  them  ?  "' 


\ 


— «■ 


No.    12.  — MAP   OF   ASIA. 


(128) 


or 
I' 

A 

s 


fir 
til 
\vl 

E 

n 


l.ri 
of 

AVI  I 

Ui 
lii 
Tb 

Tl 

] 


cap 

J 

Jer 

arc 


-'::=ailk 


^^ 

"^^^'^^ 

^f  .<^'n; 

^^^■:■'^^o 

Jl■.;^ 

(128) 


MAF  OF  AHIA. 


LESSON  04. 


129 


No.  12  iH  a  Map  of  AMia.  This  diviHion  of  tlu'  Kiwtcni  Continent  in  Imundf.l, 
on  tlm  nnrtli,  ly  tlio  Nortli.Mn  O.rnn  ;  si.utli,  l.y  tii..  Im^IImh  (Kran;  Liwt,  by  thu 
I'acilic  Ocean;  ami  west,  liy  Hnrope  ^iml  Afrjcn, 

INiint  out  the  .IrciK  (kr an  — Indian  Ocean—Pacijk  Ocean— Kitropc— 
Jljricn — Marlli  ,'J>ii,rica, 

Point  out  the  ninrl:  Sra—Iird  Sea—.lrahinn  Sra— China  Sai—Yelhw 
Sra—Sm  of  ()r/wld-—C>isiii„n  Sca—Sca  of.lrul.  '\'\u-  two  la.st  iirc  Interior 
heas,  ami  are  not  cMntieeteil  uilii  the  Occiti, 

I'ojiit  out  tiu'  /',T,s/,/;i  iiuij'—lliuj  of  llin<',(il—l'.ulfol'  Sunn. 

I'oiht  out  lir/trin^'s  Hlruif—Slrnil  of  liahvlmahdi'l—hlhmns  ,./"  Siii  z.  Tiio 
flr.-t  sejiarates  Asia  and  N.irtli  Aineriea;  tlu^  neeoiid  sejiarates  Asiji  and  Afriea: 
tlie  liurd  is  tiu!  neck  of  land  lidween  the  Mediten-aiu'an  and  Ited  Sea,  und 
wiiieii  unites  Asia  and  Africa. 

I'..iut  out  til.'  Lina  Ilifrr—Vrnrsri  H.~()l,i  H.—lrlmh  H.—  Vnlf^n  It  — 
Hii/dinilrs  U.~lnduH  ll.—  doiiars  ll  —  Ciunhodia  lt.—  V,iiu;-hr-k'iaii<f  It.— 
Ilofiiiu'-Ho  n.—.hiioor  It.     The  Van^r.f.sc-Kiaiijr  is  the  larj;...}  river  in  Asia". 

rniiit  out  tlie  inlands  of  .VV/c  Sihfrtn—Loccodivr  I'.—Mnhln'r  I\— Ceylon 

—  IIiiinnn~Formoso  —  Aij,lwn—J>:ss»—Scg/iHlicn.     'J'lie  tiireo  hiht  arc  the 
jiriiuipal  islands  of  .rapan. 

_  Point  out  tiu'  peninsulas  of  Malacca— Corea—KamlHchalkn.  The  peninsula 
ot   Malacca  is  separated  fi i  the  island  of  Sumatra  hy  the  Strait  of  .Malacca. 

Point  out  Mount  Jlraral— Ural  M".  —  Altay  M'\— Titian  Chan  M".— 
lltmmai,''  or  Himalaya  M'\  Tlie  Ixst  are  the  hi>,'lipst  mountains  in  the 
world.  Sonic  of  them  are  more  than  five  miles  hiirli.  Tlu!  Caucasus  and 
Ural  M"  form  a  portion  of  the  houndary  lietwcn  iMirojie  and  Asia. 

Point  out  Siberia  —  Turkey— Syria— Jirabia  —  Persia  —  JIfghanislan  — 
lieloochislan — Independent  Tartary. 

P.iint  out  India— Ilindonstan—Birmah—Siam—Jlnam— Empire  of  Japan. 
The  last  consists  entirely  of  islands. 

I'oint  out  China— Little  Bokhara— Sonngaria— Mongolia— Manlchooria 

Thibet— Core  a.     These  re/,'ions  form  the  Chine.se  Empire. 
1  Mint  out  Pckin  —  Jedo  —  Hue  —  Lnnsa  —  Calcutta  —  Mecca  —  Bangkok 

—  Monchaboo  —  Bokhara  —  Cabul  —  Teheran.    These  are  the  most  important 
capitals  of  Asia. 

Point  out  Canton— Saigon  —  Madras  —  Bombay  —  Ispahan  —  Khokan  — 
Jerusalem— Medina— Muscat—  Tobolsk—  Omsk—lrkoutsk—  Yakoutsk.  These 
are  the  principal  cities  of  Asia  that  arc  not  capitals. 


130 


PRIMARY  GEOGRAPHY. 


LESSON  65, 
HISTORY    OF   ASIA. 

The  history  of  Asia  is  highly  interesting,  and  worthy  of  being  studied :  in 
this  little  book  wc  can  only  mention  a  few  of  the  most  remarkable  occurrences 
which  have  taken  place  in  that  quarter  of  the  earth. 

1.  The  history  of  Asia  begins  with  the  creation  of  the  world.  This  event, 
which  took  place  nearly  six  thousand  years  ago,  is  recorded  in  the  Holy  Scrip- 
tures. There  we  may  also  read  the  account  of  our  first  parents ;  of  the  murder 
of  Abel,  by  his  brother  Cain ;  and  of  the  acts  of  Noah,  who  built  the  ark. 

2.  The  ark  was  a  great  nhip^in  which  JVoah  and  his  family  were  saved  from 
the  food.  This  was  a  vast  deluge  of  water,  which  covered  the  earth,  and 
destroyed  all  living  creatures,  except  those  who  were  saved  with  Noah.  The 
flood  occurred  nearly  four  thousand  two  hundred  years  ago. 


. !    li 


Building  ihe  Tower  of  Babe!. 


Questions.  —  1.  What  dfjes  the  history  of  Asia  begin  with? — When  did 
this  event  take  place?  —  Of  what  may  we  also  read  an  account?  2.  What 
waatheark? — What  was  tne  flood?— When  did  the  flood  occur?    3.  What 


HISTORY  OF  ASIA. 


131 


ng  studied :  in 
ble  occurrences 

I.  This  event, 
lie  Holy  Scrip- 
of  the  murder 
It  the  ark. 
fere  saved  from 
the  earth,  and 
h  Noah.     The 


3.  About  a  hundred  years  after  the  flood,  the  descendants  of  Xitah  bean  t-. 
build  the  tower  of  IJabel,  which  they  intended  should  reach  to  heaven;  but  the 
Almighty  put  a  stop  to  their  foolish  design,  by  confounding  their  language,  so 
that  they  could  not  understand  one  another. 

4.  This  circumstance  caused  them  to  scatter  abroad  into  various  parts  of  tfu 
earth.  The  children  of  Shem  are  supposed  to  have  settled  Asia;  those  of  Ham 
to  have  settled  Africa ;  and  the  posterity  of  Japheth  to  have  settled  Europe. 

h.  The  narratives  of  the  lives  of  Abraham,  Isaac,  and  Jacob ;  of  Samson  and 
his  acts;  of  David,  who  killed  Goliath;  of  Daniel,  who  was  cast  into  the  lions' 
den ;  and  of  Nebuchadnezzar,  who  was  condemned,  for  his  sins,  to  eat  gniss,  an 
portions  of  the  history  of  Asia. 

G.  The  appearance  of  our  Saviour  Jesus  Christ,  eighteen  hundred  and  forty 
years  agn,  is  the  most  rcmarhahk  event  recorded  in  history.  At  that  time  the 
inluibitants  of  the  earth  were  ignorant  of  true  religion,  and  had  become  yox\ 
wicked. 


!( 

*     if 


IKl 


h?  — When  did 
unt?  2.  What 
cur?    3.  What 


'  ■  ■li'ir^'i'T,'  '.i'"-',y  Si^taJili'i 


Jerusaloni  taken  by  the  Romans. 


did  the  descendants  of  Noah  begin  to  build,  &e.  ?  —  IIow  did  the  Almighty 
stop  their  design  ?  4.  What  did  this  circumstance  eau.se  them  to  do?  —  What 
did  the  children  of  Shem  settle?  —  The  children  of  Ham?  —  The  posterity  of 
Japheth  ?  5.  What  are  all  portions  of  the  history  of  Asia?  G.  What  was  the 
appearance  of  Our  Saviour  Jesus  Christ  ?  —  Of  what  were  the  inhabitant*)  of  the 


SI  J' 

m 


132 


PRIMARY  GEOGRAPHY. 


U 


7.  Cbi-ist  tauglit  maiikiml  In  worship  God,  and  In  love  one  another.  He 
showed  tlieni  that  those  wlio  do  good,  and  act  justly,  will  enjoy  everlasting  liap- 
[lincss  in  the  world  to  come;  while  those  who  are  wicked,  and  practise  sin,  will 
be  wretched  and  miserable. 

S.  The  liodeomer  was  constantly  craploj-ed  in  performing  acts  of  charily  and 
mercy ;  yet  he  was  barbarously  crucified  by  the  Jews :  they  were,  in  consequence, 
•Ji'ivon  from  their  own  country,  and  their  chief  city,  Jerusalem,  was  taken  and 
lie.itriiyed  by  the  llomans. 

:».  After  the  death  o{  our  Saviour,  his  disciples  preached  the  gospel  with  won- 
derful success,  and  converted  multitudes  of  sinners.  Though  opposed  and  per- 
socuted,  they  cstablislml  the  Christian  faith  in  various  parts  of  the  earth,  and  it 
)ias  now  become  the  religion  of  the  most  enlightened  nations. 


LESSOX  G6. 

HISTORY    OF    ASIA— Conllnued. 

\.  Anoirr  six  hundred  years  after  the  time  of  Christ,  the  impostor  Mahomed 
appeared  in  Arabia,  and  established  a  false  religion,  which  has  been  adopted  by 
tlic  Turks,  Arabs,  Persians,  Tartars,  and  other  Oriental  nations. 

2.  Many  systems  of  religion  have  had  their  rise  in  this  quarter  of  the  earth. 
The  worshippers  of  Urahma,  in  llindoostan ;  those  of  Buddha,  in  Birmali ;  of 
the  Grand  Lama,  in  Thibet  and  Tartary;  and  of  Fo,  in  China,  embrace  the 
greater  part  of  the  inhabitants  of  Asia. 

3.  The  Hindoos,  who  worship  Brahmah,  foolishly  believe  that  they  can  only 

earth  ignorant?  —  What  had  they  become  ?  7.  What  did  Christ  teach  man- 
kind? 8.  In  what  was  the  Redeemer  constantly  employed  ?  —  AVho  cruciiicd 
him  ?  —  What  were  they  driven  from  ?  9.  What  took  place  after  the  death  of 
our  Saviour?  —  What  did  his  disciples  establish? 

Questions.  —  1.  When  did  Mahomed  appear?  —  What  did  he  establish? 
2.  What  have  had  their  rise  in  this  quarter  of  the  eai-th?  —  What  do  the  wor- 
shippers of  tliesc  systems  embrace  ?  8.  In  what  way  do  the  Hindoo^:  believe 
they  can  obtain  pardon  for  sin  ?    4.  How  do  some  seek  death  ?  —  In  what  wsy 


re 
th 

d( 


sp 
dc 


en 
nr 
of 

qi 
es 

ar 
B 

ar 


wnlher.  Ho 
■rlasting  linp- 
3tisc  sin,  will 

f  charihj  and 
consequcnci.', 
as  taken  and 

pel  with  won- 

oscJ  and  per- 

cartli,  and  it 


tor  Mabomod 
m  adopted  by 
i. 

of  the  earth. 
I  Birmabj  of 

embrace  the 

they  can  only 

it  teach  man- 
iVho  cruciticil 
•  the  death  of 

he  establish? 
it  do  the  wor- 
ndoo^:  believe 
-In  what  wav 


HISTORY  OF  ASIA. 


138 


obtain  the  pardon  of  sin  by  the  performance  of  various  cruel  practices,  alike 
revolting  to  reason  and  humanity. 

4.  Some  seek  death  by  drowning ;  some  are  crushed  beneath  the  whocls  of 
the  great  cars  on  which  their  idols  are  dragged  about ;  and  others  sleep  on  Ijoards 
set  full  of  sharp  nails.  Widows,  also,  burn  themselves  with  the  bodies  of  their 
deceased  husbands. 


Hindoo  Willow  porrorining  tlii'  Suttee,  or  liiirning  liersclf  with  the  (li:a(l  Body 
of  licr  Husband. 

5.  The  followers  of  I>uddha  arc  numerous  in  Birniah  and  Siam.  They  build 
spacious  temples,  most  of  which  contain  monstrous  idols ;  these  the  people  bow 
down  to,  and  worship. 

G.  In  Asia,  at  an  early  period,  the  Assyrian,  the  Babylonian,  and  the  Persian 
empires,  succcs.^ively  arose,  flourished,  and  decayed.  In  later  times  the  Greeks, 
and  afterwards  the  Romans,  exercised  dominion  over  some  of  the  finest  portions 
of  this  region. 

7.  About  twelve  hundred  years  ago,  the  Saracens,  or  Arabs,  began  their  con- 
qu(,'sts,  and  obtained  po.ssessiou  of  many  fruitful  countries.  They  founded  an 
extensive  empire,  and  were,  for  a  time,  an  important  and  powerful  nation. 

arc  some  crushed?  —  What  do  widows  do?  5.  Whore  are  the  followers  of 
Buddha  numerous?  —  What  do  they  liuild?  0.  What  empires  sticccssivoly 
arose,  &c.  ?  —  What  nations  exercised  dominion,  &c.  ?     7.  When  did  the  Sara- 


^l.l 


I 


'ilfil 


i«;l 


•:«■■;■* 


134 


PRIMARY  GEOGRAPHY. 


8.  At  a  later  period  Jengliis  Khan  [Jcng'-is  Kan'],  a  Tartar,  and  afterwards 
T.  merlune,  a  Turkish  confjucror,  connuaiided  armies  which  contained  hundreds 
of  thousands  of  men.  They  subdued  many  Ui'.tions  and  countries,  and  converted 
some  of  the  finest  regions  of  Asia  into  barren  wastes. 

9.  The  discovery  of  a  passage  to  India  around  the  Cape  of  Good  Ilojte,  in  the 
year  1-lOS,  is  one  of  the  most  remarkable  incidents  connected  with  this  part  of 
tlie  earth,  that  has  ever  occurred. 

10.  In  consequence  of  that  event,  the  boundaries  of  knowledge  have  been 
cidarged ;  commerce  has  been  extended ;  and  civilized  nations,  particularly  the 
Uritish,  have  ac({uircd  great  power  and  dominion. 

11.  Through  the  preaching  of  the  missionaries,  and  the  information  spread 
abroad  by  printed  books  and  newspapers,  important  changes  are  taking  place 
among  the  multitudes  that  inhabit  Aaw. 

V2.  The  religion  of  the  Saviour,  and  the  more  benevolent  customs  of  Christian 
society,  will,  no  doubt,  in  iime,  be  substituted  for  the  worship  of  false  gods,  and 
the  cruel  rites  of  Paganism. 


LESSON  67. 
AFRICA  — BARBARY   AND    EGYPT. 

1.  Africa  is  a  great  peninsula,  Avliicli  is  joined  to  Asia  by 
the  Isthmus  of  Suez.  It  is  the  hottest,  aud  the  least  known, 
division  of  the  earth. 

2.  The  chief  ranges  of  mountains  are  the  Atlas,  the  Kong, 
and  the  Mountains  of  the  Moon.     The  princijial  rivers  are 


cens  begin  their  conf(uests  ?  8.  "What  did  Jenghis  Khan  and  Tamerlane  do  ? 
—  Into  what  ^iu  they  convert  some  of  the  finest  regions  ?  9.  When  was  the 
passage  :')  India  discovered  ?  10.  What  has  been  the  consequence  of  that  event  ? 
11.  Through  what  means  are  important  changes  tidiing  place?  12.  What  will 
be  substituted  for  the  worship  of  false  gods,  &c.  ? 
Questions.  —  1.  What  is  Africa  ?    2.  Name  the  chief  ranges  of  mountains. 


t: 

s 

y 


tt 

01 

el 


t£ 
01 


s 
r 


MMH 


id  aftorwarda 
led  hundreds 
iiij  couverted 


IlojiC,  in  the 
1  this  part  of 

»c  have  boon 
rticularly  the 

nation  spread 
taking  phice 

s  of  Christian 
dsc  gods,  and 


to  Asia  by 
Lst  known, 

the  Kong, 
rivers  are 


'amerlane  do  ? 
Vhen  was  the 
rf  tliat  event  ? 
2.  What  will 

of  mountains. 


AFRICA  — BARBARY. 


135 


the  Nile,  Niger,  Congo,  Coanza,  Orange,  Zambeze,  and  Sene- 
iral.    Some  of  tliese  rivers  have  an  extensive  length  of  course, 

C  CD  ^ 

yet  none  of  them  are  navigable  for  large  vessels,  except  for 
a  short  distance  from  the  sea. 

o.  Though  a  large  portion  of  Africa  is  a  vast  desert,  yet  many  parts  of  its 
territory  are  very  fertile,  and  their  produets  are  highly  valuable.  The  coeoanutj 
orange,  olive,  date,  pine-apple,  and  banana,  are  among  the  principal  fruits. 

Africa  produces  gold  and  ivory  :  the  latter  is  the  .subst^-mce  of  the  tusk  of  the 
elephant.     Combs,  knife-handles,  and  many  other  things,  are  made  of  ivory. 


IIi]>po|iotaiiius. 


Oalrich. 


4.  The  elephant,  lion,  hippopotamus,  camelopard,  leopard,  antelope,  orang-ou- 
tang, and  monkey,  beside  many  other  animals,  inhabit  Africa.  The  African 
ostrich  is  the  largest  bird  in  the  world. 

5.  The  inhabitants  arc  mostly  of  the  negro,  or  black  race.  They  are  very 
ignorant,  and  are  often  at  war  with  each  other,  in  which  tho.se  that  are  conquered 
arc  made  slaves. 

6.  The  pi'incipal  countries  of  Africa  are  Barbary,  Egypt,  Nubia,  Aby.ssinia, 
Sencgambia,  Guinea,  Cape  Colony,  Mozanibif(ue,  Zaugucbar,  and  Soudan.  The 
population  is  supposed  to  amount  to  57  millions. 


—  Name  the  principal  rivers.  3.  IMontion  some  of  the  i)rincipal  fruit.s.  4. 
Which  arc  .some  of  the  chief  animals  ?  — Which  is  the  largest  bird  in  Ihe  W(jrld  ? 
5.  Of  what  race  are  most  of  the  inluibitjints  ?     0.  Name  the  principal  countries 


136 


PRIMARY  GEOGRAPHY. 


7.  Barbauv,  the  most  northern  part  of  Africa,  incluilcs  the 
independent  states  of  Morocco,  Tunis,  and  Tripoli,  and  the 
Colony  of  Algiers,  or  Algeria.  The  latter  was  conquered 
by  the  French  in  the  year  1830,  and  still  belongs  to  that 
nation. 

S.  Those  countries  arc  warm,  and,  for  the  most  part,  fruitful.  Tlioy  are  badly 
governed,  and  rudely  cultivated.  Jlorocco,  Algiers,  Tunis,  and  Triimli,  arc  the 
chief  cities. 


Natives  of  liarbary.  Moorish  lloracmoii. 

0.  The  inhabitants  are  principally  Moors,  Berbers,  and  Ambs.  The  Moora 
reside  in  the  towns;  thiy  are  noted  for  their  skill  in  horsemanship.  The  Ber- 
bers inhabit  the  Atlas  mountains.  The  Arabs  live  iu  tents,  and  possess 
many  camels. 

10.  Egypt  is  the  most  celebrated  country  in  Africa.  It  is 
watered  by  the  river  Nile,  whicli  overflows  its  banks  every 
year,  and  renders  the  soil  very  productive. 

of  Africa.  7.  What  is  Barbary  ?  —What  docs  it  include  ?  8.  What  arc  these 
countries,  &c. ?  !).  AVliat  are  the  inhabitants  principally? — What  are  the 
Moors  noted  for?  —  What  do  the  Berbers  inhabit? — In  what  do  the  Arabs 
Jive?     10.  What  is  Egjpt  ?  —What  i.^  it  watered  by  ?    11.  What  is  this  coun- 


are 
ant 

doi 

est 
Ca 


til 
tr 

nu 
K 

ar 
hi 

vc 
ill] 
of 


tr; 

cs 

3. 

fci 


iiwij tm'm  ■--KMtrii\  mmhiM 


NUniA,  SENEC.hMBIA,  and  f.UINEA. 


137 


eludes  the 
i,  and  the 
3o;iquered 
a  to  that 

icy  are  brully 
ilioli,  arc  the 


The  Moors 
).     The  Bcr- 

and  possess 

ica.    It  is 
iks  every 


liat  arc  these 
'liat  are  the 
lo  the  Arabs 
is  this  coun- 


11.  This  country  is  famous  for  its  pyramid.",  Sphinx,  and  catacombs :  the  hitter 
are  tombs,  in  wliich  niumniie?,  or  the  embalmed  bodies  of  the  ancient  inhabit- 
ants, are  still  found. 

1*2.  Egypt  was  lonj:;  a  province  of  the  Turkish  Empire,  but  is  now  indepen- 
dent. Its  I'aciia  [I'a-shaw'],  or  ruler,  lias  a  powerful  army  and  navy.  lie  has 
established  schools  and  manufactories,  but  governs  liis  people  with  great  severity. 
Cairo  is  the  capital;  Alexandria  is  the  chief  sea-port. 


LESSON  68. 
NUBIA,    SENEGAMBIA,    AND    GUINEA. 

I.  Nubia  is  a  dry,  sandy  region,  situated  on  both  sides  of 
the  river  Nile.  It  was  once  a  populous  and  important  coun- 
try, ])ut  is  now    .liidy  peopled. 

2.  The  remains  of  splendid  temi)k'S  are  common  in  Nubia.  They  are,  for  the 
most  part,  under  ground,  and  cut  out  of  the  solid  rock.  New  Dongola,  and 
Kliartoom,  are  the  chief  towns. 

•).  Abyssinia  is  a  territory  composed  of  rugged  mountains, 
and  fertile  valleys.  It  now  comprises  the  kingdoms  of  Am- 
hara,  Tigi'e,  and  Shoa. 

4.  The  inhabitants,  though  of  a  dark  complexion,  are  not  negroes.  They  arc 
very  rude  and  brutal  in  their  manners.  At  their  feasts  they  cat  raw  flesh,  stream- 
ing with  blood,  cut  from  the  animal  while  yet  warm.  Gondar  is  the  largest  city 
of  Abyssinia. 

5.  The  Sahara,  or  Great  De.ser:,  is  a  vast  sandy  plain, 

try  famous  for?     12.  What  is  Egypt  independent  of ?  —  What  has  the  Pacha 
established  ?  —  How  does  he  govern  his  people  ? 

Questions.  —  1.  What  is  Nubia?  2.  What  are  common  in  this  country? 
3.  What  is  Abyssinia  composed  of?  4.  What  are  the  inhabitants  ?  — ^  At  their 
leasts,  what  do  tiiey  cat?     5.  What  is  the  Great  Desert?  —  What  docs  ii  con- 


I' I 
I' 


t. 


138 


PRIMARY  GEOGRAPHY. 


Mii 


if 


contiiining  a  few  fertile  spots,  called  oases.  These  are  scat- 
tered over  its  surface  at  great  distances  from  each  other. 
Fezzan  is  the  largest  oasis. 


A  Caravan  travelling  acroiis  the  Great  Desert. 

(5.  The  desert  can  be  crossed  only  by  caravans  :  these  are  composed  of  trader.^, 
with  horses  and  camels.  The  camels  carry  the  merchandise ;  also  food  and  water 
The  caravans  are  sometimes  overwhelmed  by  clouds  of  sand,  which  arc  raised  up 
by  the  winds  that  blow  over  the  desert. 

7.  Sexegamuia  is  inhabited  by  the  Foulahs,  Jaloffs,  Man- 
dingoes,  and  other  negro  nations. 

8.  The  English,  French,  and  Portuguese,  have  some  small  colonies  on  the 
coast.  SiEUUA  Leonk,  an  English  colony,  is  the  largest  of  these.  It  wa« 
established  for  the  purpose  of  teaching  the  natives  to  read  and  write,  and  instruct- 
ing them  in  the  Christian  religion. 

9.  Guinea  comprises  Liberia,  Ashantee,  Dahomey,  Congo, 


tain  ?     G.^  IIow  can  the  descit  be  cro.ssed  ?     7.  What  nations  inhabit  Senegam- 

bia?  —  Who  have  settlements  on  the  coast?     8.  Name  the  chief  of  these. 

For  what  pui-pose  was  it  established?   9.  What  docs  Guinea  comprise ?— Wliat 


ai 

A 

V 

w 


■<■«<■ 


■!C  are  scat- 
;ach  other. 


S^:s 


iscd  of  trader.'*, 
bod  and  water 
I  arc  raised  up 

loffs,  Man- 


)lonies  on  the 
hcso.  It  was 
'.,  and  instruct- 

ley,  Congo, 

libit  Scnogani- 
f  of  these. — 
irise  ? —  Wliut 


OUINGA. 


139 


iiul  other  countries.  The  inhabitants,  like  all  the  native 
Africans,  are  fond  of  music  and  dancing,  and  play  on 
various  rude  instruments.  They  are  mostly  Pagans,  and 
worship  serpents,  lizards,  and  other  disgusting  objects. 


'i>-c-^^~-^~y  _,«j  ^.--^ ---'  — ' 

MusUal  limtruiiiciils  of  the  Ni'crocB. 

10.  Liberia  was  settled  in  the  year  1821,  under  the  auspices  of  the  Ameri- 
fan  Colonization  Society,  and  designed  as  an  a.sylum  for  the  free  coloured 
population  of  the  United  States.  In  1847  it  became  an  independent  Republic. 
It  is  a  fertile  country,  and  contains  about  3500  civilized  inhabitants.  Monrovia, 
tlic  chief  town,  was  named  after  James  Monroo,  Into  president  of  the  United 
States. 

11.  AsnANTEE,  and  Dahomey,  arc  countries  situated  eastward  of  Liberia,  the 
kinf's  of  which  arc  so  cruel  as  to  sacrifice  hundreds  of  their  subjects  at  a  time  to 
the  spirits  of  their  ancestors. 

12.  Congo,  Angola,  and  Benguela,  are  principally  under  the  dominion 
of  Portugal.  The  inhabitants  are  very  ignorant  and  indolent.  The  slave  trade 
is  carried  on  extensively  from  this  part  of  Africa. 

iire  the  inhabitants  fond  of  ?  — What  do  they  worship?  10.  In  what  year  was 
Liberia  settled  ?— What  was  it  designed  for?— Whowiia  Monrovia  named  after? 
11.  What  countries  arc  situated  neiu-  Liberia?  12.  Under  what  dominion  are 
Congo,  &c.  ?  •  ^      \^ 


I 


JM' 


140 


PRIMARY  GEOGRAPHY. 


LESSON  G9. 
SOUTHERN    AFRICA,   &c. 


1.  SouTiiKRX  Africa  inchulos  nearly  all  that  part  of  Africa 
which  lies  south  of  the  Tropic  of  Capricorn.  Tiie  inhahit- 
ants  arc  partly  of  white  and  partly  of  dark  comi)lcxion. 


llnttentuts  building  Iluta,  and  loading  an  Oi  wiili  llwir  Utenail*. 


2.  Thia  region  comprises  the  countries  inhabited  by  the  Hottentots  and  the 
Boshuanaa,  with  Caffraria  and  the  Capo  Colony.  The  last  was  onco  a  Dutch, 
but  is  now  a  British  Colony. 

3.  Cape  Town,  the  cnp.^al,  is  the  largest  town  in  Africa  inhabited  by  Euro- 
peans.    It  is  often  vi.sited  by  vessels  going  to  and  from  the  East  Indies. 

4.  Eastern  Africa  contains  Mozambique,  Zanguebar,  and 
Berbera,  with  several  other  countries. 


Questions.  — 1.  What  docs  Southern  Africa  include?  2.  What  does 
this  region  comprise?  3.  Which  is  the  largest  town  in  Africa  inhabited 
by  Europeans?    4.    What  does   Eastern  Africa  contain?    5.   By  whom  is 


B< 

ar 

ol 
a  I 

tai 

CO 

m 

U 
th 

Ni 

M 
hu 

Fi 

th 

foi 

JI 

Ni 
S. 
Ui 
II 

Isl 
go 


1 


SOUDAN  — AFRICAN  ISLANDS. 


141 


rt  of  Africa 
'lie  iuhabit- 
)lcxion. 

fa 


tntotd  and  the 
DDco  a  Dutch, 

)itcd  by  Euro- 
Indies. 

;uebar,  and 


I.  What  does 

rica  inhabited 

By  whom  is 


B.  M()zanibi(|iu'  in  gnvernod  by  the  Fortuj^iiOHo,  and  Zanffii('))ar  ]>y  the  ArabH. 
]krbi)ra  i.i  inhabited  by  the  Soiiiaulics,  an  inihiNtridUH  and  active  race.  They 
are  almost  bhick,  but  are  different  tVoni  the  negrooH. 

G.  Soudan  is  a  forlilo  mid  popiiluurt  rofj,ioii,  In  the  ct'iitrt- 
of  A  fricii.  Tho  priiu'ii)al  kingdoms  are  UuiubaiTa,  Iloiia.sa, 
and  lioniou. 

7.  Tlie  iuiiabilants  of  Houssa  are  called  Fellutas.  They  arc  tlie  most  impor- 
tiiut  iPO()[ile  in  this  quarter,  and  have  conquered  several  <it'  the  npij:hb<)uring 
counlrics.     Sneeatmi,  Tinibuctiio,  and  Sego,  are  the  eliiif  cities  of  Soudan. 

On  the  map  you  will  liiul  that  a  lunnber  of  i.sluuus  lie  ou  both  sides  of  Africa : 
bomo  of  these  are  fertile  and  well  settled. 

8.  The  Azores  are  noted  for  orangfs  ;  IMiideirn,  fir  wine ;  and  the  Capo  Vordc 
T.'^lands,  for  salt.  These  all  belong  to  Tortugul.  The  Canary  f.'^lands  are  under 
the  dominion  of  Spain:  they  are  famous  for  wine  and  Canary-birds. 

D.  St.  Helena  belongs  to  Great  Britain.  .^lero  tho  emperor  of  the  French, 
Napoleon  Bonaparte,  resided  as  a  prisoner  for  six  years. 

10.  3Iadiigas(  i  r,  (he  largest  of  the  African  islands,  is  fruitful  and  populous. 
Miiny  of  the  iiihabitai'.t.x,  .some  years  ago,  embraced  the  Christian  faith.  They 
have  been,  of  late,  greatly  persecuted. 

11.  Bourbon  Island  belongs  to  tho  French,  and  Mauritius  or  the  Isle  of 
France  to  the  British :  they  both  produce  much  colTec  and  sugar.  The  Scy- 
chclle  and  Almirantc  Islands  also  belong  to  Great  Britain. 

12.  The  Comoro  Islands  are  governed  by  their  own  chiefs.  Zanzibar  is  noted 
for  sugar.     Socotra  produces  a  drug  called  Aloes. 


Jlozambique  governed?  —  Zanguebar?  G.  What,  and  where  is  Soudan?  — 
Name  the  principal  kingdoms.  7.  What  are  the  inhabitants  of  Ilou.s-sa  e.'dled  ? 
S.  What  are  the  Azores  noted  for?  —  Madeira?  —  Cape  Verde  Islands?  — 
Tinder  what  dominiim  are  the  Canary  Islands?  1).  To  what  power  does  St. 
Ilelona  belong? — Who  resided  there  as  a  prisoner?  10.  What  is  Madagascar? 
—  What  did  many  of  the  inhabitants  embrace?  11.  To  whom  does  Bourbon 
Island  Iwlong?  —  Tho  Isle  of  France?  12.  By  whom  arc  tho  Comoro  Islands 
governed  ?  —  What  is  Zanzibar  noted  for  ?  —  What  docs  Socotra  produce  ? 


No.    13.  — MAP    OP   AFRICA. 


lo        :io         jii         III  <i  Ki        '.111 


III         .'ill        till 


I  >     I       '     I  ■  .'  ■    L, 

/ 

M.iilviffl-^ii'^ 


ti-:".'    "'  I '  ".  r\' ^'^'x 


/Ml    ^^         ^ 
■li-rnrinlfiii 


Klonflihiilf  Jo*^  fl-oni  "'     fu'nytkn 


31  41  61  111  11  SI  01  im  U1  Il7  131  141 


(Uii) 


II 

is  ( 

Til 
lit'i 

iiil 

Sr 

Af 

n. 

1 

.S'ni 

.S7. 

1 
ro 
lire 


arc 

] 
rov 
iuh 

] 
we' 
cm 


tojtt        \ 


Sra\ 


7\Tiifan\ 


,W„, 


"'■,' 


(14i>) 


MAP  OF  AFRICA. 


T-KSSOX  70. 


143 


No.  in  Ih  ft  Map  (if  Afrit  u.  Tlii.«<  ilivisiun  of  (ho  Kii^forn  ('ontiiicnt  is  homidi.!, 
.  n  \\w  Nortli,  by  tlio  iM<'<lif<rriiiH'mi  Sch;  ciiht,  Jiy  Un'  lt<'»l  Sou,  iiiid  the  Iiidiiiii 
OiTiiu;  wi'.Mt,  liy  ilic  Atlaiiii(t  (dfiiii. 

I'niiit  nut  tho  JI/(  (ii'/ernmr Hn  Sva  —  Rnl  Sea  —  Indian  Ocean  —  Jllandr 
(kran. 

Point  out  tlic  Ureal  Desert —  Desert  of  {'hallnhengah  Tlic  (Jrciit  IV,-<urt 
is  tlirc<'  tli(Uis!iii(i  iiiilcs  idiig,  imd  a  tliouHuiid  wide.  Femm —  Tnal  —  .'lijdaxs 
—  Bilmali, mill  '/'lAcv^/y, tiro  tiio  largest  oiwoH,  or  fori ilc  spotx.iri  tiioOroal  IXsort. 
TIh!  four  l.wt  pro  rojirosoiitod,  on  the  Map,  by  the  lettcTH  T.,  A.,  B.,  T.  Tuut 
lioH  to  tliu  woHtwanl  of  Fozzan. 

Point  out  tho  Tuaricks,  and  Tihloos.  Thoi^o  uro  the  princiiml  tribo8  that 
inhabit  tiio  (Jroat  Dosort. 

Point  out  Itarhnry — Effypl  —  JS'uhin  —  M\issinhi —  Dor  fur —  Smidan  — 
SmefTfimliid  —  (luinen  —  FJhiopiu  —  Cnpc  Colomj  —  VaJJ'rarm  —  Mmamoique 
[Mn-z(tm-heek]  — Zanguebar —  Ikrbera.  Thow  uit'  tho  principal  oountr.cs  iu 
Africa. 

Point  out  Liberia — Sierra  Lenne  —  Jishnnlec  —  Dahnmcy — Biafra  — 
Loavgo —  Cr^iijo  —  .liignla —  lieiiffuelu. 

Point  out  tlio  River  Xi/e  —  J\'iifer  U.  —  Cntiiro  It. —  Caniiza  R.  —  Orange 
R- —  Ziimheze  R. —  Seneirnl  R.  —  Lake  Tchad —  L.  Maruri. 

Point  out  tho  Alla^  Mountains  —  Kong  M". —  Mountains  of  the  Moon  — 
Snow  M". — Lvpala  M". 

I'oint  out  th(!  ^Imre  Islands — Madeira  /.  —  Canary  /'. —  Cape.  Verde  /■<.— 
.S7.  Helena — .flnnnhnn.     Tiiosc  island.-*  are  sitnafcd  in  tiic  Atluntio  Oooan. 

Point  out  Madanasrar — llonrhon  I. — Maariliiis  or  Is/e  of  France —  Conio- 

TO  I\ — Zanzibar Ibnirante  I    —Seych  lie  l\[Sy-shel]—Socotra.    These 

aro  .situi.tod  in  fho  Indian  (>(c;,b. 

Pi'int  out  tho  Isthmus  of  %tmt — Strait  of  Gibraltar — Strait  of  Babclmandel 
--  t'hanncl  of  Moiambif/m'. 

I'oint  out  Cairo  —  Mm^co  —Algiers —  Tunis —  Tripoli.  The  four  last 
are  tiie  capitals  of  HtttttiN  nJiaJ;  have  the  same  name. 

I'oint  out  J\'ew  Dem^ohi — Khar  loom — Gondar — Timlmcloo — Sego — Mon- 
rovia—  St.  Salvador — Cape  Town.  The  last  i.s  f.'ic  largo.st  city  iu  Africa 
inhabited  by  Christimns. 

Point  out  the  Cvifc  if  Good  Hope — C.  JIgulhas  —  C  Guardafui  [Gar-daf- 
we']  —  Cape  Verde  f\w  three  bust  are,  respectively,  the  most  'southern,  cast- 
trn,  and  wcHtorn  jipes  of  Africa. 


4*> 


144 


PRIMARY  GEOGRAPHY. 


LESSON  71. 
HISTORY    OF    AFRICA. 

1.  Afuic.v  is  the  least  ci\'ilizcd  o£  the  great  divisions  of  the  earth.  The  chief 
part  of  it.s  inhabitants  are  ignorant  of  book.s  and  learning,  and  destitute  of  tru(i 
religion.  ' 

2.  This  quarter  of  the  world  k  supposed  to  have  been  fii-st  peopled  by  the 
de.secudant,s  of  Ham,  the  son  of  Noah.  About  three  thousand  seven  hundred 
years  ago,  they  founded  the  kingdom  of  Ethiopia.  This  state  existed  for  many 
ages,  and  is  spoken  of  in  the  Bible. 

;3.  Ancient  ]5gypt  wiw,  for  a  long  period,  the  most  renowned  country  in  the 
world,  for  knowledge  and  science.  From  the  account  given  of  it  by  Moses,  in 
the  Scriptures,  it  appears  to  have  been,  in  his  time,  a  well-regulated  and  flourish- 
ing kingdom. 

4.  The  Bible  informs  ua  of  various  circumstances  which  took  place  in  Egypt ; 
particularly  of  Joseph  and  his  brethren,  and  of  Moses,  who  was  hidden  among 
the  bulrushes,  by  the  side  of  the  river  Nile.  It  is  about  three  thousand  thre.; 
hundred  years  since  Moses  lived. 


DeBlructioii  of  Plmranh  anil  his  Army. 


,  Questions.  —  1.  What  is  Africa  ?  —What  are  the  greater  part  of  its  inhabit- 
ant:,? 2.  AVho  is  supposed  to  have  first  peopled  this  quarter? — What  kingdom 
was  founded  by  them  ?  8.  What  wtis  ancient  Egypt?  4.  What  does  the  Bible 
inform  us  took  place  in  Egj'pt  ?  —  Uow  many  years  is  it  since  Bloses  lived  ? 


iMAu       I  i  I 


earth.  The  chief 
I  destitute  of  true 

st  peopled  by  the 
id  seven  hundred 
existed  for  many 

3d  country  in  the 
f  it  by  Moses,  in 
ated  and  flourish- 

i  place  in  Egypt ; 
iis  hidden  among 
;e  thousand  three 


3@^ 


art  of  its  inhabit- 
— What  kingdom 
it  docs  the  Jjible 
se  iloses  lived? 


HISTORY  OF  AFRICA. 


145 


5.  The  account  of  the  departure  of  the  Israelites  from  Egy])t,  their  passage 
through  the  lied  Sea,  and  the  destruction  of  Pharaoh  and  his  ai-my  by  its  wat<!rs, 
aie  aloO  mentionc^d  in  the  Scriptures. 

0.  (^arthago,  before  the  time  of  our  Saviour,  rose,  by  its  commerce,  to  great 
\vealth  and  power.  It  carried  on  several  wars  against  the  Romans,  which,  in 
history,  are  calK'd  Punic  wars.  The  city  of  Carthage  wy  ■  destroyed  by  the 
lUmians,  and-  has  never  been  rebuilt. 

7.  Besides  Carthage,  Egypt,  and  other  parts  of  No'thcrn  Africa,  were  long 
in  the  possession  of  tiic  llonians.  These  countries  were  afterwards  conquered 
by  tlie  Goths  and  Vandals,  and  also  by  the  Saracens. 

8.  In  later  times,  the  floors,  Algerines,  and  Tripf)litang,  became  notoriou.s 
pirate_3,  and  were  long  dreaded  by  the  neighbouring  Christian  nations.  Their 
power  is  now  decayed,  and  they  are  no  longer  formidable. 


u«i  iS^tSS&f 


■^'■>,>V  ,V^^■ 


Mmm 


...  w^W^ciiSS*''' 


Battle  of  Algiers. 

9.  Algiers,  a  noted  piratical  stfitc,  was  conquered  by  the  French  in  the  year 
1830,  when  ten  millions  of  dollars  in  money,  many  ship.=,  and  a  large  supply  of 
cannon,  were  captured. 

5.  Of  what  else  have  we  an  account?  6.  What  did  Carthage  rise  to?-— 
Who  destroyed  Carthago?  7.  AVIiat  countries  were  long  in  the  pos.session 
of  the  lloiiiatis  ?  —  By  whom  were  they  afterwards  conquered  ?  8.  What 
did  the  Moors,  &c.,  become?  —  What  is  said  of  their  power?  -fl.  Who 
conquered  Algiers  ?  —  In  what  year  ?  —  What  was  captured  ?     10.  How  long 


ffj 


1$ 


*». 


146 


PRIMARY  GEOGRAPHY. 


10.  Africa,  foi  more  than  three  hundred  years  past,  has  furnished  slaves  to 
the  people  of  various  parts  of  the  earth  Millions  of  those  unluippy  beings  have 
been  can-ied  away  from  their  country  and  ""-iends,  and  doomed  to  laborious  .ser- 
vitude in  foreign  lands. 

V2.  Several  of  the  inland  parts  of  Africa  liavc  been  visited  by  JMungo  Park, 
'Japtain  Clapperton,  the  brothere  Landers,  and  others. 

12.  These  travellers  have  given  to  the  world  some  account  of  tlic  inhabitants, 
and  productions;  still,  our  knowledge  of  Africa  is  imperfect,  and  chiefly  con- 
tined  to  the  countries  on  the  sea  coafita. 


ci 
I 
ti 

b 
C 


t.  Ih 


»).  f 


Ui 


LESSON  72. 

OCEANICA. 

1.  OcEANicA  is  a  very  extensive  region.  It  comprises  the 
greater  part  of  the  Pacific  Ocean,  with  the  numerous  islands 
that  are  scattered  over  its  surftice.  Malaysia,  Australasia, 
and  Polynesia,  are  the  chief  divisions. 

2.  A  few  of  these  islands  are  large  and  populous :  others  are  small,  and  have 
no  inhabitants.  Some  of  them  contam  lofty  mountains  and  numerous  volcanoes. 
The  latter  often  cause  dreadful  ravages. 

3.  MALAYSIA  includes  the  islands  of  Borneo,  Sumatra, 
Java,  the  Philippine,  and  Molucca,  or  Spice  Islands.  These 
produce  sugar,  coffee,  rice,  pepper,  cloves,  and  nutmegs. 
Gold  and  diamonds  abound  in  Borneo. 


has  Africa  furnished  slaves, &c.  ?— AVhat  have  they  been  doomed  to?  11.  Who 
have  visited  several  of  the  inland  parts  of  Africa  ?  12.  What  have  these  travel- 
lers given  some  account  of?— What  is  our  knowledge  chiefly  confined  to? 

QuESTio.NS.  — 1.  What  does  Oceanica  comprise  ?  — Which  are  its  chief 
divisions  ?  2.  What  are  a  few  of  those  islands  ?  —  What  do  some  of  them 
contain  ?    3.  What  does  Malaysia  include  ?  —  What  do  these  islands  produce  ? 


tr 
ir 

G 

o 
d 

t] 

n( 
ai 
L 

4. 
G. 

Wi 


«r^9klcttaMMi«M^■i• 


ished  slaves  to 

py  boings  have 

laborious  ncr- 

T  JIungo  Park, 

he  inhabitants, 
nd  chiefly  con- 


(npriscs  the 
ous  islands 
Lustralasia, 

mall,  and  have 
rous  volcanoes. 

,  Sumatra, 
ds.  These 
i   nutmegs. 


to?  11.  Who 
re  these  travel- 
ined  to  ? 

are  its  chief 
some  of  them 
mds  produce? 


AUSTRALASIA.  147 

4.  Batavia,  in  Java,  and  Manilla,  in  the  Philippine  Islands,  are  the  chief 
cities.  Java,  tlie  Spice  Islands,  and  parts  of  Sumatra  and  Borneo,  belong  to  the 
Dutch.  The  Philippine  Islands  are  held  by  the  Spaniards.  Manilla,  the  capi- 
tal of  the  latter,  is  a  largo  city,  and  haa  an  extensive  comniorce. 

5.  The  inhabitants  of  Malaysia  and  Polynesia,  are  cliiefly  of  the  JL'lay,  or 
brown  variety.  Some  are  of  a  dark,  and  some  of  a  light  I^rown  con,plexion. 
Others  are  almost  white. 


•   Tapir. 


liabyroussa  ilog. 


G.  The  elc-pnant,  tiger,  rhinoceros,  and  Malay  tapir,  abound  in  Borneo,  Sumi^ 
tra,  and  Java.  T'ae  Babyroussa  hog  is  found  in  Ji'va,  and  the  ourang-outang 
in  Borneo. 

7.  Australasia  comprises  the  islands  of  Australia,  New 
Guinea,  New  Zealand,  Van  Diemen's  Land,  and  many 
others.  Australia  is  the  largest  island  in  tlie  world.  It  is 
divided  into  the  districts  of  New  South  Wales,  North  Aus- 
tralia, South  Australia,  and  West  Au.stralia. 

8.  The  native  inhabitants  of  Australasia  are  principally  Papuan,  or  Oriental 
negroes.  TJey  arc  of  a  sooty-black  complexion,  with  woolly  hair,  large  mouths, 
and  flat  noses.  The  I'Inglish  inhabit  the  colonies  in  Australia,  A'au  Diemen's 
Land,  and  New  Zealand. 

4.  Which  are  its  chief  cities  ?  5.  Of  what  variety  chiefly  arc  the  inhabitants  ? 
0.  What  animals  abound  in  Borneo,  &c.  ? — Wlicre  is  the  !?;ibyroussa  hog  found  ? 
—  The  ourang-outang?  7.  What  does  Australasia  comprise ?  —  What  arc  the 
western  and  eastern  parts  of  Australia  called  ?     8.  What  are  the  natives  of  Aus- 


148 


PRIMARY  GEOGRAPHY. 


9.  'J  Kangaroo  is  the  largest  animal  found  in  Australia.  It  docs  not  run, 
but  juiiips,  fii'ty  or  .'<i.\ty  feet  at  a  bound.  The  Emeu  is  a  bird  of  the  ostrich  -ipe- 
eies.  It  in  covered  with  hair,  instead  of  featheis.  The  Platypus  ha.s  a  duck's 
bill;  is  covcnid  with  hairj  and  lays  eggs. 


Kangaroo. 


Platypus. 


KmcM. 


10.  TiiK  Briti.sii  Colony  op  Botany  Bay  was  estiiblished  in  New  South 
Waie,'^,  in  the  year  17^7.  Those  persons  who  have  been  convicted  of  stealing, 
and  other  crimes,  in  I'jngland,  arc  sent  there,  and  are  kept  at  hard  labour. 
They  arc  called  convicts. 

11.  Van  Diejien's  Land  is  also  a  convict  colony.  In  the  Swan  Kivcr  and 
^orth  and  South  Australian  colonies,  none  but  individuals  of  good  character  are 
allowed  to  settle.  Sydney,  in  New  South  Wales,  Ilobarton,  in  A'an  Dienien's 
Land,  Adelaide,  in  South  Australia,  and  I'crth,  in  West  Australia,  are  the  chief 
iowns. 

12.  The  L'^lands  of  New  Zealand  have  been  incorporated  into  the  British 
Empire.  Many  Engli.sh  emigrants  have  settled  in  them.  The  native  inhabitimts 
arc  an  active  and  warlike  race  of  savages.  The  missionaries  have  converted 
many  of  these  people,  and  established  schools  amongst  them. 


t.ralia  principally  ?  9.  Which  is  the  largest  animal?  10.  In  what  year  was 
iJotauy  Bay  colony  establi.died ?  —  Who  .are  sent  there?  11.  What  is  Van 
Dienien's  Land  ?  —  Where  is  it  that  individuals  of  good  character  only  are 
allowed  to  settle  ?  —  ^V'hich  are  the  chief  towns  ?  12.  Into  what  have  the 
islands  of  New  Zealand  been  incorporated  ?  —  What  are  the  native  inhabitants  ? 
— What  have  the  missionaries  done  ? 


s 


til 

Li 

nr 
bi 
m 


docs  not  run, 

Lo  ostrich  spc- 

has  u  duck's 


KmcM. 

in  Now  South 

d  of  stealing, 

hard  hibour. 

van  Kivcr  and 
1  character  are 
ran  Dienion's 
.,  are  the  chief 

nto  the  British 
ivc  inhabitiints 
lave  converted 


vhat  year  was 
What  is  Van 
icter  only  are 
A-hat  have  the 
e  iuhabitanth  ? 


POLYNESIA  149 

LESSON  73. 
!■  O  L  y  X  K  S  I A . 

1,  PoLYXKSiA  is  till'  liiracst  division  of  Oecanioa.  It 
includes  a  groat  umnber  of  small  islands.  The  Sandwich, 
Society,  Friendly.  Caroline,  and  Ladronc  islands,  are  the 
j,rinci[)al. 

"2.  Th(;  lKV;i(i-fViiit,  C'K'O.i-nut,  jiLnitaiu,  and  taro-root,  furiii.-Ii  llie  |K'oplc  with 
tiio  cliii't'  pai-t  (if  their  t'liDil.  ()!'  tlu;  hark  nf  ilio  iia})L'r-nuilbeny  tlu^y  make  a 
Liiiil  of  clothing,  in  which  they  dre.is  them.selve'*. 

;i.  The  inhabitants  of  Polynesia  are  called  South  Sea  Islanders.  They 
are,  iu  general,  frii  ndly  and  good-natured  to  tiiose  who  visit  them.  On  a  num- 
bi'r  of  the  islands,  however,  tlie  people  are  still  very  savage  and  cruel  iu  thc'.r 
manners. 


Mission  iry  prcurhiiis  to  iln.'  Soulli  Sea  tslaiKlurs. 


QcKSTloxs.  —1.  What  is  Polynesia  ? — What  islands  does  it  include?  — 
Which  are  the  principal  islands;'  2.  AVhat  turni.sh  tiie  people  with,  the  eliief 
part  of  their  food?     '<j.  AVhat  are  the  iuhabitants  of  Polynesia  called?  —  What 


A 


« 


150 


PRIMARY  GEOORATHV. 


'>i,u     1 


'V 


•1.  Siinic  eat  the  flewli  of  llio  jirisoncrs  tliey  tuko  in  tli  ir  wurs:  mdiuo  destroy 
many  of  iliuir  fi'inali'  iliildrcu,  and  i)ut  to  duuth  muidjors  of  tlu'ir  fidlow-beings 
as  SiU-rifiiT:,         ic  idols  tlicy  worsliip. 

5.  Til  I'is.siouavics,  both  Amcricun  iuid  Eii<>li.><li,  uitliiii 
the  l:i>t  twenty  years,  have  ellectecl  great  changes  among 
the  South  Sea  Ishmders. 

(i.  The  jii'ojili'  of  tin;  Saiidwiili,  Society,  Austral,  Cook's,  and  sonic  otlier 
idaiids,  now  ju'ofess  tlie  Cliristian  religion.  Tiuy  liave  been  tau^lit  in  read  and 
write  with  facilitj,  and  to  eonchiet  themselves  with  nuieh  deeeney  and  projirietv. 

7.  Honolulu,  on  one  of  tlic  Kandwich  islands,  is  tlie  largest  town  in  l'olyiie.>ia. 
It  contains  about  five  thousand  inhabitants',  of  whom  abnnt  one*hnndred  an; 
Anicrieans  and  Kni.dish,  who  are  eliielly  merchants.  Hooks  and  ncwsiiajierij  are 
now  printed  in  these  islands. 

8.  The  Ladrone  and  Caroline  islands  belimu;  to  Siiain.  The  peojile  of  the 
Caroline  Islands  are  very  .skilful  in  navigation.  Tlie  Ijadrone  Fslauds  are  in- 
habited mostly  by  Spaniards. 


Prince  Le  hin  leaving  his  native  Island. 


lire  they  in  general?  4.  What  do  ,soino  oat?  —  'Whoni  do  they  put  to  death  ? 
;").  What  have  the  missionaries  efiected?  0.  What  do  the  people  of  the  Sand- 
wich Islands,  \e.,  profo.ss?  —  Wh.it  have  they  been  tannht?  7.  AVhich  is 
the  largest  tov  u  in  l'o!yne?iiv  ?     8    To  what  po'.ver  A>  the  lAudroPO  and  Caro- 


liBaNis^^SKi^ua^ 


HI  lino  destroy 
■  t'tlliiw-lioings 

isli,  Avitliiii 


gt's  among 


il  Hoinc  other 
lit  to  roiiil  ainl 
iiiul  proiirietv. 
I  in  l'olyiK'>i:i. 
■  *liiniilii'(l  nr{\ 
u-w.-iiujH'rij  iirc 

peojilo  of  tlio 
.-^liiiRls  arc  in- 


put to  death? 

)  of  the  Sand- 

7.  Which  is 

i?"3  and  Caro- 


rOLYNESIA. 


151 


9.  On  one  of  tiie  Pelow  i.shiiidfl,  ninny  years  ago,  an  English  vessel  was  wroeked, 
and  the  mariners  wore  kindly  treated  liy  the  inhahitants  On  the  departun;  oi 
the  English,  the  king  of  the  islan'l  sent  his  son,  I'rinee  Le  IJoo,  with  them,  lo 
he  ediieated  in  I'lngland.  lie  died,  however,  in  a  short  time  after  his  arrival  ii. 
that  coHutry. 

10.  Ocoanica  is  the  latest  dlscovored  division  of  tlio  oartli. 
It  ivmiiined  nnknuwn  until  tlio  I'urtugULSO  Logan  to  oxiiloiv 
its  v.cstorn  oroups  and  isliinds  a  short  time  after  the  discovery 
(if  America  by  CoUimbus. 

11.  The  first  voyage  njund  the  world  was  made  l>y  ^lagellan,  a  \,ivigat(ir  in 
(lie  service  of  the  king  of  Portugal,  in  the  years  ITilO,  15:^0,  iid  1521.  He 
is,  in  eonse(|uence,  ealled  the  lirst  eireumnavigator. 

12.  liy  this  voyage  it  was  proved  that  America  is  separated  from  Asia.  The 
great  extent  of  the  Tacifie  Ocean  was  also  ascertained.  Since  that  time,  many 
i^pani.sh,  Dutch,  French,  tind  English  navigators,  have  explored  various  parts  of 
this  region. 

li).  Captain  James  Cook,  an  ]']nglishman,  was  a  distinguished  navigator.  H(> 
made  more  discoveries,  and  told  more  ahout  the  peojjle,  and  the  different  thing.s 
that  gi'ow  in  tlic  islands  of  Occaniea,  than  any  other  individual. 

14.  Captiiin  Cook  was  killed  in  the  year  177!»,  by  the  natives  of  Owhyhec. 
or  Hawaii,  one  of  the  Sandwich  islands,  in  attempting  to  recover  a  boat  which 
they  huJ  stolen  from  hJui. 

If).  All  parts  of  Occaniea  arc  now  better  known;  and  many  American  whale 
^hips,  as  Avcll  as  those  of  other  nations,  often  sail  among  the  islands  of  Occaniea, 
and  trade  with  the  natives. 


line  islands  belong?  0.  Who  was  sent  to  bo  educated  in  England?  10.  AVhat 
if:  Occaniea?  —  When  did  the  Portuguese  begin  to  explore  the  western  part  of 
this  region?  11.  When  did  Magellan  begin  his  first  voyage  round  the  world? 
12.  What  was  proved  by  this  voyage  ?  —  What  has  been  done  since  that  time? 
1  ;>.  Who  was  a  distinguished  navigator  ?  —  What  did  he  do  ?  14. '  When  wns 
Captain  Cook  killed?     1.5.  What  is  said  of  Oceanica? 


V 

1 


1. 


•r^^/'ry  ■.;*:i^.*»-^- 


152 


PRIMARY  GEOGRAIMIY. 
No.   14.  — MAP   OF  OCEANICA. 


MfmasM  m^ 


Kid     iii>      i;.'ii 


l-ir)         I  |(>         |.,.l         I...:         r;u         |:il        ITil         I'ill         1  ."  11"         '"'         !-'>         "" 


7.011.  Juti; 


Ai.NA^_  ^^/r^f]   rUi 

^        C'ailm,  /J'-J  '•    •'  I        .•V.l.in.b.W 


o 


,\r*'iii[M-ul'_Jv»  L 

P/-»'  I  1  I  S;iiurMlili."'i.. 

•  •  y  r     »—  —  ui-uui, 

'     .;    iiltuiil;       t  I,, 


'.  ■;     !  ■•'('.uiilirii  >*,Is.  i"        I  1      /I,'  ._     .     , 


f.nri  Fiir/i 


I  /.nnr/i/jif/r  Jlv.rf  fn\rrf  IVtu'iJ/if/f'^n. 


\;-,       i;;)      111".      1  .:i      I'l      r;ti      i!:i       v.:i      iiva      n:i        ivi       i:i       ii:i       .v.i        4:i       ;i:i 


LKi^SON  74. 

No.  11  is  .1  ^Miip  of  Occiinica.  Near  two-tliinis  of  this  part  of  tlio  caitli  bi'lonrr 
to  the  Wcstorn  Ilomispho.o,  ami  tho  rest  to  thu  ]']asteni.  It  i.s  tho  larjrc'^t  (Hvi- 
sion  of  the  {ilobo,  and  ciiininii-cs  ahont  a  third  part  of  its  surface.  Only  tlie  ono- 
fiftconth  part,  however,  of  Oieanica,  i<  laud  ;  the  rost  is  wator. 

Oeeaniea  is  situated  on  both  sides  of  the  Kquator,  and  nearly  midway  lietween 
the  North  and  South  Toles.     America  lies  to  (he  cast,  and  Asia  to  the  west. 

Point  out,  on  the  Map,  Mnla!i.<in.  Tliis  is  the  smallest  division  of  Oeeaniea; 
but  it  contains  the  chief  jiart  of  tho  population.  ^Malaysia  is  named  after  the 
]Jalays,  who  form  a  large  proportion  of  tho  inhabitants. 


Il^u      lltl 

""■ 

> 

■Ki 

C<T 

1: 

M 



■-•0 

V 

\ 

r<^ 

-] 

III 

i|iiai'"i-  ^k 

Ir'i 

■sas 

B"i 

■Ca, 

1J;M-  .if  1 
»  icuio  % 

Jt; 

•>>.r,^ 

1 

30 

n 

\^ 

■10 

I 

c 

•.^ 

MAm^» 

J 

:.o 

4:1       ;i:t        1 

cnrtli  bi'loni^ 
'  hir^'nat  (livi- 
Dnl}-  the  0110- 

Iway  lictweeu 
I  the  west, 
of  Oi'cnnica; 
ucd  after  tho 


MAP  OK  OCKANICA. 


15 


Point  out  linnu-n —  Siimnlra  —  Jdiui.  Tluso  arc  the  hirgowt  iMhuuIs  in  Ma- 
laysia. They  are  callcil  thi-  Siiiult  l^h'S.  Tlie  Dutch  posHOHs  tho  wLohs  of  Java, 
jiiid  also  pulls  .if  Uiirni'ii  ami  .'Sumatra. 

I'oii!*  out  I  111'  Phllijtpini'  hlnnda — Cclthrs  —  Spicfl  lnhiwh  —  Timor.  The 
I'liilippint'  i.-!.iiiils  liLloug  to  l^jjain.  The  Spice,  also  called  the  .Molucca  Islandn, 
lieloiifi;  to  the  Uiitch. 

I'oiiit  out  Mitnilla —  Ihitnviit.  These  are  the  priiicipal  cities  in  ^Malaysia. 
Manilla  is  sitietted  on  Lu/nn  Island,  the  !ar;.'est  of  thi!  I'liilippincs. 

I'oint  (Hit  .Imlrahixiii.  This  division  contains  the  chief  jiart  of  the  land  cnr- 
face  of  Oceanic:!.  The  land  is  aliout  eipial  in  extent  to  Kurope,  Init  the  popula- 
tion is  very  sim.iM. 

i'oint  out  , iiislraliit —  J'nn  />(V;;/c«'.s'  Jjonil  —  ..Yrii'  Xidhiiul  —  JVorfi)!/:  I. 

—  A'iii'  (iitinrd  —  .\' //•  Inhiii'l  —  .V(  »'  llr/iridis  —  .VV/e  ('uliiliiiiiu. 
Australia  is  the  largest  i.-iandon  the  jrlolie,    ]t  was  foinnrly  called  New  Hol- 
land, and  cotiipri.ses  four  divisions,  viz.:  New  South  \V'ales,  iSortli  Australia. 
South  Australia,  and  West  Australia. 

The  whole  of  the  iidN'diitauts  of  \'an  |)ieiiien's  Laial  and  Norfolk  Ts];md,  are 
of  ■white  complexion,  and  speak  the  Knirlish  lan;:uage.  I'art  of  the  inhabitant*! 
of  New  South  AVales,  and  a  few  in  New  /''.dand   are  also  i'aij:lish. 

I'uint  out  Si/ihwy  —  Adelaide — Pcrlh  —  ^ilbany — I[i)barlon.  The  two 
fiivst  are  the  chief  towns  in  Australa.sia. 

I'oint  out  Pohjnrsia.  It  consists  entirely  of  islands,  and  is  the  lar;iest  division 
of  ()ieain<-a.  It  contains,  however,  a  nuuh  less  extent  of  laud,  and  a  snuiller 
nuinher  of  inhabitants,  than  Malaysia  or  Australasia. 

I'oint  out  th(!  Sandiric/i  Inlands — Socirfy  I\  —  IlervnCs  p.  —  Austral  P. 

—  Pilctiirii'fi  f.  The  people  of  all  these  islands  |ii'ofess  the  (Mirisliaii  religion. 
I'itcairii's  J.sland  is  inhabited  by  the  <leseendants  of  the  mutineers  of  the  English 
siiip  ]5ounty.     They  speak  the  Jviglish  language. 

i'oint  out  the  Pearl  Islands  —  Navigalor''s  I'. —  Fr'undhi  /'.  Some  of  tho 
inhabitants  of  these  islands  have  been  converted  to  Christiaiiit}'. 

I'oint  out  the  Ladnme  Islands — Caroline  p. — Pilc.w  P. — Mulgrave  P. — 
Central  Jlrcliipclai^o — Jlmcrica  P.  — Madison''s  I.  The  Ladrone  Islands  belong 
t*i  the  Spaniariis. 

I'oint  out  the  JVashin^lon  P. —  Marquesas  P.  —  Easter  I. — Magellan's 
Jlrchipelago  — Jlnso7i's  Jlrchipelago.  The  t^^•o  last  are  the  most  uorthcni  islands 
of  Oceaniea. 

Through  what  islands  does  the  eipuitor  pa.ss?  —  Which  is  tho  largest  island 
of  Oceaniea?  —  Which  is  the  most  eastern  island  ?  —  The  most  western? 

Through  what  large  island  does  the  Tropic  of  t'apiicorn  p!u«s? 

Through  what  Archipelago  docs  the  Tropic  of  Cancer  pass  ? 


^ 


t 

•,1 


164 


riUMARV  (JliOURAI'lIV. 


^i■>' 


I   I 


J.KSSOX  75. 


PROGRESS    Ol'    HOCIETV. 


TllK  inannir  in  wliicli  tlio  vurimis  races  iif  iiii'ii  live,  tlic  wny  in  wliicii  llicy 
nre  gdvoniud,  sniil  llu'  rt'ligiuii  tiicy  jirotV.sM,  arc ciruuni.Htaiict'H of  gn  at  iinpurtaiKo. 
These  exercise  a  iKuvcrful  infiiu'iu-c  (in  tlio  condition  and  luipjiiness  of  uutions, 
and  arc  wortliy  of  bilng  uiidii>tood  I'J'  ihoso  who  i<tudy  (iuogi'Mjihy. 

1.  Mankind  lu'cnnif  improved  hy  jrradual  .'^tcps.  In  their 
|)roj're>'s  IVoni  the  hjwer  to  the  hi.^her  stiijies  of  soelety.  nations 
may  he  idassed  into  t^avage.  harbiinnis,  half'-eivilized.  eivili/ed, 
and  enli'j;htene(h 

2.  Savages  are  tliose  wlio  reside  in  ca\<>s.  or  niiseral»h> 
huts,  and  live  on  the  llesh  of  the  wiUl  nniniulH  they  kill  in 
the  chase. 


Havugo  life.  —  IriiliaiiH  ImiUiiiR  X\k  liiifiiilo. 


QiTESTioNS.  — 1.  What  is  said  of  mankind? — How  may  nations  be  chussod? 
2.  Who   are    savages  If     o.  What   is  said  of  this   class.:'     4.   What  nations 


aMgrtllea" nil II  if'ii'  ii'i  i  m » iinMnii 


J 


PIlOrjRKSS  OF  SOCIRTY. 


II  wliicli  tlioy 
t  iiii{)(irt:in(.'i\ 

»H  of  IJUtioilM, 

J-' 

111  their 
ty,  nations 
,  c'ivili/cil, 

mi  sera)  »U; 
icy  kill  in 


iH  be  clussoJ '! 
tVliut  nutiiii.j 


15' 


:{.  Tlii.t  olnsM  of  inuiikiiiil  Imvo  but  littlo  clofhiiig,  uiiil  many  of  thcin  j^o  ((iiito 
imki'd.  Tlii'v  lire  ij^iiDniiit  of  roiuliii^  and  writing,  iind  iirc  revengeful  in  ilispo- 
sitiiin.  Sav.igc  tribis-  iirc  nciirly  nhvays  at  war  with  ono  unotlicr.  Sonic  wivuguH 
(li'voiir  the  ciu'iiiics  tlicy  kill  in  battle. 

1.  A  consiilerable  part  of  the  Indians  of  both  North  and  South  Ainuriea,  tlio 
natives  of  Austnilia,  New  Guinea,  and  other  paj-ts  of  the  earth,  arc  savages. 

-).  ]?arI)iir<)UH  nations  uro  rather  more  improved  than 
those  that  are  saviiiLrc.  Like  them,  however,  they  are 
Dttvn  tit  war  with  one  anotlier,  and  make  .slaves  oi"  their 
prisoners. 

«'».  Some  barbarous  nations  live  in  tents,  and  others  in  small,  rude  hut/j. 
'^ome  have  many  horses  and  cattle,  and  others  possess  numerous  eainels,  on  thu 
milk  and  flesh  of  which  they  subsist. 


BorlMiruug  Life  — Arab  Encampment. 


7.  Many  of  these  nations  cultivat«  the  ground  to  a  limited  extent.     Ti.oy 
make  coarse  clothing,  and  practise  a  few  simple  arte.     TIk;  Arabs  of  the  Desert, 


aro  savages?     f).  What  are   barbarous  nations?     0.  In  what  do  some  bar- 
I'.'irous  nations  live?     7.  What  do  many  of  these  nations  cultivate,  make,  and 


J 


,1 


I'  I 


■IP 


166  nuMAKV  (;r.()(iiiAi'iiv. 

the  'Wiindirlii;;  TiiitarH,  CulTrt.s,  and  viuioius  otliiT  Africiin  imtioiis,  live  in  a 
barliiiroiiH  iiiuiiiicr. 

8.  Tlio  liiill'-civili/.ed  races  arc  the  Turks,  IV'rsiiins,  Moors, 
Hindoos,  ('hiiu'sc,  liinniins,  uiiil  .Iiipiuiose. 

!).  Tlicsi'  ]i('n|)l(!  reside  ill  cilie.'^  find  tnwTis.  Tliey  eiiltiviile  tiie  carlli,  and 
(•:irry  on  cn'tain  inaiiufactiircH  with  ii  (•uiisideralilo  (iei;rii'  of  .skill.  They  an;  !ii>t 
itlk-rly  dostituto  of  learning,  but  urc  ignorant  of  true  religion,  and  trout  their 
women  lus  Hlavos. 

10,  Tlio  mo.'st  itn])r()vo(l  rnocs  oftnon  nro  the  clviltzod  and 
(Milightcncd.  'I'lusc  ull  profess  (lie  Cliristiiiu  veli{i,ioii,  and 
are  ol'  white  <'om[)U'.\ion. 

11  They  art!  niiiuli  Mni>t'rior,  in  leaniing  and  the  arts,  to  the  other  races. 
They  practise  the  art  of  jtrinting,  and  carry  on  agi-ieulture,  nianufuetun'M,  and 
eomniorcc,  to  a  great  extent. 

1*2.  Tim  i)rineipal  civilized  nations  are  the  AuHtrians,  IlussianH,  Hpaniard-s, 
Portuguese,  and  the  people  of  South  America.  Tliougii  these  nationH  powNes.>t 
many  advantages  over  those  that  are  less  improved,  yet  among  them  the  great 
body  of  tlu^  [H'ople  are  but  imix-rfectly  educated. 

IJJ.  The  principiil  enlightened  niitioiis  are  the  United  Stales,  Great  IJritain, 
France,  Holland,  Iklgium,  Switzerland,  and  Prussia. 

14.  Tn  these  states,  colleges  and  schools  are  numerous,  and  a  large  portion  of 
the  people  are  taught  Ut  read  and  writ<!.  IJibK'  and  missionary  societies  abound. 
The  female  sex  is  honoured  and  respected.  All  pemons  may  worship  (iod  in 
the  way  they  believe  to  be  agreeable  to  his  will. 


practise?  —  What  nations  live  in  iv  barbarous  manner?  8.  Which  are  the 
half-ei\ili'/,ed  races?  !•.  Tn  what  do  these;  nations  reside?  —  What  do  they 
cultivale,  and  carry  on?  —  What  is  said  of  their  leiu-ning,  religion,  Sie.'/  1(». 
Which  .".re  the  most  improved  races  of  men  ?  11.  In  what  are  they  much  supe- 
rior? 1-.  Which  are  the  principal  civilized  nations? — In  what  state  are  the 
great  })0(ly  of  the  people;?  1.'!.  Which  are  the  priiici[>al  eidightencd  iiatiotis? 
14.  What  are  numerous? — AVhat  abound? — What  is  honoured  and  rcsiwcted? 
— Wh.it  may  all  persons  do? 


'fV.-, 


OOVKRNMKNT, 


107 


D.s,  live  iu  a 
tlH,  Moors, 

lin  onrlli,  aiul 
Tlicy  an;  not 
(1  treut  thuir 

ili/.cd  and 
igioii,  and 

I  other  raccH. 
itiictiiroH,  and 

iH,  SpuriiarcL*, 

itidHH    pOHNUSrt 

cm  tho  great 

Ircat  ISritoin, 

go  portion  of 
idticH  iili<)uiii). 
Drship  G(k1  iu 


liieli  iiro  tho 
hilt  do  tlicy 
m,  &<!.?  10. 
'y  much  sup<'- 
stati!  arc  (ho 
incd  nations? 
id  reaiH.'cted? 


r^KSSON  7ti. 
(io  \  KRN  MENT. 

1.  GovF.itXMENT  is  tlio  power  by  which  tht;  hiws  of  a  coun- 
try arc  niiulc  and  administered.  \\y  the  o[)eration  of  this 
power,  wlieu  wisely  direcited,  tlie  ^rood  and  virtuous  are 
prote(;tcd,  and  the  wiidvcd  punishe(h 

2.  A  I'rei!  and  ijfood  iioverntutMit  tends  to  make  a  nation 
in(histrious,  prosperous,  and  hap[)y.  Tuder  a  despotic;  and 
})ad  government,  the  people  become  indolent,  degraded,  and 
miserable. 

o.  There  arc  two  general  forms  of  government  in  the 
world.  Monarchy  and  Democracy. 


Dirmaii  Nnlilcs  proiitraiiiig  tliPinsplvoH  h<'ri>ri'  thi'ir  f^dvori'ign. 


QiiKSTiONs.  —  1.  What  Ih  government? — What  is  ;  roault  of  the 
opontion  of  tliis  power,  wlicn  wisely  directeil?  2.  To  c  ^  liooa  a  good 
gov<  innient  tend? — Under  ii  bad  goveniniont,  what  will  tlio  f)eoplo  bo- 
conie  ?     ii.    What  are  the  two  general  forma  of  governuient  in  the  world '{ 


K' 


1 


158 


PRIMARY  GEOGRAPHY. 


4,  The  people,  under  a  Monarchy,  are  governed  by  an 
Emperor,  or  King.  lie  generally  remains  in  that  station  as 
long  as  he  lives,  whether  he  be  a  good  or  a  bad  man. 

.5.  In  some  countries  tlve  sovereigns  arc  so  deh'potic  and  tyrannical,  that, 
their  subjects,  even  of  the  highest  rank,  must  bow  their  faces  to  the  enrtli,  and 
ercep  on  their  hands  and  knees,  when  they  come  near  the  throne  where  the 
king  is  sitting. 

G.  Under  a  Democracy,  or  Republican  government,  the 
laws  are  administered  by  a  Pi'esident,  who  is  elected  by  the 
people  for  a  certain  number  of  years. 

7.  If  the  president  does  not  act  wisely,  he  need  not  be  elected  a  second  time ; 
but  another  person  may  be  chosen  iu  his  place.  In  the  United  States,  none  of 
the  presidents  have  filled  that  office  more  than  eight  years. 


President  of  the  United  Staves  receiving  liis  Friends. 


4.  What  are  the  people  under  a  monarchy  governed  by?  5.  In  some 
countries,  what  mu.st  people,  even  of  the  liighest  rank,  do?  6.  Under  a 
democracy,  who  arc  the  laws  administered  by?  7.  If  the  president  does 
not  act  wisely,  what  may  be  done  ?     8.  What  do  the  citizens  of  republican 


GOVERNMENT. 


159 


•lied  by  an 

it  station  as 

nan. 

:yriinnical,  that 

the  enrtli,  and 

•one  where  the 

I'lnnent,  the 
cted  by  the 

a  second  time ; 
States,  none  of 


'      5.    In   sonic 

I?     6.  Under  a 

president  does 

IS  of  republican 


8.  The  citizens  of  republican  governments  enjoy  a  greater  share  of  frecdoiu 
than  the  subjects  of  monarchies.  In  this  country,  when  any  of  the  people  wish 
to  see  the  president,  they  can  visit  him  as  if  he  were  a  private  gentleman.  Em- 
perors and  kings  are  often  guarded  by  soldiers ;  and  no  one  is  allowed  to  go  near 
them,  except  with  great  form  and  ceremony. 

9.  The  United  States  is  the  most  powerful  republican  nation  in  the  world. 
Mexico,  Guatimala,  all  the  Spanish  South  American  States,  and  Switzerland, 
are  likewise  republics.  In  none  of  these  States,  however,  are  the  people  so  free 
and  happy  as  in  our  own  country. 

10.  Great  Britain,  Belgium,  Holland,  and  some  other  kingdoms,  are  limitetl 
monarchies.  In  those  countries,  the  power  of  the  sovereigns  is  limited,  and  no 
one  can  be  punished  except  by  due  process  of  law. 

11.  In  Persia,  Burmah,  Siam,  and  China,  the  sovereigns  are  absolute,  and  have 
entire  control  over  the  property  and  lives  of  their  people. 

12.  Emperors  and  Kings  are  often  indifferent  to  the  welfare  of  their  subjects. 
Some  few,  however,  have  endeavoured  to  govern  wisely,  and  to  promote  the  pros- 
perity and  happiness  of  their  people. 

13.  Alfred  the  Great,  king  of  England,  and  Peter  the  Great,  emperor  of  Rus- 
sia, are  among  those  sovereigns  who  are  entitled  to  the  respect  of  posterity.  Al- 
fred enacted  just  laws,  encouraged  learning,  and  was  one  of  the  wisest  and  best 
princes  that  ever  lived. 

14.  Peter  improved  the  condition  of  his  country,  and  travelled  through  various 
parts  of  Europe,  that  he  might  acquire  knowledge  useful  to  his  people.  In  order 
to  know  how  to  build  ships,  he  worked  in  disguise,  as  a  ship-carpenter,  in  Eng- 
land and  Holland. 

governments  enjoy  ?  —  In  this  country,  how  may  a  person  visit  the  president  ? 
—  What  are  emperors  and  kings  often  guarded  by?  9.  What  is  the  United 
States? — What  countries  arc  also  republics  ?  10.  What  nations  are  limited 
monarchies?  11.  In  what  countries  are  the  sovereigns  absolute?  12.  To  what 
are  emperors  and  kings  often  indifferent?  13.  What  sovereigns  are  entitled  to 
the  respect  of  posterity  ?  —  What  did  Alfred  do  ?    14.  What  did  Peter  do  ? 


j 

'.J 


160 


PRIMARY  GEOGRAPHY. 


LESSON  77. 

RELIGION. 

1.  Keligion  is  that  worship  and  homage  which  all  men  owe 
to  God,  as  their  Creator  and  Preserver.  Religion  is  of  two 
kinds,  True  and  False. 

2.  True  religion  consists  in  worshipping  God  in  the  manner  taught  in  the  Holy 
Scriptures.  False  religion  consists  in  worshipping  idols,  or  images,  representing 
men,  beasts,  birds,  or  other  things. 

3.  The  Pagan,  Christian,  Mahomedan,  and  Jewish,  are  the 
forms  of  religion  most  prevalent  in  the  world. 

4.  Some  Pagan  nations  worship  idols,  or  images.  Some  worship  fire.  Some 
udore  the  sun  and  moou.  Others  consider  certain  rivers,  mountains,  and  cities 
to  be  holy.  The  principal  Pagan,  or  heathen  nations,  are  the  Chinese,  Hindoos, 
Birmans,  Siamese  and  Japanese. 


SioMh  Sua  IslnndorB  prvparing  Sacrifices  to  their  Idols. 


Questions.-  1.  What  is  religion ?  2.  In  what  does  true  religion  consist? 
—  False  I'cligion?  3.  What  forms  of  religion  are  the  most  prevalent?  4. 
What  do  some  Pagan   nations  worship?  —  Which   are  the   principal  Pagan 


ill  men  owe 
1  is  of  two 

;lit  in  the  Holy 
s,  representing 

ish,  are  the 

lip  fire.  Some 
ains,  and  cities 
uese,  Hindoos, 


bi 


jligion  consist? 
prevalent?  4. 
rincipal  Pagan 


RELIGION. 


IGL 


5.  In  some  of  the  South  Sea  Islands,  men  and  women,  as  well  as  animals,  aw 
sacrificed  to  idols.  In  Ashantec,  and  Dahomey,  human  sacrifices  are  offered  at 
the  graves  of  the  princes  and  chief  men. 

G.  Christians  include  all  those  who  believe  in  Christ,  the 
Saviour  of  sinners.  They  comprise  three  great  classes,  Cath- 
olics, Greeks,  and  Protestants. 

7.  Christ  came  to  redeem  mankind  from  sin  and  misery.  He  taught  them  to 
worship  God,  in  spirit  and  in  truth.  He  instructed  them  in  the  practice  of  faitli, 
meekness,  and  temperance ;  and  was  constantly  employed  in  doing  good. 


Clirj»t  healing  the  Sick. 

8.  Our  Sa\'iour  performed  many  astonishing  miracles.  He  raised  the  dead, 
cured  the  sick  and  the  lame,  and  gave  sight  to  the  blind. 

9.  The  French,  Spaniards,  Italians,  and  many  of  the  Germans,  are  Catholics. 
The  Russians  and  Greeks  belong  to  the  Greek  church.  The  people  of  the  United 
States,  Great  Britain,  Holland,  Hanover,  and  Pru-ssia,  arc,  for  the  most  part, 
Protestants. 


nations?  5.  What  is  done  in  some  of  the  South  Sea  Islands?  —  In  Ashantec, 
&c.  ?  6.  What  do  Christians  inclr.de?  —  What  do  they  comprise  ?  7.  What 
did  Christ  come  to  do?  8.  What  did  our  Saviour  perform  ?  9.  What  nations 
pre  Catholics  r— V/ho  belong  to  the  Greek  church?— What  nations  are,  for  tho 


h 


I 

fa' 
11. 

I 


i 


102 


PRIMARY  GEOGRAPHY. 


10.  Tlic  Christian  nat'o  s  arc  the  most  enlightened  and  powerful  in  the  world, 
riieir  inhabitants  are  the  only  people  that  enjoy  the  blcrvings  of  free  government, 
•>nd  regard  women  as  :  .tionai  beings. 

11.  The  3Iahomedar:-  are  those  who  believe  in  the  doctrine  of  the  false  pro- 
phet, Mahomed.  The  Turks,  Moors,  Arabs,  Persians,  and  some  of  the  Tartars, 
^irofess  this  faith.  No  Mahomedan  people  has  ever  attained  a  high  degree  of 
improvement  in  science,  art,  or  learning :  the  most  advanced  at  the  present  day 
is  decidedly  inferior  in  that  respect  to  the  least  improved  of  the  Christian  nations. 


Mnlioinedans,  in  the  Temple,  at  Mecca,  kiSBing  the  sacred  Stone. 


12.  Mahomedans  are  required  to  pray  five  times  a  day;  to  abstain  from  food 
:it  certain  periods ;  and  to  perform  a  pilgrimage  to  Jlecea,  in  Arabia,  the  birth- 
place of  the  prophet.  In  the  temple,  at  Mecca,  there  ia  a  black  stone,  considered 
.sacred,  which  every  pilgrim  must  touch  and  kiss  seven  times. 

13.  The  Jews  are  the  descendants  of  the  ancient  people  of  God,  of  whom 
we  read  in  the  Bible.  They  despised  and  rejected  Christ,  and  put  him  to  a  pain- 
ful death.  The  Jews  still  adhere  to  their  original  faith,  and  do  not  believe  in 
the  Saviour  of  mankind. 


most  part,  Protestants ?  10.  What  are  the  Christian  nations?  11.  Who  are 
3Iahoincdans ? — Which  are  the  principal  Mahomedan  nations?  12.  What  are 
Mthomedans  required  to  do ?  I'o.  Who  are  the  Jews?  —  What  did  they  do? 
—  What  is  Eaid  of  the  Jews  ? 


rTlUpTilli 


1  in  the  world. 
e  government, 

the  false  pro- 
jf  the  Tartars, 
igh  degree  of 
le  present  day 
istian  nations. 


tain  from  food 
ibia,  the  birth- 
ane,  considered 

God,  of  whom 
;  him  to  a  pain- 
not  believe  in 


11.  Who  are 

12.  What  are 

it  did  they  do  ? 


ASTRONOMY. 


LESSON  78. 


1g:: 


ASTRONOMY. 

II A  VINO,  at  length,  studied  so  much  of  the  Geography  of  the  eartli  as  is  con- 
ttiiuod  in  this  little  book,  it  wil'  not  be  ami-s  for  tlie  Scholar  to  luaru  somcthiu;: 
about  the  sun,  moon,  and  stars. 

A  knowledge  of  these  things  may  be  ac(iuirod  by  studying  Astronomy.  It  i,- 
a  most  important  branch  of  learning,  and  has  excited  the  attention  of  mankiud 
from  the  earliest  ages. 

1.  Astronomy  is  a  divscription  of  the  heavens.  The  heavens  consist  of  th- 
blue  sky,  or  firmament,  that  we  see  above  us.  The  earth  is  sm-rounded,  oi; 
every  side,  by  the  heavens. 

2.  In  the  sky  we  see  the  sun,  moon,  and  stars.  The  sun  gives  us  light  b\ 
day,  and  the  moon  and  stars  serve  the  same  purpose  by  niglit. 

3.  These  bodies  seem  to  be  all  the  time  in  motion;  tliat  i.s,  they  appear  to  h 
sometimes  in  one  place  and  sometimes  m  another.  In  the  morning,  tlio  sui, 
rises  ia  the  east;  at  noon,  he  is  directly  over  o-ir  heads;  and,  in  the  evening, 
he  sets  in  the  west. 

4.  The  moon  and  stars  also  rise  in  the  east,  and  st*.  in  the  west.  The  moon. 
I)eside3  cons^ntly  changing  her  place  in  the  heavens,  exhibits  a  difference  of 
appearance  at  different  times.  Though  the  stars  appear  nearly  alike,  they  arc 
of  different  magnitudes,  and  of  different  degrees  of  brightness. 

5.  The  sun,  moou,  and  stars,  ar  j  called  the  heavenly,  or  celestial  bodies. 
Most  of  them  seem  to  be  mere  specks  iu  the  sky.  They  are,  however,  verv 
large,  and  are  believed  to  lo  great  worlds,  like  our  own. 

6.  The  immense  distances  at  which  the  celestial  bodies  are  placed  from  u;-. 
is  the  reason  why  they  appear  so  small.  If  it  were  possible  for  us  to  go  ne  ir 
them,  we  should,  no  doubt,  find  that  they  contain  land  and  water,  and  are  fifed 
for  the  habitation  of  rational  and  intelligent  beings. 

Questions.— 1.  Wlmt  is  astronomy  ?_ Of  what  do  the  heavens  consist^  2  What 
.10  we  see  in  the  sky? —  What  gives  light  by  day?  — What  hy  night?  3.  What  d.. 
nese  bodies  seem  to  be?  4.  What  do  they  do?- What  does  the  moon  exhibit  ? - 
\\  hat  IS  sa:d  of  the  stars?  5.  What  are  the  sun,  moon,  and  stars,  called  ?  -  Wlmt  ar,- 
they  believed  to  be?     6.  Why  do  the  celestial  bodies  appear  so  small?     7.  What  ar.; 


, 


■'(»» 


ijt 


104  rulMARY  GEOGRAPHY. 

7.  The  niagirituiloi^,  moti,.ns,  ilistunec:*,  periods,  nnd  order,  :H*  iii.  I-.-avcnly 
ImkHch,  arc  tlKTrrin.  ipiil  Hulj^rts  tluit  form  the  Hcience  nf  Astronomy. 

K.  The  niagDitudo  of  a  heavenly  body  h  its  me.  The  moti<.?i  means  the  way 
in  >vhieh  it  inove.s  or  revolve-,  The  peri.Kl-  signify  tin;  ^mcc  of  time  that  is 
oecupied  hy  the  heavenly  hovli.s  in  pcriurpiing  their  y<>arly  and  daily  revolu- 
timis.  The  order  of  the  plauet.^  i.^  their  ^y  •t..in  of  arrangement  in  a  regular 
.joincs,  ofl  first,  second,  &e. 

0.  Tlio  celo.stial  bodies  may  ].>e  divided,  according  »>  thc^ir  nature,  into  lumi- 
nous nnd  opaque  [o-ji,ike'], 

10.  Liu.niuous,  or  rhining  bodies,  aro  such  as  give  light  of  themselves,  u:^! 
<nn  hi  .1  iiruunous  body.  Opariuc,  or  dark  bodies  arc;  .^uch  a.-  (''o  not  t'ive  light 
..f  then.H.-Ive".  Thoy  can  b.j  seen  only  by  light  from  some  luminous  body 
■mining  on  tboji).    The  earth  in  an  opaque  body. 


Lr:SSON  79. 
SOLAR   SYSTEM. 

1.  The  e;u-th  is  situated  in  that  part  of  the  univer.<c  called  ihc  Solar  Sy.stem. 
■l'h:..>  .'*y.-;tem,  or  order,  consists  of  the  sun,  moon,  planet.s,  and  comets.  It  is 
nailed  solar,  from  the  sun.     What  belongs  to  the  sun,  is  termed  solar. 

2.  The  sun  is  the  centre  of  the  Solar  System.  It  gives  light  to  the  world, 
:ind  is  the  source  of  heat.  It  causes  the  earth  to  bring  forth  grass;  the  herb 
to  yield  seed;  and  the  fruit-tree  to  yield  fruit  after  its  kind. 

:3.  If  the  sun  were  taken  away,  we  should  have  no  light,  except  the  faint 
glimmering  of  the  stars.     There  would  be  no  day.     The  ground  would  bo  all 

the  principal  subjects  thnt  form  the  science  of  astronomy  ?  8.  What  is  the  magnitiute 
,,r  a  heavenly  bo<ly  ?— What  does  the  motion  meani  — What  do  the  periods  signify  ?— 
What  is  the  order  of  the  planets  ?  9.  How  may  the  celestial  bo.lies  be  divided  ?  10. 
What  are  luminous,  or  shining  bodies?— What  are  opaque,  or  dark  bodies?— How  can 

'  QuBSTioss  —Where  is  the  earth  situated  ?— What  does  this  system  consist  ofl  — 
From  what'is  it  called  solar  ?  2.  What  is  the  sun?  — What  does  it  cause  the  earth  to 
bring   forth  1     3.  What  would   be   the  consequence,  if  the  sun  were   taken  away.' 


ihi:  ]ya.\cniy 
ray. 

neans  tiio  wcs} 

Hnio  that  is 

.1  daily  revolu- 

in  a  regular 

arc,  into  lumi- 

lenioclves .  U;  ■; 
not  five  light 
unnnou3  body 


!  Solar  System. 

comets.     It  is 

solar. 

it  to  the  world, 

jrass;  the  herb 

except  the  faint 
nd  would  bo  all 

is  the  magnitude 
eriods  signify  ? — 
be  divided  ?  10. 
dies  ? — How  can 

em  consist  of?  — 
■avise  tlie  earth  to 
ire   taken  away* 


ASTRONOMY. 


105 


the  time  covered  with  ice  and  snow.     No  plant  or  tree  would  flourish.     iMun- 
kind  would  pcrlsli  fur  want  of  food. 

4.  But  God  lias  placed  the  sun  in  the  heavens  to  give  light  and  heat,  not 
only  to  this  wurld  hut  also  to  a  number  of  other  worlds.  In  the  bcginninf  lli' 
caused  the  light  to  nhiuo  out,  of  darkue.s.s,  and  said,  "Let  there  be  light;  and 
there  was  light." 

5.  In  f(ini)cr  times,  it  wa.",  suppo.scd  that  the  sun  was  a  great  ball  of  fire. 
Many  learned  men,  however,  are  of  opinion  that  it  is  a  world  like  our  own,  con- 
taining continents,  oceans,  mountjiins,  and  plains. 

6.  It  is  suiiposed  that  the  rays  of  light  which  illumine  the  Solar  System,  pro- 
ceed from  an  atmospliere,  or  air,  of  a  peculiar  nature,  that  surrounds  the  sun. 
The  rays  of  the  sun  are  called  solar  rays. 

7.  When  mingled  with  the  atmospiicrc  on  the  surface  of  the  globe,  it  is 
thought  that  these  rays  produce  the  warmth  and  animation  which  render  tlu; 
t.arth  habitable. 

8.  This  appears  probable,  from  the  fact  that  the  summits  of  high  mountains 
are  always  covered  with  ice  and  snow,  while  at  their  base,  and  in  the  valleys,  the 
iieat  is  oppressive.  If  heat  proceeded  from  the  i  un,  as  from  a  body  of  hre,  the 
higher  we  ascend  from  the  surface  of  the  earth,  the  greater  the  heat  would  become. 

9.  The  sun  is  an  immense  mass  of  matter.  It  is  believed  to  be,  at  least,  four- 
teen hundred  thousand  times  larger  than  our  globe.  Its  distance  from  us  is  so 
great,  that  it  would  take  a  cannou-ball,  which  moves  through  the  air  at  the  rate 
of  five  hundred  miles  an  hour,  about  twenty-two  years  to  reach  the  sun. 

10.  The  sun  appears,  to  our  naked  sight,  to  bo  perfectly  flat  and  smooth  j  but 
from  the  dark  moving  spots  frequently  seen  on  its  surface,  it  is  rendered  almost 
certain  that  it  is  a  spherical  body,  and  that  it  turns  round  once  every  twenty- 
five  days. 

4.  For  what  purpose  has  God  placed  the  sun  in  the  heavens  ?  5.  Wliat  was  formerly 
thought?  —  What  is  the  opinion  of  many  learned  inon?  (5.  What  is  it  supposed  thi? 
rays  of  light  proceed  from  7  7.  What  is  it  thougiit  these  rays  produce?  8.  From  what 
fact  does  this  appear  prohahle?  —  If  heat  proceeded  from  the  sun,  as  from  a  body  of 
lire,  what  would  bo  the  ellect?  9.  What  is  the  sun? — How  large  is  it  believed  to  bn  f 
—  How  long  would  it  taku  a  cannon-ball  to  reach  the  sun?  10.  How  does  the  sun 
appear,  to  our  naUed  sight? — What  is  it  known  to  be? 


166 


PRIMARY  GEOGRAFIIY. 


h 


1% 


LESSON  80. 
OF  THE   MOON. 

1.  Next  to  the  sun,  the  moon  is  apparontly  the  hirgost  ohjcct  thtit  wc 
Bcc  in  the  sky.  It  is  the  nearest  to  tlie  eiirth  of  all  the  iieavenly  hodie.s.  Though 
the  moon  appears  almost  as  large  as  the  sun,  it  is  many  million  times  smaller. 

2.  The  moon  is  an  oparpuv,  or  dark  body,  and,  like  the  other  planets,  has  ni-> 
light  of  ita  own :  it  shines  ])y  light  that  it  reecives  from  the  sun.  Though  less 
splendid  than  that  luminary,  the  moon  is  a  highly  interesting  and  heautiful 

object. 

8.  The  moon  goe.s  round  the  earth,  from  west  to  cast,  once  in  twenty-nine 
and  a  half  days.     It  has  always  the  same  side,  or  face,  turned  towards  us. 

4.  Nearly  all  the  heavenly  bodies  present  the  same  appearance;  but  the 
moon  is  constantly  changing.  Sometimes  it  is  not  seen  at  all ;  sometimes  only 
a  small  edge  is  bright ;  sometimes  one  half;  and,  at  other  times,  the  whole  sur- 
face is  luminous,  or  shining. 

5.  These  different  forms  are  called  the  phases,  or  changes,  of  the  moon.  They 
are  the  new,  the  half,  the  gibbous,  the  full,  and  the  old  moon.  The  cngiaving 
will  show  how  the  phases  appear. 

Gilihous.  Half.  Old. 


New. 


Half. 


Gibbons. 


Full. 


wgmmm^ 


0.  At  the  change  of  the  moon,  that  bixly  is  dark,  and  we  see  nothing  of  it; 


QUESTIONS. ~1.  Next  to  tlie  fiin,  which  is  the  largest  object  we  see  in  the  sky? 
■'.  What  is  the  moon?  — What  docs  it  sliine  by^  3.  How  does  tiie  moon  go  rouml 
the  enrth  ?— WhiU  lias  it  always  •?  4.  Wliat  do  nearly  all  t\ie  heavenly  bodies  present  '. 
—  What  is  said  of  the  moon?  5.  What  are  these  chni.^es  called i  — What  are  they? 
>■>.  How  does  the  new  moon  appear  ?  —  How  are  the       rns  of  the  new  moon  turned  ' 


jcct  that  wo 
ios.  Thougli 
ics  Hiniiller. 
unots,  liaa  ni^ 
Though  loss 
nd  beautiful 

tweuty-niut; 
irds  us. 
icc;  but  tho 
inetimos  only 
lie  whole  sur- 

moon.    They 
'he  cngi'aving 

Old. 


Qothing  of  it ; 

leo  in  tlie  sky  ? 
moon  go  rouml 
bodies  present  f 
VVliat  are  tliey  ? 
f  moon  turned ' 


ASTRONOMY. 


IGi 


soon  afterwards  the  new  moon  appears  in  tho  fonn  of  a  crescent,  or  sieklo  with- 
out a  handle,  in  the  western  sky,  just  above  tho  f  ,  when  he  is  setting.  The 
horns,  or  sharp  points  of  tho  new  moon,  are  turuea  to  the  left  hand. 

7.  In  three  or  four  days  more,  it  becomes  a  half  moon ;  it  then  gradually 
ii8.sunies  the  gibbous  form,  and,  in  two  weeks  from  the  '.•liange,  tho  moon  be- 
comes full.     It  has  now  completed  one  half  of  its  monthly  journey. 

8.  Tho  full  moon  is  round  and  bright,  like  tho  sun,  but  does  not  dazzle  the 
sight  to  look  at  it.  It  ri.ses  in  tho  cast,  when  the  sun  sets,  and  seta  in  the  west. 
when  ho  rises.     It  shines  all  night. 

9.  The  full  moon  rises  later  and  later  every  night,  and,  in  a  short  time,  as- 
sumes the  gibbous  form.  At  three  weeks  after  tho  first  change,  it  becomes  once- 
more  a  half  moon  j  then  cri.  jout-shapcd,  or  horned.  In  this  stiite  it  is  called 
tho  old  moon. 

10.  Tiic  new  moon  rises  in  the  evening,  and  tho  old  in  the  morning.  The 
horns  of  tho  old  moon  are  turned  towards  the  right  hand.  Finally,  at  four 
weeks  after  her  first  change,  the  bright  side  of  the  moon  is  turned  from  us,  and 
she  is  no  longer  seen,  until  the  new  moon  appears  again. 

11.  Thus  tho  moon  is  constantly  performing  her  stated  monthly  journeys 
round  tho  earth,  and  cheering  tho  inhabitant.s  with  her  mild  radiance,  while  at 
the  same  time  she  exhibits  her  wonderful  changes,  and  furnishes  one  of  the 
moat  striking  displays  of  divine  power  and  wisdom. 

12.  Prayers  and  sacrifices  were  offered  to  tho  moon  by  many  of  the  ancient 
heathen  nations,  and  some  of  the  people  of  China  now  worship  that  planet. 
The  Jews  observed  the  time  of  now  moon,  a.s  a  period  of  feasting  and  rejoicing. 
They  reckoned  time  by  tho  moon.  The  American  Indians  also  practise  the 
same  method. 

7.  In  three  or  four  days  more,  what  does  it  become?  —  What  does  it  then  gradually 
assume  ? — What  takes  place  in  two  weeks  from  the  change  ?  8.  What  is  said  of  the 
fi\ll  moon  ? — Where  does  it  rise,  &c.?  9.  When  does  the  full  moon  rise?  —  In  a  short 
time,  what  does  it  assume?  —  What  does  it  become,  in  three  weeks  after  the  flrsi 
change,  &(;.?  10.  How  are  the  horns  of  the  old  moon  turned?  —  What  takes  place  at 
four  weeks  after  the  first  change  ?  11.  What  is  tho  moon  constantly  performing?  — 
What  does  she  exhibit?  12.  What  were  offered  to  the  moon? — What  is  said  of  the 
people  of  China? — The  Jews?  —  American  Indians? 


I 


1C8 


rillMARY  GEOGRAPHY. 


II 


'n 


>:■' ;  '^- 


LESSON   81. 
PLAN  ETS. 

1.  Thkhe  iifo  two  kiutla  of  stars  to  bo  seen  in  tlic  heavens; — tbo  i)lnnet8  ami 
the  fixed  stars.  Tho  first  arc  called  moving,  or  wandering  stms,  because  they 
altvr  tlieir  positions  in  the  nlty. 

'2.  Tlie  phmots  are  opaijuo  bmlies,  and  have  no  light  of  their  o;vti,  but  sliinc 
by  reflecting  the  light  of  the  sun,  around  which  they  move,  or  revolve.  Some  of 
them  are  many  hunched  times  larger  Ihan  the  earth ;  but  others  are  of  lesiier  size. 

L'oniparnliv;)  aio)  of  the  I'lanotH, 


This  piclurc  shows  tliat  tlie  earth  is  much  smaller  than  Jupiter,  Saturn,  and 
Uranus.     Tho  planets  Vcima,  Jlars,  Mercury,  and  the  Moon,  arc  still  smaller. 

3,  The  lancts  all  appear  to  bo  spherical  bodies;  that  is,  they  are  round,  like 
a  ball,  or  au  apple.  Each  of  them,  by  tiu-ning  con-stjmtly  on  its  own  axis,  has 
a  regular  succession  of  day  and  night. 

4.  Tho  varied  appearance  which  the  surface  of  tho  planets  preseuta,  when  ex- 
amined by  powerful  telescopes,  shows  that  some  parts  arc  high,  and  some  arc 
low ;  some  are  Ijriglit,  and  others  arc  dark.  The  bright  parts  are  supposed  to 
1)6  laud,  and  tho  dark  parts  water. 

QcKSTiows.  —  1.  How  many,  and  what  kinds  of  stnrs  are  thnre  in  tlio  heavens?  — 
Wliiit  (!o  they  ff.rm  a  part  ol?  2.  What  are  the  planets?  —  How  do  they  shine?  — 
What  arc  some  of  tho  planets'/  3.  How  do  the  phinets  appear?  4.  What  nre  the 
bright  and  dark  parts  of  the  planeia  supposed  to  be  ?    5.  How  many  planets  are  there  J 


THE  PLANETS. 


IGO 


0  i)lanotH  ami 
becauHC  they 

nil,  but  shine 
vc.  Sdiiic  of 
of  lesser  hizc. 


,  Saturn,  und 
still  smallor. 
re  round,  like 
>wn  axis,  has 

uta,  when  ex- 
ind  some  arc 
I  supposed  to 


10  heavens?  — 
tlioy  shine?  — 
What  nre  the 
nets  are  there  f 


5.  The  pl.-mefs  ore  tweiity-nine  in  nuiuk«r.  They  are  dividcl  into  two 
.hissort.  The  lust  ehuis  embraces  what  are  called  primary  planets,  beeauso  they 
revolve  iiij mediately  anmnd  the  sun. 

().  The  ..(li.r  elass  comprises  the  secomlary  planets,  moons,  (.r  satellites.  Thi  y 
revolve  immediately  around  their  respective  primtu'ies,  and  go  around  the  sun  in 
eompany  willi  those  bmlies. 

7.  The  satellites  are  murli  smaller  than  the  planets  lu-ound  which  they  move. 
Tiiey  give  lijiht  to  the-.-  bodies  in  the  mw.  manner  that  the  moon  enlightens 
the  parts  of  the  earth  that  are  turned  from  the  sun.  Tito  satellites  present  the 
same  cliimges,  or  jjlmses,  that  we  see  in  the  moon. 

X.  The  primary  planets  are  thirteen  in  number.  Their  names  ore.  Mercury, 
Venus,  the  Earth,  Mars,  Vesta,  Astnna,  Juno,  Ceres,  Pallas,  Jupiter,  Saturn, 
ITnuius,  and  Lo  Verricr. 

'.K  The  secondary  planets,  or  moons,  are  nineteen  in  number.  Of  these  the 
eartli  has  one  moon,  Jupiter  four,  Saturn  eight,  and  Uranus  six. 

10.  Five  of  tho  primary  planctfl,  viz..  Mercury,  Venus,  iMars.  jupiter,  and 
Saturn,  were  known  to  the  ancients  before  tho  Christian  era.  Tho  other  eight 
iiave  b.en  di.scovered  by  modern  astronomers,  within  tho  hA  seventy  years,  ^ 

n.  Tho  planets  perform  their  revolutions  around  tho  sun  in  different  perio»ls 
of  time,  and  at  diflF.;rent  distances.  Those  planets  near  the  sun,  perform  their 
r.ivolutions  in  less  time  than  those  that  arc  farther  off,  because  they  luove  faster, 
and  have  less  distance  to  go.  The  planets  and  their  satellites  all  move  from  west 
to  east  except  the  satellites  of  Uranus,  which  revolve  in  an  opposite  direction. 


LESSON  82. 
THE   PLANETS. 
1.  Mercuiy  is  the  planet  nearest  to  the  sun.     It  is  the  most  rapid  in  its 
motion  of  any  of  the  planets,  and  is  much  smaller  than  tho  earth. 

—What  is  the  first  clnss  called  ?  0.  What  Joes  tho  other  class  comprise  ?  7.  What  nre 
the  snt  ■llites?  — How  do  they  give  light?  — What  do  the  satellites  present?  8.  How 
n.iiny  primary  planets?  — Which  are  they?  9.  How  many  secondary  planets?  10. 
Which  five  of  tho  primary  planets  were  known  to  the  ancients'?  11.  What  h  ?va  oftho 
;,laiiets  ;— Why  do  llis  planets  near  the  sua  perform  their  revolutions  m  less  ..^r  than 
those  that  are  farther  off?— How  do  the  planets,  &c.,  move?  „        ,  ,,  , 

Qdestioss.—  1.  What  is  Mercury '  —  What  is  said  of  the  motion,  &e.  'A  Mercury? 


170 


PRIMARY  GEOGRAPHY. 


2.  Vouus  is  tlio  sucimJ  planet  from  the  sun.  It  Ls  about  twice  us  t'ur  ofl'  a.*. 
Ncrcury,  ami  in  uliiKwt  the  hIzo  of  tlie  uartL.  Veiiua  iH  the  iiiont  iK'aiitit'ul  stiir 
we  »co  in  tlio  liuuveuH.  It  nppciirH  liirgor  to  lu  than  any  of  tlio  other  plunoti*, 
bceauHO  it  is  nearer. 

;t.  Tliis  betuitiful  phinot  ii*  Hcon  for  a  cnnsiJerablo  part  of  the  year  in  the 
western  sky  just  after  siuisot.  It  is  then  called  the  Evoning-Htar.  For  the  rest 
of  the  year  it  may  be  seen  in  the  cast,  hiiniediatt'ly  before  8uuri.se,  and  is  then 
called  the  Morning-Star. 

4.  The  earth  is  a  planet,  like  Mercurj',  or  Venus.  It  is  a  very  largo  b<Kly; 
yet,  it  is  believed,  if  we  could  see  it  from  the  planet  Jupiter,  which  is  placed 
about  four  hundred  millions  of  miles  from  us,  it  would  appear  like  one  of  the 
smallest  stars  in  the  sky. 

5.  The  earjh  is  the  third  planet,  in  order,  from  the  sun.  It  moves,  or  re- 
volves, from  west  to  east  round  that  luminary,  onco  a  year,  at  the  distance  of 
ninety-five  millions  of  miles. 

6.  It  revolves  in  its  orbit  at  the  rato  tu"  sixty-eight  thou.sand  miles  an  hour ; 
which  is  more  than  one  thousand  miles  in  a  minute.  Though  one  hundred  and 
tl'.irty-six  times  swifter  than  that  of  a  cannon-ball,  the  motion  of  the  earth  is  uoi 
much  more  than  half  as  fast  as  that  of  the  planet  Jlercury. 

7.  The  movement  of  the  earth  round  the  sun,  is  called  the  annual,  or  yearly 
revolution.  It  produces  a  chango  of  seasons,  and  also  the  difference  that  takes 
place  in  the  lengths  of  the  days  and  nights. 

8.  The  earth  likewise  turns,  or  revolves  on  its  axis,  from  west  to  east,  once 
every  twenty-four  hours.  This  in  called  the  daily  motion.  It  makes  the  sun, 
moon,  and  stars,  appear  to  move  from  east  to  west  over  our  heads.  In  this  way, 
also,  the  different  countries  in  the  world  have  each  their  succession  of  day  and  nigh  t . 

9.  Though  the  earth  is  impelled  at  so  swift  a  rate,  we  do  not  feci  the  motion, 
because  the  people,  and  every  thing  on  the  surface  of  the  earth,  move  with  it. 

2.  Which  is  the  second  planet  from  the  sun  7 — What  is  Venus?  3.  Whnt  is  Venus 
cnllcil,  for  a  considernblo  part  of  the  year? — What  is  it  called  the  rest  of  the  year  ?  4. 
What  is  the  earth  on  which  we  live?  — How  would  the  earth  appear,  if  we  cnuld  ai'o 
it  from  Jupiter?  5.  What  is  the  earth?  0.  At  what  rato  does  it  revolve?  7.  What  is 
the  movement  of  the  earth  round  the  sun  called  ? — Wlint  does  it  produce?  8.  Besides 
its  yearly  motion,  how  does  the  earth  also  revolve?  — What  is  this  revolution  called  ; 


TIIR  PLANETS  AND  COMETS. 


171 


'  U.S  fur  off  as 
iK'iiutiful  stiir 
ither  plunoti, 

I  year  iu  tlio 
For  tho  rest 
and  i»  then 

'  largo  b(K]y; 
liuli  is  pliicotl 
:c  one  of  tlio 

movcM,  or  ro- 
0  distance  of 


ir  we  were  triVVcUin},'  nii-idly  in  a  stoam-bont,  in  smooth  water,  the  liouses  an<l 
treeti  on  tho  Hhoro  would  appear  to  go  from  us,  while  tho  steani-boafc  would 
seem  to  stand  still. 

10.  Tlie  iiiMoii  is  a  satellite,  or  secondary  planet.  Tt  aceonipanios  tho  eartli 
in  her  journey  round  the  sun,  moving  at  tho  rate  of  twenty-thrco  hundred  miles 
every  hour.  The  diameter  of  tho  moon  is  abAtit  twenty-two  hundred  miles; 
and  her  distatiee  from  the  earth  two  hundred  iuid  forty  thousand  miles. 

11.  In  till!  revolution  wliieli  the  moon  makes  round  the  earth,  it  sometimes 
iinppcns  that  it  comes  directly  between  tho  earth  and  tho  sun.  This  produces 
wliat  is  called  an  eclipse. 

I'J.  In  an  eelijisc  of  the  moon,  that  jilanet  is  darkened,  for  a  short  time,  to 
the  people  that  livo  on  tho  earth.  In  an  eclipse  of  tho  sun,  tho  latter  is  also 
darkened.  When  that  event  takes  place,  tho  moon  comes  directly  between  tho 
earth  and  the  sun. 


iles  an  hour ; 
hundrttd  and 
)  earth  is  not 

lal,  or  yearly 
10  that  takes 

to  east,  once 
kes  tho  sun, 
In  this  way, 
ay  and  night. 
I  the  motion, 
novo  with  it. 

VImt  is  Venus 
tlio  year?  4 
we  cciiiUi  SOB 
?  7.  Wliatis 
7  8.  Besides 
lutiuii  called  f 


LESSON  83. 
THE   PLANETS  AND   COMETS. 

1.  Mars  is  the  fourth  planet  from  tho  sun.  Ti  may  bo  seen  with  the  naked 
eye,  and  is  of  a  deep  red  colour.  This  planet  is  •about  one-sixth  tho  am  of 
tho  earth. 

2.  Vesta,  Astra^a,  Juno,  Ceres,  and  Pallaa,  arc  five  planets  that  revolve  near 
each  other,  some  distance  beyond  IMara.  They  are  called  Asteroids,  or  littlo 
stars,  and  have  all  been  discovered  since  tho  commencement  of  the  present  century. 

;i.  Jupiter  revolves  beyond  tho  Asteroids.  It  is  the  largest  of  tho  planets, 
being  fourteen  hundred  times  larger  than  tho  earth,  and  is  five  times  farther 
from  the  sun.     This  planet  is  attcuded  by  four  moons,  or  satellites. 

;>.  Why  do  wo  not  feel  the  motion  of  the  earth  1  10.  What  is  the  moon  ?— What  is  llie  dia- 
meter of  tho  moon.  &c.?  11.  What  sometimes  happens?— What  does  this  produce?  12. 
In  nn  eclipse  of  the  moon,  what  takes  plaoo  'f— In  an  eclipse  of  the  sun,  what  taltes.plaoo  f 
QcKBTioNs.  —  1.  Wliiit  is  Mars?  — How  may  it  ho  seen?  — How  will  it  compare 
^vith  tho  eartli  ?  2.  What  are  Vesta,  Aslra'n,  Juno,  Ceres,  and  Pallas  ?— ^What  are  they 
called  ?     3.  What  is  said  of  Jupiter  ?  —  What  is  this  planet  attended  by  1     4.  What  is 


0 


172 


PRIMARY  GEOGRAPHY. 


4.  Jupiter  is  the  largest  star  we  sec  in  the  heavens,  except  Venus.  It  is  of 
a  deep  yellow  colour.  Through  a  telescope,  the  body  of  this  planet  appears  to 
be  striped,  or  banded,  with  light  and  dark  streaks. 

5.  Saturn  is  one  of  the  largest  of  the  planets.  It  is  a  thousand  times  larger 
than  the  earth,  and  is  nine  times  farther  from  the  sun.  Saturn  is  attended  by 
eight  satellites,  and  is  surrounded  by  two  immense  ring,?,  which  arc  entirely 
detached  from  the  body  of  the  planet. 

6.  Uranus  is  ninety  times  larger  than  the  earth.  It  lias  six  moons,  and  the 
orbit  in  which  it  revolves  is  nineteen  times  farther  from  the  sun  than  that  of  the 
earth.  Le  Verrier  is  a  new  planet,  discovered  in  1846.  It  is  about  the  size  of 
Uranus,  but  its  orbit  is  almost  twice  as  far  from  the  sun. 

7.  The  sky,  when  viewed  through  telescopes  that  enlarge  objects  five  hun- 
dred or  a  thousand  times  beyond  their  apparent  size,  presents  a  much  more 
splendid  sight  than  when  observed  with  the  naked  eye.     The  aspect  of  the 
heavens,  as  seen  from  some  of  the  planets,  is  doubtless  grand  and  imposing  be 
j'ond  any  thing  of  which  we  have  a  conception. 

8.  The  rings  of  Saturn  must  appear,  after  dark,  to  the  inhabitants  of  that 

Appearance,  at  niglit,  of  the  Rings  ami  Satellites  of  Saturn,  to  the  Inhabitants  of  that  Flanet. 


Jupiter  ?— How  does  this  planet  appear,  when  viewed  through  a  telescope  ?  5.  What 
is  Saturn  ?  —  By  what  is  Saturn  attended,  &c.  ?  6.  What  is  said  of  Uranus  ? — Of  Le 
Verrier  ?  7.  What  does  the  sky  present,  when  viewed  through  telescopes,  &c.  7 — What 
is  the  probable  aspect  of  the  heavens,  as  seen  from  some  of  the  planets?  8.  How 
must  the  rings  of  Saturn  appear,  after  dark,  to  the  inhabitants  of  that  planet?     9.  What 


T 


THE  PLANETS  AND  COMETS. 


173 


nus.  It  is  of 
net  appears  to 

d  times  larger 
is  attended  by 
li  are  entirely 

icons,  and  the 
an  that  of  the 
)ut  the  size  of 

ects  five  hun- 
a  much  more 
aspect  of  the 
1  imposing  be 

)itants  of  that 

rtliat  Planet. 


planet,  like  vast  shining  arches  of  light,  stretching  across  the  firmament,  and 
occupying  nearly  one-fourth  of  the  visible  sky. 

9.  At  the  same  time,  the  various  aspects  of  the  seven  moons  which  revolve 
around  that  planet,  add  infinite  variety  to  its  celestial  scenery.  Of  these,  some 
are  seen  rising,  some  setting,  some  of  them  appearing  as  half  moons,  and  others 
full. 

10.  The  sublime  operations  of  Providence  displayed  throughout  that  spacious 
globe,  must,  should  it  be  peopled  by  rational  beings,  lead  them  to  look  with 
wonder  and  admiration  on  the  works  of  the  Creator,  and  prompt  them  to  render 
to  the  Divine  Architect  that  praise  which  is  so  justly  due  to  his  wisdom  and 
omnipotence. 

11.  The  Comets  are  among  the  most  remarkable  of  the  heavenly  bodies. 
They  shine  like  stars,  but  have  generally  a  tail,  or  train,  of  faint«r  light,  bear- 
ing some  resemblance  to  a  tuft  of  hair. 

12.  Some  comets  have  no  tail;  some  have  one,  two,  or  three  at  a  time  j  and 
one  has  been  seen  with  six  at  once,  spreading  out  like  an  immense  fan.  Some 
of  these  bodies  have  had  tails  of  such  vast  length  as  to  reach  over  a  great  part 
of  the  heavens.  The  tail  of  the  comet  of  1680  stretched  from  the  zenith,  that 
is,  directly  over  our  heads,  to  the  horizon,  or  edge  of  the  sky. 

1.3.  These  bodies  revolve,  like  the  planets,  round  the  sun,  but  reture  to  a  much 
gi'catcr  distance  from  it.  We  can  see  them  only  during  a  part  of  their  course, 
a.s  they  approach  the  sun.  The  comets  remain  lost  to  our  view,  during  the  im- 
mense journeys  which  they  perform,  to  the  most  distant  parts  of  the  solar  system. 

1-1.  Comets  were,  in  ar-cient  times,  a  source  of  terror  to  mankind.  Wars, 
pestilence,  or  famine,  were  expected  to  follow  their  appearance.  At  present, 
howcA'er,  they  excite  but  little  apprehension.  None  of  them  appear  to  have 
had  any  effect  on  the  planets,  though  some  comets  have  approached  very  near 
to  those  bodies. 


)pe?  5.  What 
ranus? — Of  Le 
;s,  &c.  7— Wliat 
lets?  8.  How 
met  ?     9.  What 


adds  infinite  variety  to  it3  celestial  scenery?  10.  To  what  must  the  sublime  opera- 
tions of  Providence  lead  the  inhabitants  of  Saturn'?  11.  What  is  said  of  comets?  12. 
What  have  some  comets,  Sen.  ? — What  is  said  of  the  comet  of  1G80  ?  13.  How  do  these 
bodies  revolve? — During  what  period  can  we  see  them  '. — During  what  period  do  they 
remain  lost  to  our  view?  14.  What  were  comets,  in  ancient  times? — At  present  what 
do  they  excite? 


^  — .— '.yfyl  >=^*.!l>."    - 


174 


SOLAR  SYSTEM. 


The  Engraving  is  a  view,  or  Map,  of  tlio  Solar  System.  The  Sun  is  in  the  centre. 
The  circular  lines  are  the  tracks  or  orbits  of  the  Planets,  in  which  they  revolve,  or 
journey  round  the  Sun.  Point  out  the  Sun — Mercury — Vtnu$.  The  two  last  are  called 
interior  planets,  because  they  move  between  the  Earth  and  the  Sun.  Point  out  the 
Earth  and  the  Moon — Mars —  Vesta — Astrtsa — Jurw — Ceres — Pallas— Jupiter — Saturti— 
Uranus  ^Le  Verrier.  The  last  ten  are  called  exterior  planets,  because  they  revolve 
beyond  the  orbit  of  the  earth.  Tell  how  many  planets  there  are.  All  the  black  spots 
on  the  engraving,  except  the  comet,  represent- planets.  How  many  moons  has  die 
Earth?  How  many  has  Jupiter?  Saturn?  Uranus?  Lo  Verrier,  the  last  discovered  and 
most  remote  planet  in  the  Solar  System,  revolves  at  such  a  vast  distance  from  the  sun, 
that  the  light  and  heat  it  receives  from  the  latter  is  estimated  to  be  1300  times  less  than 
that  received  by  the  ear'h.  It  is  thirty-eight  tirjies  farther  from  the  sun  than  the  earth, 
and  a  single  revolution  round  its  orbit  occupied  164  years. 


in  the  centre, 
iiey  revolve,  or 
last  are  called 

Point  out  the 
liter — Saturn— 
a  they  revolve 
the  black  spots 
moons  has  ihe 
iiscovered  and 
5  from  the  sun, 
times  less  than 
than  the  earth, 


FIXICD  STARS. 


LESSON  84. 


175 


FIXED    STARS. 

1.  TnK  Fixed  SUirs  are  tho.so  celestial  bodice  which  reinaiu  nearly  always  iu 
the  same  position,  with  regard  to  each  other.  These  star.s  shiue  with  a  bright, 
twinkling  light :  they  appear  to  be  infinite  in  number,  and  are  placed  far  beyond 
the  limits  of  our  system. 

2.  The  distance  of  the  fixed  stars  from  the  earth  may  be  regarded  as  immea- 
surable. There  is  no  visible  alteration  in  their  magnitudes  or  situation,  whiiu 
viewed  from  opposite  sides  of  the  earth's  orbit.  That  vast  ^paec,  which  is  one 
hundred  and  ninety  millions  of  miles  in  extent,  may,  therefore,  be  regarded  a,s  a 
point,  in  comparison  with  the  distance  of  the  fixed  stars. 

3.  It  has  been  calculated  that  Sirius,  the  nearest  fixed  star,  must  be  more 
than  two  hundred  thousand  times  farther  from  the  earth  than  the  latter  is  from 
the  sun. 

'4.  Light,  which  reaches  us  in  eight  minutes  from  the  sun,  would,  it  is  .sup- 
posed, be  about  three  years  in  flying  from  Sirius  to  our  earth.  Tli<!re  are,  no 
doubt,  myriads  of  stars  at  a  much  greater  distance ;  and  perhaps  many  whose 
light  has  never  reached  our  world. 

5.  The  number  of  the  stars  is  no  less  surprising  than  their  distance.  In  a 
clear  night,  wo  may  sec  about  a  thousand  at  once,  with  the  naked  eye ;  but,  by 
looking  through  fi  telescope,  millions  may  be  seen,  in  a  very  short  time. 

6.  Some  stars,  that  seem  at  first  to  bo  single,  are  found  ti  consist  of  two, 
some  of  three,  and  some  more.  They  are  also  of  different  c  >i  <y.s,  as  yellow, 
red,  blue,  and  green.  New  stars  occasionally  app.ar,  and  is.>me  disappear. 
Others  become  brighter  and  brighter,  for  a  time,  and  then  fade  away. 


QuESTiOHS. — 1.  What  are  the  Fixed  Stars? — How  do  tliey  shine? — Where  nre  they 
placed  1  2.  How  may  the  distance  of  the  fixed  stars  from  'i-e  earth  be  rejsarded?  — 
In  what  is  there  no  visible  alterntion?  —  How  does  the  di:.i,,  ter  of  the  earth's  ocbit 
compare  witn  the  distance  of  the  fixed  stars?  3.  How  mucli  farther  is  Sirius  from  the 
enrtli,  than  from  the  sun  ?  4.  How  loni^  does  it  take  lis'at  to  reach  us  from  tlie  tun, 
and  also  from  Sirius?  5.  How  many  stars  may  we  see  with  the  naked  eye?  —  By 
looking  through  a  telescope,  what  may  be  seeo?  0.  What  do  some  stars  seem,  &c.? — 
What  is  said  of  new  stars,  &c.  ?     7.  What  are  wo  ignorant  uf !  —  What  are  the  fixed 

M 


i 


M.(«ia*,.iWw»'»*iJiU>  - 


176 


PRIMARY  GEOGRAPHY. 


I 


Ijps'lf 


7.  Wc  are  ignorant  of  the  natiuo  and  constitution  of  the  fixed  stars ;  but  as 
these  exhibit  no  changes  in  their  position,  as  regards  one  another,  they  are  sup- 
posed to  be  immense  luminaries,  like  our  sun,  surrounded  by  systems  of  planets, 
which  they  enlighten,  warm,  and  cherish. 

8.  Observation  teaches  us  that  the  planets  arc  similar,  in  many  respects,  to 
the  earth ;  we  may  therefore  conclude  that  those,  and  other  celestial  bodies,  are 
worlds  'ike  our  own,  and  peopled  with  numerous  living  beings,  adapted  by  the 
all-wise  Creator  to  the  abodes  which  they  inhabit. 

0.  The  universe  appears  to  be  infinite  in  extent,  and  far  exceeds  the  reach  of 
thought.  In  its  wonderful  operations,  we  see  the  most  perfect  order  and  sta- 
bility, and  we  may  suppose  that  the  same  laws  embrace  all  creation ;  which  thus 
forms  a  connected  and  harmonious  whole. 

In  conclusion,  we  trust  that  the  few  Lessons  that  have  been  given  on  Astro- 
nomy, will  render  the  scholars  who  use  this  little  work  desirous  of  learning  more 
about  that  wonderful  science. 

Every  one  she  aid  endeavour  to  acquire  a  knowledge  of  the  works  of  creation. 
The  mind  is  thereby  enlarged,  and  we  are  led  to  a  more  just  understanding  of 
the  power  of  God.  It  enables  us,  also,  to  coinprcL'md  more  fully  the  order  and 
perfection  displayed  in  the  structure  of  the  universe. 

Besides  the  in'.'-osting  information  to  be  gained  by  the  study  of  Astronomy, 
it  is,  no  dou'-it,  a  Christian  duty  to  contemplate  the  perfections  of  the  Deity,  as 
they  are  displayed  in  the  starry  heavens. 

We  arc  directed  in  the  Bible,  to  "  Lift  up  our  eyes  on  high,  and  consider 
Him  who  hath  created  these  orbs ;  who  bringeth  forth  their  hosts  by  number, 
and  who  guides  them,  in  all  their  motions,  by  the  greatness  of  his  strength." 


stars  supposed  to  be?  8.  What  Joes  observation  tench  us?  —  What  may  wo  therefore 
coni'liide?  9.  What  does  the  universe  appear? —  What  do  wc  see  in  its  wnudcrful 
operations? 


THE   END. 


stars ;  bat  as 
they  lire  hup- 
rus  of  planets, 

ly  respects,  to 
al  bodies,  are 
laptcd  by  the 

i  the  reach  of 
order  and  sta- 
1 ;  which  thus 

ven  on  Astro- 
learning  more 

ks  of  creation, 
lerstanding  of 
the  order  and 

rf  Astronomy, 
the  Deity,  as 

,  and  consider 
ts  by  number, 
3  strength." 

\y  we  therefore 
n  its  wonderful 


VALUABLE  SCHuOL  BOOKS, 
PUBLISHED  BY  THOMAS,  tlOWrEKTHW.ilT  k  CO.,  PJITLAD., 

And  for  sale  hj  Booksellers  generally  throughout  the  United  Slates. 

MITCHELL'S  AMERICAN  SYSTEM  OF  STANDAl?!)  SCHOOL  GEOGRAPHY, 

IN   A    SERIES: 

Adapted  to  the  Progressively  Developing  Capacities  of  Youth. 

MitcrtcII's  School  Series  has  hecn  wholly  or  partly  iutroauced  Into  tho  Public 

and  Private  Schools  of  the  principal  Cities  and 

Towns  of  the  United  States* 

MITCHELL'S  PRniARY  GEOGRAPHY.    An  easy  introduction  to  the  study  of 

Gengriipliy :  ilfsisnml  for  llic  iiislnictinii  t.f  Clnldroii  in  Si-liuiils  and  Kauiilii.'s ;  illustnitwl  by  12l)  huKravmijs  UMil  It 
col«uri-a  Maps.    Siauicl  rcvisi;il  I'diium,    hy  S.  Aii/iuslus  Milchctl.  ,.,„,.,,.,       ,,  ,..  «,      ,,  , 

This  work  has  l]i-oii  intro<iu«,i  into  tho  I'uhlic  .Schixils  of  Uoston, New^ ork,  Philndniihm,  HiiUimoro.Ncw Orleans, 
St.  l.onis,  Louisville,  fiiiriniiiiti,  Pittsburgh,  and  many  utlior  cities  and  towns  ill  the  United  Slates,  and  is  in  general  use 
HI  the  Private  .Scliouls  IhroUKliout  the  whole  country. 

MITCHELI/S  INTERMEDIATE  OR  SECONDARY  GEOGRAPHY.     The 

teit,  the  maps,  and  the  ejen.ises  on  the  maps,  printed  together,  ill  1  Tol.  tto.;  with  forty  beautifully  coloured  maps, 
and  fully  illustrated  with  uppropniile  desisns. 

MITCHELL'S  SCHOOL  GEOGRAPHY.  A  system  of  modern  Geography;  com- 
nrisinu  a  llescriiiiion  of  the  present  State  of  the  World,  and  its  tire  great  Dirisions.  Kmhelli.slii'd  with  numerous  eii- 
sravinss,  and  illustrated  by  an  Alias  of  28  maps,  drawn  and  eugrnved  for  the  work.  'I  liird  revised  edition.  By  i.  Au- 
gustits  MitcMlL 

MiXCHELL'S  ANCIENT  GEOGRAPHY.  An  Ancient,  Classicnl,  and  Sacred 
Geography ;  enibcUisheil  with  Kncravings  of  Itcmnrkablo  Events,  Views  of  Ancient  Cities,  and  various  interesting  An- 
tique Iteniains;  and  illustrated  by  an  Ancient  Atlas,    liy  S.  Augustus  Mitchell. 

MITCHELL'S  ANCIENT  ATLAS.    "With  twelve  beautifully  coloured  Maps. 

MITCHELL'S  ATLAS  OF  OUTLINE  MAPS,  an  accompaniment  lo  the  School 
Atlas     Possessing  all  the  advantages  to  be  derived  from  Map-drawing,  with  a  great  saying  of  time. 

MITCHELL'S  BIBLICAL  AND  SABBATH  SCHOOL  GEOGRAPHY.  De- 
signed  for  instruction  in  Sabbath  Schools  and  Uible  Classes,  illustrated  with  coUiUred  maps  and  wood-cut  engravings. 
By  S.  Auguslits  Milc'ieli. 

MITCHELL'S  KEY  TO  THE  STUDY  OF  MAPS,  COMPRISING  HIS 
ATIiAS;  iii  a  series  of  lessons  for  beginners,  in  Geography. 

FROST'S  UNITED  STATES.    History  of  the  United  States,  <br  the  use  of  Schools 

»nd  Academies,    liy  John  Frost.    Illustrated  with  forty  Kngrtivings. 

HISTORY  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES,  FOR  THE  USE  OF  COMMON 
SCHOOLS.  By  John  Frost,  author  of  History  of  the  United  States,  for  the  use  of  Schools 
and  Academics :  condensed  from  the  Author's  larger  History  of  the  United  States. 

FROST'S  AMERICAN  SPEAKER.  The  American  Speaker,  comprising  a  Com- 
prehcnsive  Treatise  on  Elocution,  and  nn  extensive  Selection  i..'  Specimens  of  Anie_rican  a  id  Foreign  Eloquence.  Em- 
hellished  with  engraved  Portraits  of  distinguished  American  Orators,  on  steel.  By  J.  Ir  at,  author  ol  History  of  tlie 
United  States. 

PINNOCK'S  ENGLAND.    Pinnonk's  improved  edition  of  Dr.  G.  Idamith's  History  of 

England,  from  the  Invasion  of  Julius  Ciesar  to  the  year  1K)8.    lUustrtted  with  30  Engravings  on  Wood. 

PINNOCK'S  GREECE.  Pinnork's  improved  edition  of  Dr.  Goldsinith's  History  of 
Greece ;  with  Questions  for  Exaii.ination  at  the  end  of  each  Section;  with  30  tngravings,  by  Athcrtoii. 

PINNOCK'S  ROME.  Pinnock's  improved  edition  of  Dr.  Goidsmiih'b  History  of  Rome ; 
with  Questions  for  Examination  at  the  end  of  each  Section ;  with  30  Engravings,  by  Atherton. 

(  177 ) 


i.'ifc,/,'   ,«« 


^ 


VALUABLE  SCHOOL  BOOKS. 


p 


PIN  MOCK'S  FRANCE.    History  of  France  and  Normandy,  from  the  Earliest  limes 

lu  thi^  Itevoiciti.m  ol  IBIH,  with  Quc»tion»  lor  hxaminntion  nt  Ihii  end  (if  each  Sccluiii,  liy  W,  V..  'I'iiylnr,  I.I„  D.,n( 
I  niiily  CiinfRi'.  Diililiri.  uiithor  cif  a  .Manual  of  Atidcnt  and  MiHlurn  History,  Ac.  <Vc.,  and  editor  of  I'lniiimk'*  Improved 
•  ihtiniiaot  UiililKiiiith's  Ureeoo,  liuinc,  and  llngland.  Illustrated  Willi  nuniorou.s  Kngruvines.  First  American,  from 
the  i  liird  hiiKlisli  IJdilion. 

GKUKNC'S  FIRST  LESSONS  IN  GRAMMAR.    12mo.,  half  roan. 

GREENE'S  ANALYSIS.  A  Treatise  onihe  Siruciure  of  the  Eiigli.^h  Language  ;  or 
the  Analysis  and  Classitiration  of  Montences  and  their  C^miponent  Parts ;  with  llliist.ationa  and  Kxercises  adapted  to 
;lio  Use  of  Schools  l)y  Samuel  S.  Greene,  A.  .M.,  I'nncjrnil  of  the  I'hillip's  Oiainmar  School,  Doston.  This  Work  has 
utrofldy  rr.'trhed  tlio  sixth  edition  In  the  space  of  four  inunths. 

J  Alt  VIS'S  PHYSIOLOGY.    Practical  Physiology ;  for  the  use  of  Schools  and  Fami- 

i.es.    IJy  Kdward  Jarvis,  .M.  I). 

PRIMARY  PHYSIOLOGY,  &c.,  by  Edward  Jarvia,  M.  D.     Half  roan. 

!S<!hool  ( (imniittees  and  'leiichcre  are  invited  to  examine  these  popular  tH>aks. 

JOHNSTON'S  TURNER'S  CHE.MLSTRY.    A  Manual  of  Chemistry,  on  the  basis 

<1  Dr.  Inrner's  L'lnnicnlsof  Clieniislry,  containiiiR.  in  aconilenscd  form,  all  the  n"-!  i.iiportant  Facts  and  Principles 
111  the  Scienre.  IfcsiBiied  as  a  'I'exl-llook  in  ColleRes  and  other  Seminaries  oi  !.,iiin.iiiB.  A  new  Edition.  By  Jolui 
.luhnston.  A.  M.,  Trofes-sor  of  Natural  Science  in  Wesleyan  University. 

JOHNSTON'S  TURNER'S  ELEMENTARY  CHEMISTRY,  for  the  use  of  Com- 
mon Schools.    1  vol.  18ino. 

JOHNSTON'S  NATURAL  PHILOSOPHY.    A  Manual  of  Natural  Philosophy, 

lyimpiled  from  various  sources,  and  ilesiimcd  as  a  Text-book  in  High  Schools  and  Academies.  By  Joi  .i  Johnston,  A.  M., 
Professor  of  Nalunil  Science  iii  the  VVesleyaii  tJniversity. 

JOHNSTON'S  RUDIMENTS  OF  PHILOSOPHY.    1  vol.  ISirio. 
The  above  excellent  works  of  Professor  Johnson  are  lieing  rapidly  introduced  into  both  Pubin!  Schools  and  Private 
Bemiuaries  throughout  the  country. 

swaS¥school  readers. 

THE  PRIMARY  SCHOOL  READER,  PART  I.,  which  is  intended  for  begin- 
ners. It  contains  n  lesson  upon  each  of  the  Elementary  Sounds  in  the  languaire,  Kxercises  in  Syllnbioalinn,  and  n  few 
simple,  interesting  Stories  for  Children ;  and  is  designed  to  aid  the  teacher  in  laying  the  foundation  for  an  accurate  and 
distinct  articulation. 

THE  PRIMARY  SCHOOL  READER,  PART  II.,  contains  Exercises  in  Articu- 
lation, arranged  in  connection  with  easy  Roadine  Lessons.  The  utility  of  this  arrangement  will  be  obvious  to  every 
e>|wrienced  teaciier,  as  it  will  tend  to  secure  daily  attention  to  this  impoitant  subject. 

THE  PRIMARY  SCHOOL  READER,  PART  III.,  is  designed   for  the   First 

Class  in  Primary  Schools,  imd  for  the  Low  jst  Class  in  Grammar  Schools— thus  enabling  the  Pupil  to  review  his  studicc 
after  enloriiiK  the  Grammar  School.  ».>.m.o. 

THE  GRAMMAR  SCHOOL  READER,  is  designed  for  the  Middle  Class  in  Gram- 
mar Schools     It  contains  Kxercises  in  '.rticulatioa,  arranged  in  conaectiim  with  reading  Lessons 

THE  DISTRICT  SCHOOL  READER,  is  designed  i.  the  Highest  Classes  in 
Public  and  Private.  Scliools.  It  contains  Exorcises  in  Articulation,  Pauses.  Iiillectioi  ■  of  the  Voice.  iSm!  ,  with  such 
Rules  and  Smrgestions  as  are  deemed  useful  to  the  icarner.  It  also  contains  a  coniule,  ilossary  of  the  classical  alln. 
aions  winch  occur  in  the  Heading  lessons. 

THE  INSTRUCTIVE  READER.    The  Instructive  Reade  ,  or  a  Course  cf  Reading 

in  Nnlurnl  History,  Scienpi,  and  Literature,  designed  for  the  use  of  Schools.  Bv  William  D.  Swan,  Priiicii>al  of  the 
Mayhew  Grammar  School,  Boston.    12rao.,  p. '..aa  ....i..|.»i  ui  me 

This  popular  series  nf  hoiks  was  compiled  liy  Mr.  William  D.  Swan,  the  v.'8ll-known  Principal  of  the  Mayhew  School, 
Haston.  From  the  very  general  and  rapid  introdwiiinn  intc-  .schools  they  have  obtained  throughout  the  principal  cities 
and  towns  of  the  United  Slates,  it  is  believed  that  they  arc  better  adapted  to  the  wants  of  schoola  than  any  others. 

PARbEVS  COLVMBVS.  The  Life  of  Christopher  Coliimbua;  adapted  to  the  use  of  Bchnols 
with  Questions  for  Eiamiiiation.  and  numerous  Kngravings. 

PARLEY'S  WASHINGTON.  The  Life  nf  General  George  Washington;  adapted  to  the  use 
uf  Schools,  with  Questions  lor  Einniinaiion,  and  iiunierniis  Enu'ravings. 

PARLEY'S  FRANKLIN.  The  Life  of  Benjamin  Franklin;  adapted  to  iho  use  nf  Schools,  with 
Questions  for  r.xammaiion,  an    numerous  Engravings. 

PARLEY'S  AMKRi'  .  EUIIOPE,  ASIA,  AFRI(!A.  ROME,  OREECE,  ISLANDS,  TALKS  O;" 
IHt  SEA,  WINTEft  EVENii.o  TALKS,  JUVENILK  TALES,  ANECDOTES,  SUN,  MOON,  AND  S'l'ARS 

THE  CHILD'S  HISTORY  OF  THE  UW  .  ED  STATES.  By  Charles  A.  Goodr;c^ 
designed  aa  a  i^ral  Book  of  Uiitory  fur  Schools;  illustrated  by  ,r. morons  Engraving  and  Anecdotes. 

(178) 


!  Earliest  limes 

).  Tiiylnr,  I.I,.  D.,nf 
PmiifH:k*H  Iriipruvcd 
irst  AnifincuUt  from 

I. 

1  Langungo ;  or 

xerciseM.  n(lu|it<:J  to 
ua.    This  Wurk  huM 

ools  and  Fami- 
'  roan. 

ry,  on  the  basis 

'acts  Jiliil  PrincipleB 
^'  KUltlun.    Uy  Jolm 

the  use  of  Com- 

ral  Philogophy, 

ohuJohnston,  A.  M., 

ichools  and  Private 


ided  for  begin - 

nbination,  and  a  few 
for  an  accurate  and 

cises  in  Ariicu- 
te  obvious  to  every 

I  for  the  First 
lo  review  his  studie* 

Class  in  Gram- 

test  Classes  in 
Dice.  &c.,  with  such 
)f  tlie  classical  allu- 

jrse  cf  Reading 
an,  Priiici|>al  of  the 

the  Mayhew  School, 
:  the  principal  cities 
Ihan  any  others. 

16  use  of  Schnols, 
laptcd  to  the  use 
lenf  Schools,  with 

JDS,  'J'AI.KS  OI' 

Nn  STARS 

rles  A.  Goodrich, 

!S. 

78) 


;  P%i 


V-t. 


'::^:j^- 


-?**..■ 


■V  ,:\:. 


•?,,Jk 


■■•Mm, 


'"'^tfi^-^'i^''^ 


.'>1T..-        A-. .'»?'.-:  *Vi*A.':4 


t 


VALUABLE  SCHOOL  BOr^KS, 

i^VBI^mD  BY:THOMAS,fOWPEIlTHWAii  &  CO,  PHILAD., 
.     ^iftf  mU  hy  Bookwlier-  generally  throughout  the  United  Hiaks. 


Outlines  of  Bngliah  Hi»«or> . 
Outlines  of  Amorfcnn  Hisioi  v. 
Outlinen  of  Frobch  fliitorv 
OutKiw.  ol"  N«tor*|'Ptiilos.(    hy. 
Outlines  of  A<»|«J«^„V. 
Odtlmcs  ot'Bo^isia^iU, 
Farley's  luV&^^Hptie^ 
Picot's  Fir.ilt  l^(Hi«i;fi 
PiTOt'p  FrsE|cii:^inr 
JPicpi's  Int*rBiaSiii|^, 
PiSk's  HistMjcal  :«?i». 
r  «  iU'b  Hoiet|ti4<|i  Nuiv_^ 


rT-i-TTTui 


,  pHiruU>., 

id  Slates. 


y 


"^fis-y. 


:  ^ffiSKJSSfc'j 


tmJS&ii'Vtl-'risi-rA'i 


